This is a modern-English version of Letters of a Radio-Engineer to His Son, originally written by Mills, John.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

Pl. I.–One of the Lines of Towers at Radio Central
(Courtesy of Radio Corporation of America).
Pl. I.–One of the Lines of Towers at Radio Central
(Courtesy of Radio Corporation of America).
LETTERS OF
A RADIO-ENGINEER
TO HIS SON
Letters from a Radio Engineer to His Son
BY
BY
JOHN MILLS
JOHN MILLS
Engineering Department, Western Electric Company, Inc.,
Author of “Radio-Communication,” “The Realities of
Modern Science,” and “Within the Atom”
Engineering Department, Western Electric Company, Inc.,
Author of “Radio Communication,” “The Realities of
Modern Science,” and “Inside the Atom”

NEW YORK
NYC
HARCOURT, BRACE AND COMPANY
HARCOURT, BRACE & COMPANY
COPYRIGHT, 1922, BY
HARCOURT, BRACE AND COMPANY, INC.
COPYRIGHT, 1922, BY
HARCOURT, BRACE AND COMPANY, INC.
PRINTED IN THE U. S. A. BY
THE QUINN & BODEN COMPANY
RAHWAY, N. J.
PRINTED IN THE U.S.A. BY
THE QUINN & BODEN COMPANY
RAHWAY, N.J.
TO
To
J. M., Jr.
J. M., Jr.
CONTENTS | ||
LETTER | PAGE | |
1 | Electricity and Matter | 3 |
2 | Why a Copper Wire Will Conduct Electricity | 9 |
3 | How a Battery Works | 16 |
4 | The Batteries in Your Radio Set | 27 |
5 | Getting Electrons from a Heated Wire | 34 |
6 | The Audion | 40 |
7 | How to Measure an Electron Stream | 48 |
8 | Electron-Moving-Forces | 57 |
9 | The Audion-Characteristic | 66 |
10 | Condensers and Coils | 77 |
11 | A “C-W” Transmitter | 86 |
12 | Inductance and Capacity | 96 |
13 | Tuning | 112 |
14 | Why and How to Use a Detector | 124 |
15 | Radio-Telephony | 140 |
16 | The Human Voice | 152 |
17 | Grid Batteries and Grid Condensers for Detectors | 165 |
18 | Amplifiers and the Regenerative Circuit | 176 |
19 | The Audion Amplifier and Its Connections | 187 |
20 | Telephone Receivers and Other Electromagnetic Devices | 199 |
21 | Your Receiving Set and How to Experiment | 211 |
22 | High-Powered Radio-Telephone Transmitters | 230 |
23 | Amplification at Intermediate Frequencies | 242 |
24 | By Wire and by Radio | 251 |
Index | 263 |
LIST OF PLATES | ||
I | One of the Lines of Towers at Radio Central | Frontispiece |
II | Bird’s-Eye View of Radio Central | 10 |
III | Dry Battery for Use in Audion Circuits, and also Storage Battery | 27 |
IV | Radiotron | 42 |
V | Variometer and Variable Condenser of the General Radio Company. Voltmeter and Ammeter of the Weston Instrument Company | 91 |
VI | Low-Power Transmitting Tube, U V 202 | 106 |
VII | Photographs of Vibrating Strings | 155 |
VIII | To Illustrate the Mechanism for the Production of the Human Voice | 170 |
IX | Western Electric Loud Speaking Receiver. Crystal Detector Set of the General Electric Co. Audibility Meter of General Radio Co. | 203 |
X | Audio-Frequency Transformer and Banked-Wound Coil | 218 |
XI | Broadcasting Equipment, Developed by the American Telephone and Telegraph Company and the Western Electric Company | 235 |
XII | Broadcasting Station of the American Telephone and Telegraph Company on the Roof of the Walker-Lispenard Bldg. in New York City where the Long-distance Telephone Lines Terminate | 250 |
LETTERS OF A RADIO-ENGINEER TO HIS SON
3LETTER 1
Electricity and Matter
My Dear Son:
My dear son
You are interested in radio-telephony and want me to explain it to you. I’ll do so in the shortest and easiest way which I can devise. The explanation will be the simplest which I can give and still make it possible for you to build and operate your own set and to understand the operation of the large commercial sets to which you will listen.
You’re interested in radio-telephony and want me to explain it to you. I’ll do that in the simplest and quickest way I can. The explanation will be straightforward enough for you to build and operate your own set and to understand how the large commercial sets work that you’ll be listening to.
I’ll write you a series of letters which will contain only what is important in the radio of to-day and those ideas which seem necessary if you are to follow the rapid advances which radio is making. Some of the letters you will find to require a second reading and study. In the case of a few you might postpone a second reading until you have finished those which interest you most. I’ll mark the letters to omit in this way.
I’ll send you a series of letters that will include only what’s important in today’s radio and the ideas that seem necessary for you to keep up with the fast-paced developments in radio. Some of the letters may need a second read and some reflection. For a few, you might want to wait to read them again until you’ve gone through the ones that interest you the most. I’ll indicate which letters to skip like this.
All the letters will be written just as I would talk to you, for I shall draw little sketches as I go along. One of them will tell you how to experiment for yourself. This will be the most interesting of all. You can find plenty of books to tell you how radio sets operate and what to do, but very few except some for advanced students tell you how to experiment for yourself. Not to waste time in your own 4experiments, however, you will need to be quite familiar with the ideas of the other letters.
All the letters will be written just as I would talk to you, and I'll include little sketches along the way. One of them will show you how to experiment on your own. This will be the most interesting part. You can find plenty of books explaining how radio sets work and what to do with them, but very few, aside from those for advanced students, teach you how to experiment for yourself. To avoid wasting time on your own 4 experiments, you'll need to be quite familiar with the concepts from the other letters.
What is a radio set? Copper wires, tinfoil, glass plates, sheets of mica, metal, and wood. Where does it get its ability to work–that is, where does the “energy” come from which runs the set? From batteries or from dynamos. That much you know already, but what is the real reason that we can use copper wires, metal plates, audions, crystals, and batteries to send messages and to receive them?
What is a radio? Copper wires, tinfoil, glass plates, sheets of mica, metal, and wood. Where does it get its ability to work—that is, where does the “energy” come from that powers it? From batteries or dynamos. You already know that much, but what’s the real reason we can use copper wires, metal plates, tubes, crystals, and batteries to send and receive messages?
The reason is that all these things are made of little specks, too tiny ever to see, which we might call specks of electricity. There are only two kinds of specks and we had better give them their right names at once to save time. One kind of speck is called “electron” and the other kind “proton.” How do they differ? They probably differ in size but we don’t yet know so very much about their sizes. They differ in laziness a great deal. One is about 1845 times as lazy as the other. That is, it has eighteen hundred and forty-five times as much inertia as the other. It is harder to get it started but it is just as much harder to get it to stop after it is once started or to change its direction and go a different direction. The proton has the larger inertia. It is the electron which is the easier to start or stop.
The reason is that all these things are made up of tiny particles that are too small to see, which we can call specks of electricity. There are only two types of specks, and we should name them right away to save time. One type is called “electron” and the other is “proton.” How do they differ? They likely differ in size, but we don’t know much about their sizes yet. They differ a lot in terms of inertia. One is about 1845 times more inert than the other, meaning it has eighteen hundred and forty-five times more resistance to changes in motion. It’s harder to get it moving, but it’s just as hard to stop it once it’s moving or to change its direction. The proton has the larger inertia, while the electron is easier to start or stop.
How else do they differ? They differ in their actions. Protons don’t like to associate with other protons but take quite keenly to electrons. And electrons–they go with protons but they won’t associate 5with each other. An electron always likes to be close to a proton. Two is company when one is an electron and the other a proton but three is a crowd always.
How else are they different? They're different in their actions. Protons don’t like to hang out with other protons, but they really like being around electrons. And electrons—they stick with protons but won’t hang out with each other. An electron always prefers to be near a proton. Two is a pair when one is an electron and the other is a proton, but three is always a crowd.
It doesn’t make any difference to a proton what electron it is keeping company with provided only it is an electron and not another proton. All electrons are alike as far as we can tell and so are all protons. That means that all the stuff, or matter, of our world is made up of two kinds of building blocks, and all the blocks of each kind are just alike. Of course you mustn’t think of these blocks as like bricks, for we don’t know their shapes.
It doesn’t matter to a proton which electron it’s paired with, as long as it’s an electron and not another proton. All electrons seem to be the same, just like all protons. This means that everything, or matter, in our world is made up of two types of building blocks, and all the blocks in each type are identical. Of course, you shouldn’t think of these blocks as being like bricks, because we don’t know what shapes they are.
Then there is another reason why you must not think of them as bricks and that is because when you build a house out of bricks each brick must rest on another. Between an electron and any other electron or between two protons or between an electron and a proton there is usually a relatively enormous distance. There is enough space so that lots of other electrons or protons could be fitted in between if only they were willing to get that close together.
Then there’s another reason why you shouldn’t think of them as bricks, and that’s because when you build a house from bricks, each brick must sit on top of another. Between an electron and any other electron, or between two protons, or between an electron and a proton, there’s usually a relatively huge distance. There’s enough space to fit in a lot of other electrons or protons if they were willing to get that close.
Sometimes they do get very close together. I can tell you how if you will imagine four small boys playing tag. Suppose Tom and Dick don’t like to play with each other and run away from each other if they can. Now suppose that Bill and Sam won’t play with each other if they can help it but that either of them will play with Tom or Dick whenever there is a chance. Now suppose Tom and Bill see 6each other; they start running toward each other to get up some sort of a game. But Sam sees Tom at the same time, so he starts running to join him even though Bill is going to be there too. Meanwhile Dick sees Bill and Sam running along and since they are his natural playmates he follows them. In a minute they are all together, and playing a great game; although some of the boys don’t like to play together.
Sometimes they really get close together. Imagine four little boys playing tag. Let’s say Tom and Dick don’t like playing with each other and will run away if they can. Now assume Bill and Sam also avoid playing with each other, but either of them will jump at the chance to play with Tom or Dick. Now picture Tom and Bill spotting each other; they start running toward each other to kick off some kind of game. But Sam notices Tom at the same time, so he rushes over to join him, even though Bill will be there too. Meanwhile, Dick sees Bill and Sam running and, since they’re his usual playmates, he follows them. In a moment, they’re all together, having a blast, even though some of the boys don’t like playing together.
Whenever there is a group of protons and electrons playing together we have what we call an “atom.” There are about ninety different games which electrons and protons can play, that is ninety different kinds of atoms. These games differ in the number of electrons and protons who play and in the way they arrange themselves. Larger games can be formed if a number of atoms join together. Then there is a “molecule.” Of molecules there are as many kinds as there are different substances in the world. It takes a lot of molecules together to form something big enough to see, for even the largest molecule, that of starch, is much too small to be seen by itself with the best possible microscope.
Whenever a group of protons and electrons interact, we have what we call an “atom.” There are about ninety different combinations that electrons and protons can form, which means there are ninety different kinds of atoms. These combinations vary in the number of electrons and protons involved and in how they arrange themselves. Larger combinations can form when several atoms come together. This is what we refer to as a “molecule.” There are as many types of molecules as there are substances in the world. It takes a lot of molecules to create something large enough to see, since even the largest molecule, starch, is still way too small to be seen individually with the best microscope available.
What sort of a molecule is formed will depend upon how many and what kinds of atoms group together to play the larger game. Whenever there is a big game it doesn’t mean that the little atomic groups which enter into it are all changed around. They keep together like a troop of boy scouts in a grand picnic in which lots of troops are present. At any rate they keep together enough so that we 7can still call them a group, that is an atom, even though they do adapt their game somewhat so as to fit in with other groups–that is with other atoms.
What kind of molecule is created depends on how many and what types of atoms come together to participate in the bigger picture. Just because there's a larger game going on doesn’t mean that the smaller atomic groups involved all get mixed up. They stick together like a troop of boy scouts at a big picnic with lots of troops around. In any case, they stay grouped enough that we 7can still refer to them as a group, which is an atom, even though they do adjust their behavior a bit to connect with other groups—that is, with other atoms.
What will the kind of atom depend upon? It will depend upon how many electrons and protons are grouped together in it to play their little game. How any atom behaves so far as associating with other groups or atoms will depend upon what sort of a game its own electrons and protons are playing.
What does the type of atom depend on? It depends on how many electrons and protons are grouped together within it to play their little game. How any atom interacts with other groups or atoms will depend on what kind of game its own electrons and protons are playing.
Now the simplest kind of a game that can be played, and the one with the smallest number of electrons and protons, is that played by a single proton and a single electron. I don’t know just how it is played but I should guess that they sort of chase each other around in circles. At any rate I do know that the atom called “hydrogen” is formed by just one proton and one electron. Suppose they were magnified until they were as large as the moon and the earth. Then they would be just about as far apart but the smaller one would be the proton.
Now, the simplest type of game that can be played, and the one with the fewest electrons and protons, is the one that involves a single proton and a single electron. I'm not exactly sure how it's played, but I guess they sort of chase each other in circles. Anyway, I do know that the atom called “hydrogen” is made up of just one proton and one electron. Imagine if they were magnified to the size of the moon and the earth. They would be about the same distance apart, but the smaller one would be the proton.
That hydrogen atom is responsible for lots of interesting things for it is a great one to join with other atoms. We don’t often find it by itself although we can make it change its partners and go from one molecule to another very easily. That is what happens every time you stain anything with acid. A hydrogen atom leaves a molecule of the acid and then it isn’t acid any more. What remains isn’t a happy group either for it has lost some of its playfellows. The hydrogen goes and joins with the stuff which gets stained. But it doesn’t join with the 8whole molecule; it picks out part of it to associate with and that leaves the other part to take the place of the hydrogen in the original molecule of acid from which it came. Many of the actions which we call chemistry are merely the result of such changes of atoms from one molecule to another.
That hydrogen atom is responsible for a lot of interesting things because it's great at bonding with other atoms. We don’t often find it on its own, but it can easily switch partners and move from one molecule to another. That’s what happens every time you stain something with acid. A hydrogen atom leaves a molecule of the acid, and then it’s not acid anymore. What’s left isn’t really happy either since it has lost some of its companions. The hydrogen goes and bonds with the material that gets stained. But it doesn’t bond with the whole molecule; it selects part of it to associate with, and that leaves the other part to take the place of the hydrogen in the original acid molecule it came from. Many of the processes we refer to as chemistry are simply the result of such changes of atoms from one molecule to another.
Not only does the hydrogen atom like to associate in a larger game with other kinds of atoms but it likes to do so with one of its own kind. When it does we have a molecule of hydrogen gas, the same gas as is used in balloons.
Not only does the hydrogen atom prefer to team up with other types of atoms, but it also enjoys bonding with its own kind. When it does, we get a molecule of hydrogen gas, the same gas used in balloons.
We haven’t seemed to get very far yet toward radio but you can see how we shall when I tell you that next time I shall write of more complicated games such as are played in the atoms of copper which form the wires of radio sets and of how these wires can do what we call “carrying an electric current.”
We haven’t seemed to make much progress towards radio yet, but you can see how we will when I tell you that next time I’ll write about more complex games, like those happening in the copper atoms that make up the wires of radio sets, and how these wires can do what we call “carrying an electric current.”
9LETTER 2
WHY A COPPER WIRE CAN CONDUCT ELECTRICITY
My Dear Young Atomist:
You have learned that the simplest group which can be formed by protons and electrons is one proton and one electron chasing each other around in a fast game. This group is called an atom of hydrogen. A molecule of hydrogen is two of these groups together.
You’ve learned that the simplest group made up of protons and electrons is one proton and one electron chasing each other in a quick game. This group is called a hydrogen atom. A hydrogen molecule consists of two of these groups combined.
All the other possible kinds of groups are more complicated. The next simplest is that of the atom of helium. Helium is a gas of which small quantities are obtained from certain oil wells and there isn’t very much of it to be obtained. It is an inert gas, as we call it, because it won’t burn or combine with anything else. It doesn’t care to enter into the larger games of molecular groups. It is satisfied to be as it is, so that it isn’t much use in chemistry because you can’t make anything else out of it. That’s the reason why it is so highly recommended for filling balloons or airships, because it cannot burn or explode. It is not as light as hydrogen but it serves quite well for making balloons buoyant in air.
All the other possible types of groups are more complex. The next simplest is the helium atom. Helium is a gas that small amounts can be found in certain oil wells, and there isn’t a lot of it available. It’s an inert gas, which means it won’t burn or combine with anything else. It doesn’t want to join in the larger activities of molecular groups. It’s content to remain as it is, which makes it not very useful in chemistry because you can’t create anything else from it. That’s why it’s often recommended for filling balloons or airships, since it can’t catch fire or explode. It’s not as light as hydrogen, but it works quite well for making balloons float in the air.
This helium atom is made up of four electrons and four protons. Right at the center there is a small closely crowded group which contains all the protons 10and two of the electrons. The other two electrons play around quite a little way from this inner group. It will make our explanations easier if we learn to call this inner group “the nucleus” of the atom. It is the center of the atom and the other two electrons play around about it just as the earth and Mars and the other planets play or revolve about the sun as a center. That is why we shall call these two electrons “planetary electrons.”
This helium atom consists of four electrons and four protons. At the center, there’s a small, tightly packed group that contains all the protons 10 and two of the electrons. The other two electrons move around quite a bit away from this inner group. To make our explanations clearer, we’ll refer to this inner group as “the nucleus” of the atom. It’s the atom’s center, and the other two electrons orbit around it, similar to how Earth, Mars, and the other planets orbit the Sun. That’s why we’ll call these two electrons “planetary electrons.”
There are about ninety different kinds of atoms and they all have names. Some of them are more familiar than hydrogen and helium. For example, there is the iron atom, the copper atom, the sulphur atom and so on. Some of these atoms you ought to know and so, before telling you more of how atoms are formed by protons and electrons, I am going to write down the names of some of the atoms which we have in the earth and rocks of our world, in the water of the oceans, and in the air above.
There are about ninety different types of atoms, and they all have names. Some of them are more well-known than hydrogen and helium. For example, there’s iron, copper, sulfur, and so on. Some of these atoms you should know, so before I explain more about how atoms are formed by protons and electrons, I'm going to list the names of some of the atoms that we find in the earth and rocks of our world, in the water of the oceans, and in the air above.
Start first with air. It is a mixture of several kinds of gases. Each gas is a different kind of atom. There is just a slight trace of hydrogen and a very small amount of helium and of some other gases which I won’t bother you with learning. Most of the air, however, is nitrogen, about 78 percent in fact and almost all the rest is oxygen. About 20.8 percent is oxygen so that all the gases other than these two make up only about 1.2 percent of the atmosphere in which we live.
Start first with air. It's a mix of different gases. Each gas consists of different types of atoms. There's just a tiny bit of hydrogen and a very small amount of helium, along with some other gases that I won't make you learn about. Most of the air, though, is nitrogen—about 78 percent, in fact—and almost all the rest is oxygen. About 20.8 percent is oxygen, so all the gases other than these two make up only around 1.2 percent of the atmosphere we live in.

Pl. II.–Bird’s-eye View of Radio Central
(Courtesy of Radio Corporation of America).
Pl. II.–Bird’s-eye View of Radio Central
(Courtesy of Radio Corporation of America).
11The earth and rocks also contain a great deal of oxygen; about 47.3 percent of the atoms which form earth and rocks are oxygen atoms. About half of the rest of the atoms are of a kind called silicon. Sand is made up of atoms of silicon and oxygen and you know how much sand there is. About 27.7 percent of the earth and its rocks is silicon. The next most important kind of atom in the earth is aluminum and after that iron and then calcium. Here is the way they run in percentages: Aluminum 7.8 percent; iron 4.5 percent; calcium 3.5 percent; sodium 2.4 percent; potassium 2.4 percent; magnesium 2.2 percent. Besides these which are most important there is about 0.2 percent of hydrogen and the same amount of carbon. Then there is a little phosphorus, a little sulphur, a little fluorine, and small amounts of all of the rest of the different kinds of atoms.
11The earth and rocks have a lot of oxygen; about 47.3 percent of the atoms that make up the earth and rocks are oxygen atoms. About half of the other atoms are a type called silicon. Sand consists of atoms of silicon and oxygen, and you know how much sand there is. About 27.7 percent of the earth and its rocks is silicon. The next most important type of atom in the earth is aluminum, followed by iron and then calcium. Here’s the breakdown in percentages: Aluminum 7.8 percent; iron 4.5 percent; calcium 3.5 percent; sodium 2.4 percent; potassium 2.4 percent; magnesium 2.2 percent. In addition to these key elements, there’s about 0.2 percent of hydrogen and the same amount of carbon. Then there's a bit of phosphorus, a bit of sulfur, a bit of fluorine, and small amounts of other various types of atoms.
Sea water is mostly oxygen and hydrogen, about 85.8 percent of oxygen and 10.7 percent of hydrogen. That is what you would expect for water is made up of molecules which in turn are formed by two atoms of hydrogen and one atom of oxygen. The oxygen atom is about sixteen times as heavy as the hydrogen atom. However, for every oxygen atom there are two hydrogen atoms so that for every pound of hydrogen in water there are about eight pounds of oxygen. That is why there is about eight times as high a percentage of oxygen in sea water as there is of hydrogen.
Sea water is mostly oxygen and hydrogen, with about 85.8 percent being oxygen and 10.7 percent hydrogen. This aligns with the composition of water, which consists of molecules made up of two hydrogen atoms and one oxygen atom. The oxygen atom is roughly sixteen times heavier than the hydrogen atom. However, since there are two hydrogen atoms for each oxygen atom, for every pound of hydrogen in water, there are about eight pounds of oxygen. That’s why the percentage of oxygen in sea water is roughly eight times higher than that of hydrogen.
Most of sea water, therefore, is just water, that is, pure water. But it contains some other substances as well and the best known of these is salt. Salt is a 12substance the molecules of which contain atoms of sodium and of chlorine. That is why sea water is about 1.1 percent sodium and about 2.1 percent chlorine. There are some other kinds of atoms in sea water, as you would expect, for it gets all the substances which the waters of the earth dissolve and carry down to it but they are unimportant in amounts.
Most of seawater is simply water, or pure water. However, it also contains other substances, the most well-known of which is salt. Salt is a 12substance made up of molecules that include sodium and chlorine atoms. That’s why seawater is about 1.1 percent sodium and around 2.1 percent chlorine. There are some other types of atoms in seawater, as you would expect, since it collects all the substances that Earth's waters dissolve and transport, but their amounts are not significant.
Now we know something about the names of the important kinds of atoms and can take up again the question of how they are formed by protons and electrons. No matter what kind of atom we are dealing with we always have a nucleus or center and some electrons playing around that nucleus like tiny planets. The only differences between one kind of atom and any other kind are differences in the nucleus and differences in the number and arrangement of the planetary electrons which are playing about the nucleus.
Now we know a bit about the names of the key types of atoms and can revisit the question of how they are made up of protons and electrons. Regardless of the type of atom we're talking about, there's always a nucleus or center, with some electrons orbiting around that nucleus like tiny planets. The only differences between one type of atom and another are in the nucleus and the number and arrangement of the orbital electrons surrounding the nucleus.
No matter what kind of atom we are considering there is always in it just as many electrons as protons. For example, the iron atom is formed by a nucleus and twenty-six electrons playing around it. The copper atom has twenty-nine electrons as tiny planets to its nucleus. What does that mean about its nucleus? That there are twenty-nine more protons in the nucleus than there are electrons. Silver has even more planetary electrons, for it has 47. Radium has 88 and the heaviest atom of all, that of uranium, has 92.
No matter what type of atom we're looking at, it always has the same number of electrons as protons. For instance, the iron atom consists of a nucleus with twenty-six electrons orbiting around it. The copper atom has twenty-nine electrons like tiny planets surrounding its nucleus. What does that say about its nucleus? It means there are twenty-nine more protons in the nucleus than there are electrons. Silver has even more orbiting electrons, with 47. Radium has 88, and the heaviest atom of all, uranium, has 92.
We might use numbers for the different kinds of 13atoms instead of names if we wanted to do so. We could describe any kind of atom by telling how many planetary electrons there were in it. For example, hydrogen would be number 1, helium number 2, lithium of which you perhaps never heard, would be number 3, and so on. Oxygen is 8, sodium is 11, chlorine is 17, iron 26, and copper 29. For each kind of atom there is a number. Let’s call that number its atomic number.
We could use numbers for different types of 13 atoms instead of names if we wanted to. We can identify any type of atom by noting how many planetary electrons it has. For instance, hydrogen is number 1, helium is number 2, lithium, which you might not have heard of, is number 3, and so on. Oxygen is 8, sodium is 11, chlorine is 17, iron is 26, and copper is 29. Each type of atom has a specific number. Let's call that number its atomic number.
Now let’s see what the atomic number tells us. Take copper, for example, which is number 29. In each atom of copper there are 29 electrons playing around the nucleus. The nucleus itself is a little inner group of electrons and protons, but there are more protons than electrons in it; twenty-nine more in fact. In an atom there is always an extra proton in the nucleus for each planetary electron. That makes the total number of protons and electrons the same.
Now let’s take a look at what the atomic number means. For instance, copper, which has the atomic number 29. Each copper atom has 29 electrons moving around its nucleus. The nucleus is a small core made up of electrons and protons, but it has more protons than electrons; specifically, twenty-nine more. In an atom, there's always one extra proton in the nucleus for each electron orbiting around it. This keeps the total number of protons and electrons equal.
About the nucleus of a copper atom there are playing 29 electrons just as if the nucleus was a teacher responsible for 29 children who were out in the play yard. There is one very funny thing about it all, however, and that is that we must think of the scholars as if they were all just alike so that the teacher couldn’t tell one from the other. Electrons are all alike, you remember. All the teacher or nucleus cares for is that there shall be just the right number playing around her. You could bring a boy in from some other play ground and the teacher couldn’t tell that he was a stranger but she would 14know that something was the matter for there would be one too many in her group. She is responsible for just 29 scholars, and the nucleus of the copper atom is responsible for just 29 electrons. It doesn’t make any difference where these electrons come from provided there are always just 29 playing around the nucleus. If there are more or less than 29 something peculiar will happen.
About the nucleus of a copper atom, there are 29 electrons playing around it, like a teacher supervising 29 kids in a playground. There’s one funny thing about it, though: we have to think of the kids as if they were all identical, so the teacher can’t distinguish one from another. Electrons are the same, remember. All the teacher, or nucleus, cares about is having the exact right number of kids playing around her. You could bring in a boy from another playground, and the teacher wouldn’t know he was a stranger, but she would know something was off because there would be one too many in her group. She’s responsible for just 29 kids, and the nucleus of the copper atom is responsible for exactly 29 electrons. It doesn’t matter where these electrons come from as long as there are always 29 surrounding the nucleus. If there are more or less than 29, something unusual will happen.
We shall see later what might happen, but first let’s think of an enormous lot of atoms such as there would be in a copper wire. A small copper wire will have in it billions of copper atoms, each with its planetary electrons playing their invisible game about their own nucleus. There is quite a little distance in any atom between the nucleus and any of the electrons for which it is responsible. There is usually a greater distance still between one atomic group and any other.
We will see later what could happen, but first, let's consider a huge number of atoms, like those in a copper wire. A small copper wire contains billions of copper atoms, each with its electrons moving around their nucleus in an unseen dance. There's quite a bit of space between the nucleus and the electrons it influences. There’s usually even more distance between one group of atoms and another.
On the whole the electrons hold pretty close to their own circles about their own nuclei. There is always some tendency to run away and play in some other group. With 29 electrons it’s no wonder if sometimes one goes wandering off and finally gets into the game about some other nucleus. Of course, an electron from some other atom may come wandering along and take the place just left vacant, so that nucleus is satisfied.
On the whole, the electrons stay pretty close to their own orbits around their nuclei. There’s always a tendency for them to break away and join another group. With 29 electrons, it’s not surprising if one occasionally goes off and ends up interacting with a different nucleus. Of course, an electron from another atom might come along and fill the spot that was just vacated, so that nucleus is satisfied.
It’s these wandering electrons which are affected when a battery is connected to a copper wire. Every single electron which is away from its home group, and wandering around, is sent scampering along toward the end of the wire which is connected to the positive plate or terminal of the battery and away from the negative plate. That’s what the battery does to them for being away from home; it drives them along the wire. There’s a regular stream or procession of them from the negative end of the wire toward the positive. When we have a stream of electrons like this we say we have a current of electricity.
It’s these wandering electrons that get affected when you connect a battery to a copper wire. Every single electron that's away from its home group and drifting around gets pushed toward the end of the wire that's connected to the positive terminal of the battery and away from the negative terminal. That’s what the battery does to them for being away from home; it drives them along the wire. There’s a constant flow or procession of them from the negative end of the wire to the positive end. When we have a flow of electrons like this, we say we have an electric current.
We’ll need to learn more later about a current of electricity but one of the first things we ought to know is how a battery is made and why it affects these wandering electrons in the copper wire. That’s what I shall tell you in my next letter.[1]
We’ll need to learn more later about electricity, but one of the first things we should know is how a battery is made and why it influences the moving electrons in the copper wire. That’s what I’ll explain in my next letter.[1]
The reader who wishes the shortest path to the construction and operation of a radio set should omit the next two letters.
The reader who wants the quickest way to build and operate a radio should skip the next two letters.
16LETTER 3
HOW A BATTERY FUNCTIONS
(This letter may be omitted on the first reading.)
(This letter can be skipped on the first read.)
My Dear Boy:
My Dear Boy
When I was a boy we used to make our own batteries for our experiments. That was before storage batteries became as widely used as they are to-day when everybody has one in the starting system of his automobile. That was also before the day of the small dry battery such as we use in pocket flash lights. The batteries which we made were like those which they used on telegraph systems, and were sometimes called “gravity” batteries. Of course, we tried several kinds and I believe I got quite a little acid around the house at one time or another. I’ll tell you about only one kind but I shall use the words “electron,” “proton,” “nucleus,” “atom,” and “molecule,” about some of which nothing was known when I was a boy.
When I was a kid, we used to make our own batteries for our experiments. That was before storage batteries became as common as they are today, when everyone has one in their car’s starting system. It was also before the small dry batteries we now use in pocket flashlights. The batteries we made were similar to those used in telegraph systems and were sometimes called “gravity” batteries. Of course, we tried several types, and I believe I spilled quite a bit of acid around the house at one point or another. I’ll share about just one kind, but I’ll use the terms “electron,” “proton,” “nucleus,” “atom,” and “molecule,” some of which weren’t even known when I was a kid.
We used a straight-sided glass jar which would hold about a gallon. On the bottom we set a star shaped arrangement made of sheets of copper with a long wire soldered to it so as to reach up out of the jar. Then we poured in a solution of copper sulphate until the jar was about half full. This solution was made by dissolving in water crystals of “blue vitriol” which we bought at the drug store.
We used a straight-sided glass jar that could hold about a gallon. At the bottom, we arranged sheets of copper in a star shape with a long wire soldered to it, allowing it to reach out of the jar. Then we poured in a copper sulfate solution until the jar was about half full. We made this solution by dissolving crystals of "blue vitriol," which we bought at the pharmacy, in water.
When it dissolves in water the molecules of the blue vitriol go wandering out into the spaces between the water molecules. But that isn’t all that happens or the most important thing for one who is interested in making a battery.
When it dissolves in water, the molecules of blue vitriol spread out into the spaces between the water molecules. But that’s not the only thing that happens, nor is it the most important thing for someone interested in making a battery.
Each molecule is formed by six atoms, that is by six little groups of electrons playing about six little nuclei. About each nucleus there is going on a game but some of the electrons are playing in the game about their own nucleus and at the same time taking some part in the game which is going on around one of the other nuclei. That’s why the groups or atoms stay together as a molecule. When the molecules wander out into the spaces between the water molecules something happens to this complicated game.
Each molecule is made up of six atoms, which means there are six little clusters of electrons interacting with six tiny nuclei. Around each nucleus, there’s a sort of game happening where some of the electrons are focused on their own nucleus while also participating in the interactions around other nuclei. This is why the groups or atoms stay bonded together as a molecule. When the molecules drift into the spaces between the water molecules, something changes in this complex game.
It will be easiest to see what sort of thing happens if we talk about a molecule of ordinary table salt, for that has only two atoms in it. One atom is sodium and one is chlorine. The sodium molecule has eleven electrons playing around its nucleus. Fairly close to the nucleus there are two electrons. Then farther away there are eight more and these are having a perfect game. Then still farther away from the nucleus there is a single lonely electron.
It will be easiest to understand what happens if we talk about a molecule of regular table salt, since it has only two atoms. One atom is sodium and the other is chlorine. The sodium atom has eleven electrons orbiting its nucleus. Two electrons are relatively close to the nucleus. Then, farther out, there are eight more, and they are in a stable arrangement. Finally, even farther from the nucleus, there is one lone electron.
The atom of chlorine has seventeen electrons which 18play about its nucleus. Close to the nucleus there are two. A little farther away there are eight just as there are in the sodium atom. Then still farther away there are seven.
The chlorine atom has seventeen electrons that 18orbit around its nucleus. Near the nucleus, there are two electrons. A bit further out, there are eight, just like in the sodium atom. Then, even farther out, there are seven.
I am going to draw a picture (Fig. 1) to show what I mean, but you must remember that these electrons are not all in the same plane as if they lay on a sheet of paper, but are scattered all around just as they would be if they were specks on a ball.
I’m going to create a picture (Fig. 1) to illustrate my point, but you need to keep in mind that these electrons aren’t all in the same plane like they’re on a sheet of paper; they’re spread out all around, similar to how specks would appear on a ball.

You see that the sodium atom has one lonely electron which hasn’t any play fellows and that the chlorine atom has seven in its outside circle. It appears that eight would make a much better game. Suppose that extra electron in the sodium atom goes over and plays with those in the chlorine atom so as to make eight in the outside group as I have shown Fig. 2. That will be all right as long as it doesn’t get out of sight of its own nucleus because you remember that the sodium nucleus is responsible for eleven electrons. The lonely electron of the sodium atom needn’t be lonely any more if it can persuade its nucleus to stay so close to the chlorine atom that it can play in the outer circle of the chlorine atom.
You can see that the sodium atom has one lone electron that doesn’t have any companions, while the chlorine atom has seven in its outer shell. It seems that having eight would create a much better balance. If that extra electron from the sodium atom moves over to join the ones in the chlorine atom, it creates a total of eight in the outer shell, as I’ve illustrated in Fig. 2. That’s fine as long as it stays in sight of its own nucleus because, as you know, the sodium nucleus is responsible for eleven electrons. The lonely electron in the sodium atom doesn’t have to be alone anymore if it can convince its nucleus to stay close enough to the chlorine atom so it can be part of the chlorine atom’s outer shell.

19The outer circle of the chlorine atom will then have a better game, for it will have just the eight that makes a perfect game. This can happen if the chlorine atom will stay close enough to the sodium atom so that the outermost electron of the sodium atom can play in the chlorine circle. You see everything will be satisfactory if an electron can be shared by the two atoms. That can happen only if the two atoms stay together; that is, if they form a molecule. That’s why there are molecules and that’s what I meant when I spoke of the molecule as a big game played by the electrons of two or more atoms.
19The outer circle of the chlorine atom will have a better configuration because it will have the eight electrons that create a stable arrangement. This happens when the chlorine atom remains close enough to the sodium atom for the sodium's outermost electron to join the chlorine's circle. Everything works out well if an electron can be shared between the two atoms. This can only occur if the atoms stay together, meaning they form a molecule. That’s why molecules exist, and that’s what I meant when I referred to the molecule as a cooperative interaction between the electrons of two or more atoms.
This molecule which is formed by a sodium atom and a chlorine atom is called a molecule of sodium chloride by chemists and a molecule of salt by most every one who eats it. Something strange happens when it dissolves. It wanders around between the water molecules and for some reason or other–we don’t know exactly why–it decides to split up again into sodium and chlorine but it can’t quite do it. The electron which joined the game about the chlorine nucleus won’t leave it. The result is that the nucleus of the sodium atom gets away but it leaves this one electron behind.
This molecule, made up of a sodium atom and a chlorine atom, is known as sodium chloride by scientists and simply salt by most people who consume it. Something interesting happens when it dissolves. It moves around among the water molecules and, for some unknown reason, it tries to split back into sodium and chlorine, but it can't fully do it. The electron that got involved with the chlorine nucleus won't leave. The outcome is that the nucleus of the sodium atom escapes, but it leaves this one electron behind.
What gets away isn’t a sodium atom for it has one too few electrons; and what remains behind isn’t a chlorine atom for it has one too many electrons. We call these new groups “ions” from a Greek word which means “to go” for they do go, wandering off into the spaces between the water 20molecules. Fig. 3 gives you an idea of what happens.
What gets lost isn’t a sodium atom because it has one electron too few; and what’s left isn’t a chlorine atom because it has one electron too many. We call these new groups “ions,” a term from Greek that means “to go,” because they do move, wandering off into the spaces between the water 20 molecules. Fig. 3 shows you what happens.
You remember that in an atom there are always just as many protons as electrons. In this sodium ion which is formed when the nucleus of the sodium atom breaks away but leaves behind one planetary electron, there is then one more proton than there are electrons. Because it has an extra proton, which hasn’t any electron to associate with, we call it a plus ion or a “positive ion.” Similarly we call the chlorine ion, which has one less proton than it has electrons, a minus or “negative ion.”
You know that in an atom, there are always the same number of protons as electrons. In this sodium ion, which is created when the nucleus of the sodium atom separates but leaves behind one planetary electron, there ends up being one more proton than electrons. Since it has an extra proton that doesn’t have an electron to pair with, we refer to it as a positive ion or a “plus ion.” Similarly, we refer to the chlorine ion, which has one fewer proton than electrons, as a negative ion or a “minus ion.”

Now, despite the fact that these ions broke away from each other they aren’t really satisfied. Any time that the sodium ion can find an electron to take the place of the one it lost it will welcome it. That is, the sodium ion will want to go toward places where there are extra electrons. In the same way the chlorine ion will go toward places where electrons are wanted as if it could satisfy its guilty conscience by giving up the electron which it stole from the sodium atom, or at least by giving away some other electron, for they are all alike anyway.
Now, even though these ions have separated, they're not really happy. Whenever the sodium ion finds an electron to replace the one it lost, it'll gladly take it. In other words, the sodium ion will move toward areas with extra electrons. Similarly, the chlorine ion will head toward places where electrons are needed, as if giving up the electron it took from the sodium atom could ease its guilty conscience, or at least offering another electron, since they’re all the same anyway.
Sometimes a positive sodium ion and a negative chlorine ion meet in their wanderings in the solution and both get satisfied by forming a molecule 21again. Even so they don’t stay together long before they split apart and start wandering again. That’s what goes on over and over again, millions of times, when you dissolve a little salt in a glass of water.
Sometimes a positive sodium ion and a negative chlorine ion come together in the solution and both feel satisfied by forming a molecule 21 again. However, they don’t stay together for long before they separate and start moving around again. This process happens repeatedly, millions of times, when you dissolve a little salt in a glass of water.
Now we can see what happens when copper sulphate dissolves. The copper atom has twenty-nine electrons about its nucleus and all except two of these are nicely grouped for playing their games about the nucleus. Two of the electrons are rather out of the game, and are unsatisfied. They play with the electrons of the part of the molecule which is called “sulphate,” that is, the part formed by the sulphur atom and the four oxygen atoms. These five atoms of the sulphate part stay together very well and so we treat them as a group.
Now we can observe what happens when copper sulfate dissolves. The copper atom has twenty-nine electrons around its nucleus, and all but two of these electrons are nicely arranged for their roles around the nucleus. Two of the electrons are somewhat left out and are not satisfied. They interact with the electrons of the part of the molecule known as "sulfate," which is made up of the sulfur atom and the four oxygen atoms. These five atoms in the sulfate part stay together quite well, so we consider them as a group.
The sulphate group and the copper atom stay together as long as they are not in solution but when they are, they act very much like the sodium and chlorine which I just described. The molecule splits up into two ions, one positive and one negative. The positive ion is the copper part except that two of the electrons which really belong to a copper atom got left behind because the sulphate part wouldn’t give them up. The rest of the molecule is the negative ion.
The sulfate group and the copper atom stick together as long as they aren't in solution, but when they are, they behave similarly to the sodium and chlorine I just mentioned. The molecule breaks apart into two ions, one positive and one negative. The positive ion is the copper part, except that two of the electrons that actually belong to a copper atom are left behind because the sulfate part won’t give them up. The rest of the molecule forms the negative ion.
The copper ion is a copper atom which has lost two electrons. The sulphate ion is a combination of one sulphur atom, four oxygen atoms and two electrons which it stole from the copper atom. Just as the sodium ion is unsatisfied because in it there is one more proton than there are electrons, so the copper ion is unsatisfied. As a matter of fact it is twice 22as badly unsatisfied. It has two more protons than it has electrons. We say it has twice the “electrical charge” of the sodium ion.
The copper ion is a copper atom that has lost two electrons. The sulfate ion is made up of one sulfur atom, four oxygen atoms, and two electrons that it took from the copper atom. Just like the sodium ion is unbalanced because it has one more proton than electrons, the copper ion is also unbalanced. In fact, it is twice 22 as unbalanced. It has two more protons than electrons. We say it has twice the “electrical charge” of the sodium ion.
Just like a sodium ion the copper ion will tend to go toward any place where there are extra electrons which it can get to satisfy its own needs. In much the same way the sulphate ion will go toward places where it can give up its two extra electrons. Sometimes, of course, as ions of these two kinds wander about between the water molecules, they meet and satisfy each other by forming a molecule of copper sulphate. But if they do they will split apart later on; that is, they will “dissociate” as we should say.
Just like a sodium ion, the copper ion will usually move toward areas where there are extra electrons it can access to meet its own needs. Similarly, the sulfate ion will head toward places where it can give up its two extra electrons. Sometimes, as these ions float around among the water molecules, they encounter each other and combine to form a molecule of copper sulfate. However, if they do, they will separate later on; in other words, they will "dissociate," as we would say.
Now let’s go on with the kind of batteries I used to make as a boy. You can see that in the solution of copper sulphate at the bottom of the jar there was always present a lot of positive copper ions and of negative sulphate ions.
Now let’s continue with the type of batteries I used to make as a kid. You can see that in the copper sulfate solution at the bottom of the jar, there were always a lot of positive copper ions and negative sulfate ions present.
On top of this solution of copper sulphate I poured very carefully a weak solution of sulphuric acid. As I told you, an acid always has hydrogen in its molecules. Sulphuric acid has molecules formed by two hydrogen atoms and one of the groups which we decided to call sulphate. A better name for this acid would be hydrogen sulphate for that would imply that its molecule is the same as one of copper sulphate, except that the place of the copper is taken by two atoms of hydrogen. It takes two atoms of hydrogen because the copper atom has two lonely electrons while a hydrogen atom only has one. It takes two electrons to fill up the game which the 23electrons of the sulphate group are playing. If it can get these from a single atom, all right; but if it has to get one from each of two atoms, it will do it that way.
On top of this copper sulfate solution, I carefully poured a diluted sulfuric acid solution. As I mentioned, an acid always contains hydrogen in its molecules. Sulfuric acid consists of molecules made up of two hydrogen atoms and a group that we decided to call sulfate. A more accurate name for this acid would be hydrogen sulfate because it suggests that its molecule is similar to that of copper sulfate, except that the copper is replaced by two hydrogen atoms. It requires two hydrogen atoms because the copper atom has two unpaired electrons, while a hydrogen atom has only one. It takes two electrons to complete the configuration that the 23 electrons of the sulfate group are participating in. If it can acquire these from one atom, great; but if it needs to take one from each of two atoms, it will do it that way.
I remember when I mixed the sulphuric acid with water that I learned to pour the acid into the water and not the other way around. Spatterings of sulphuric acid are not good for hands or clothes. With this solution I filled the jar almost to the top and then hung over the edge a sort of a crow’s foot shape of cast zinc. The zinc reached down into the sulphuric acid solution. There was a binding post on it to which a wire could be connected. This wire and the one which came from the plate of copper at the bottom were the two terminals of the battery. We called the wire from the copper “positive” and the one from the zinc “negative.”
I remember when I mixed sulfuric acid with water, I learned to pour the acid into the water and not the other way around. Spills of sulfuric acid are not good for your hands or clothes. With this solution, I filled the jar almost to the top and then hung a kind of crow’s foot shape made of cast zinc over the edge. The zinc dipped down into the sulfuric acid solution. There was a binding post on it where a wire could be connected. This wire and the one from the copper plate at the bottom were the two terminals of the battery. We called the wire from the copper “positive” and the one from the zinc “negative.”
Now we shall see why and how the battery worked. The molecules of sulphuric acid dissociate in solution just as do those of copper sulphate. When sulphuric acid molecules split, the sulphate part goes away with two electrons which don’t belong to it and each of the hydrogen atoms goes away by itself but without its electron. We call each a “hydrogen ion” but you can see that each is a single proton.
Now we'll explore why and how the battery worked. The molecules of sulfuric acid separate in solution just like those of copper sulfate. When sulfuric acid molecules break apart, the sulfate part leaves with two electrons that aren't its own, and each of the hydrogen atoms leaves on its own but without its electron. We refer to each as a "hydrogen ion," but you can see that each is a single proton.
In the two solutions are pieces of zinc and copper. Zinc is like all the rest of the metals in one way. Atoms of metals always have lonely electrons for which there doesn’t seem to be room in the game which is going on around their nuclei. Copper as we saw has two lonely electrons in each atom. Zinc 24also has two. Some metals have one and some two and some even more lonely electrons in each atom.
In the two solutions, there are pieces of zinc and copper. Zinc is similar to other metals in one way. Atoms of metals always have lonely electrons that don’t seem to fit in with the activity happening around their nuclei. Copper, as we saw, has two lonely electrons in each atom. Zinc 24 also has two. Some metals have one, some have two, and some even have more lonely electrons in each atom.
What happens then is this. The sulphate ions wandering around in the weak solution of sulphuric acid come along beside the zinc plate and beckon to its atoms. The sulphate ions had a great deal rather play the game called “zinc sulphate” than the game called “hydrogen sulphate.” So the zinc atoms leave their places to join with the sulphate ions. But wait a minute! The sulphate ions have two extra electrons which they kept from the hydrogen atoms. They don’t need the two lonely electrons which each zinc atom could bring and so the zinc atom leaves behind it these unnecessary electrons.
What happens next is this. The sulfate ions moving around in the weak solution of sulfuric acid come alongside the zinc plate and signal to its atoms. The sulfate ions would much rather play the game called “zinc sulfate” than the game called “hydrogen sulfate.” So the zinc atoms leave their positions to bond with the sulfate ions. But hold on! The sulfate ions have two extra electrons that they took from the hydrogen atoms. They don’t need the two extra electrons that each zinc atom could provide, so the zinc atom leaves behind these unnecessary electrons.
Every time a zinc atom leaves the plate it fails to take all its electrons with it. What leaves the zinc plate, therefore, to go into solution is really not a zinc atom but is a zinc ion; that is, it is the nucleus of a zinc atom and all except two of the planetary electrons.
Every time a zinc atom leaves the plate, it doesn't take all of its electrons with it. So, what's actually leaving the zinc plate to go into solution isn't a zinc atom but a zinc ion; that is, it's the nucleus of a zinc atom along with all but two of the surrounding electrons.
Every time a zinc ion leaves the plate there are left behind two electrons. The plate doesn’t want them for all the rest of its atoms have just the same number of protons as of electrons. Where are they to go? We shall see in a minute.
Every time a zinc ion leaves the plate, it leaves behind two electrons. The plate doesn’t want them since all its other atoms have the same number of protons as electrons. Where are they supposed to go? We'll find out in a minute.
Sometimes the zinc ions which have got into solution meet with sulphate ions and form zinc sulphate molecules. But if they do these molecules split up sooner or later into ions again. In the upper part of the liquid in the jar, therefore, there are sulphate 25ions which are negative and two kinds of positive ions, namely, the hydrogen ions and the zinc ions.
Sometimes, the zinc ions that have dissolved in the solution encounter sulfate ions and create zinc sulfate molecules. However, these molecules eventually break back down into ions. Thus, in the upper part of the liquid in the jar, there are sulfate 25 ions, which are negatively charged, along with two types of positively charged ions: hydrogen ions and zinc ions.
Before the zinc ions began to crowd in there were just enough hydrogen ions to go with the sulphate ions. As it is, the entrance of the zinc ions has increased the number of positive ions and now there are too many. Some of the positive ions, therefore, and particularly the hydrogen ions, because the sulphate prefers to associate with the zinc ions, can’t find enough playfellows and so go down in the jar.
Before the zinc ions showed up, there were just enough hydrogen ions to pair with the sulfate ions. Now that the zinc ions have entered, the number of positive ions has increased, and there are too many. Because the sulfate prefers to bond with the zinc ions, some of the positive ions, especially the hydrogen ions, can't find enough partners and end up settling at the bottom of the jar.
Down in the bottom of the jar the hydrogen ions find more sulphate ions to play with, but that leaves the copper ions which used to play with these sulphate ions without any playmates. So the copper ions go still further down and join with the copper atoms of the copper plate. They haven’t much right to do so, for you remember that they haven’t their proper number of electrons. Each copper ion lacks two electrons of being a copper atom. Nevertheless they join the copper plate. The result is a plate of copper which has too few electrons. It needs two electrons for every copper ion which joins it.
Down at the bottom of the jar, the hydrogen ions find more sulfate ions to interact with, but that leaves the copper ions, which used to interact with these sulfate ions, without any partners. So, the copper ions go even further down and attach themselves to the copper atoms of the copper plate. They don’t really have the right to do this because, as you know, they don't have their correct number of electrons. Each copper ion is missing two electrons to be a copper atom. Nevertheless, they connect with the copper plate. The result is a plate of copper that has too few electrons. It needs two electrons for every copper ion that joins it.
How about the zinc plate? You remember that it has two electrons more than it needs for every zinc ion which has left it. If only the extra electrons on the negative zinc plate could get around to the positive copper plate. They can if we connect a wire from one plate to the other. Then the electrons from the zinc stream into the spaces between the atoms of the wire and push ahead of them the electrons 26which are wandering around in these spaces. At the other end an equal number of electrons leave the wire to satisfy the positive copper plate. So we have a stream of electrons in the wire, that is, a current of electricity and our battery is working.
What about the zinc plate? You remember that it has two extra electrons for every zinc ion that leaves it. If only the extra electrons on the negative zinc plate could reach the positive copper plate. They can if we connect a wire from one plate to the other. Then the electrons from the zinc flow into the spaces between the atoms of the wire and push the electrons 26 that are floating around in these spaces ahead of them. At the other end, an equal number of electrons leave the wire to balance the positive copper plate. So, we have a flow of electrons in the wire, which is an electric current, and our battery is functioning.
That’s the sort of a battery I used to play with. If you understand it you can get the general idea of all batteries. Let me express it in general terms.
That’s the kind of battery I used to play with. If you get it, you can grasp the general concept of all batteries. Let me put it in simple terms.
At the negative plate of a battery ions go into solution and electrons are left behind. At the other end of the battery positive ions are crowded out of solution and join the plate where they cause a scarcity of electrons; that is, make the plate positive. If a wire is connected between the two plates, electrons will stream through it from the negative plate to the positive; and this stream is a current of electricity.
At the negative plate of a battery, ions dissolve and leave electrons behind. At the other end of the battery, positive ions are pushed out of solution and attach to the plate, which creates a lack of electrons, making that plate positive. If a wire is connected between the two plates, electrons will flow through it from the negative plate to the positive, and this flow is an electric current.

Pl. III.–Dry Battery for Use in Audion Circuits (Courtesy of National Carbon Co., Inc.)
Pl. III.–Dry Battery for Use in Audion Circuits (Courtesy of National Carbon Co., Inc.)
Storage Battery (Courtesy of the Electric Storage Battery Co.).
Storage Battery (Courtesy of the Electric Storage Battery Co.).
27LETTER 4
THE BATTERIES IN YOUR RADIO
(This letter may be omitted on the first reading.)
(This letter can be skipped on the first read.)
My Dear Young Man:
My Dear Young Man:
You will need several batteries when you come to set up your radio receiver but you won’t use such clumsy affairs as the gravity cell which I described in my last letter. Some of your batteries will be dry batteries of the size used in pocket flash lights.
You’ll need several batteries when you set up your radio receiver, but you won't be using those bulky gravity cells I mentioned in my last letter. Some of your batteries will be the dry type, similar to what’s used in pocket flashlights.
These are not really dry, for between the plates they are filled with a moist paste which is then sealed in with wax to keep it from drying out or from spilling. Instead of zinc and copper these batteries use zinc and carbon. No glass jar is needed, for the zinc is formed into a jar shape. In this is placed the paste and in the center of the paste a rod or bar of carbon. The paste doesn’t contain sulphuric acid, but instead has in it a stuff called sal ammoniac; that is, ammonium chloride.
These aren't actually dry; between the plates, they're filled with a moist paste that's sealed in with wax to prevent it from drying out or spilling. Instead of zinc and copper, these batteries use zinc and carbon. There's no need for a glass jar because the zinc is shaped like a jar. Inside this, the paste is placed, and a rod or bar of carbon goes in the center of the paste. The paste doesn't have sulfuric acid; instead, it contains something called sal ammoniac, which is ammonium chloride.
The battery, however, acts very much like the one I described in my last letter. Ions of zinc leave the zinc and wander into the moist paste. These ions are positive, just as in the case of the gravity battery. The result is that the electrons which used to associate with a zinc ion to form a zinc atom are left in the zinc plate. That makes the zinc negative 28for it has more electrons than protons. The zinc ions take the place of the positive ions which are already in the paste. The positive ions which originally belonged with the paste, therefore, move along to the carbon rod and there get some electrons. Taking electrons away from the carbon leaves it with too many protons; that is, leaves it positive. In the little flash light batteries, therefore, you will always find that the round carbon rod, which sticks out of the center, is positive and the zinc casing is negative.
The battery works similarly to the one I mentioned in my last letter. Zinc ions leave the zinc and move into the moist paste. These ions are positive, just like in the gravity battery. As a result, the electrons that used to be associated with a zinc ion to form a zinc atom stay behind in the zinc plate. This makes the zinc negative 28because it has more electrons than protons. The zinc ions replace the positive ions already in the paste. Consequently, the positive ions that originally belonged to the paste move to the carbon rod and gain some electrons. Taking electrons away from the carbon leaves it with too many protons, making it positive. So, in little flashlight batteries, you will always find that the round carbon rod in the center is positive and the zinc casing is negative.
The trouble with the battery like the one I used to make is that the zinc plate wastes away. Every time a zinc ion leaves it that means that the greater part of an atom is gone. Then when the two electrons which were left behind get a chance to start along a copper wire toward the positive plate of the battery there goes the rest of the atom. After a while there is no more zinc plate. It is easy to see what has happened. All the zinc has gone into solution or been “eaten away” as most people say. Dry batteries, however, don’t stop working because the zinc gets used up, but because the active stuff in the paste, the ammonium chloride, is changed into something else.
The issue with the battery like the one I used to make is that the zinc plate gradually gets consumed. Every time a zinc ion leaves, a large part of an atom disappears. Then, when the two leftover electrons get a chance to travel along a copper wire toward the positive plate of the battery, the rest of the atom goes with them. Eventually, there’s no zinc plate left. It’s clear what has happened. All the zinc has dissolved or been “eaten away,” as most people put it. However, dry batteries don’t stop working because the zinc gets used up, but because the active component in the paste, ammonium chloride, gets transformed into something else.
There’s another kind of battery which you will need to use with your radio set; that is the storage battery. Storage batteries can be used over and over again if they are charged between times and will last for a long time if properly cared for. Then too, they can give a large current, that is, a big swift-moving stream of electrons. You will need 29that when you wish to heat the filament of the audion in your receiving set.
There’s another type of battery you’ll need for your radio set: the storage battery. Storage batteries can be reused many times if you recharge them regularly and they can last a long time if you take care of them. Plus, they can deliver a large current, which means a strong, fast-moving flow of electrons. You'll need 29 that when you want to heat the filament of the audion in your receiving set.
The English call our storage batteries by the name “accumulators.” I don’t like that name at all, but I don’t like our name for them nearly as well as I do the name “reversible batteries.” Nobody uses this last name because it’s too late to change. Nevertheless a storage battery is reversible, for it will work either way at an instant’s notice.
The English refer to our storage batteries as “accumulators.” I really don’t like that term, but I don’t prefer our term for them nearly as much as I like “reversible batteries.” No one uses this last name because it’s too late to make a change. Still, a storage battery is reversible, as it can function in either direction at a moment’s notice.
A storage battery is something like a boy’s wagon on a hill side. It will run down hill but it can be pushed up again for another descent. You can use it to send a stream of electrons through a wire from its negative plate to its positive plate. Then if you connect these plates to some other battery or to a generator, (that is, a dynamo) you can make a stream of electrons go in the other direction. When you have done so long enough the battery is charged again and ready to discharge.
A storage battery is similar to a boy's wagon on a hillside. It can roll downhill but can be pushed back up for another ride down. You can use it to send a flow of electrons through a wire from its negative plate to its positive plate. Then, if you connect these plates to another battery or a generator (like a dynamo), you can make a stream of electrons flow in the opposite direction. After you've done this for a while, the battery recharges and is ready to discharge again.
I am not going to tell you very much about the storage battery but you ought to know a little about it if you are to own and run one with your radio set. When it is all charged and ready to work, the negative plate is a lot of soft spongy lead held in place by a frame of harder lead. The positive plate is a lead frame with small squares which are filled with lead peroxide, as it is called. This is a substance with molecules formed of one lead atom and two oxygen atoms. Why the chemists call it lead peroxide instead of just lead oxide I’ll tell you some other time, but not in these letters.
I won’t give you too much information about the storage battery, but you should know a bit about it if you want to own and operate one with your radio. When it’s fully charged and ready to go, the negative plate consists of soft, spongy lead supported by a frame made of harder lead. The positive plate is a lead frame with small squares filled with a substance called lead peroxide. This compound is made up of one lead atom and two oxygen atoms. I’ll explain why chemists call it lead peroxide instead of just lead oxide another time, but not in these letters.
30Between the two plates is a wood separator to keep pieces of lead from falling down between and touching both plates. You know what would happen if a piece of metal touched both plates. There would be a short circuit, that is, a sort of a short cut across lots by which some of the electrons from the negative plate could get to the positive plate without going along the wires which we want them to travel. That’s why there are separators.
30Between the two plates is a wood separator to prevent pieces of lead from falling in between and touching both plates. You know what would happen if a piece of metal touched both plates. There would be a short circuit, which means a shortcut that allows some of the electrons from the negative plate to reach the positive plate without traveling along the wires like we want them to. That’s why we have separators.
The two plates are in a jar of sulphuric acid solution. The sulphuric acid has molecules which split up in solution, as you remember, into hydrogen ions and the ions which we called “sulphate.” In my gravity battery the sulphate ions used to coax the zinc ions away into the solution. In the storage battery on the other hand the sulphate ions can get to most of the lead atoms because the lead is so spongy. When they do, they form lead sulphate right where the lead atoms are. They don’t really need whole lead atoms, because they have two more electrons than they deserve, so there are two extra electrons for every molecule of lead sulphate which is formed. That’s why the spongy lead plate is negative.
The two plates are in a jar of sulfuric acid solution. The sulfuric acid has molecules that break apart in solution, as you remember, into hydrogen ions and the ions we called “sulfate.” In my gravity battery, the sulfate ions helped pull the zinc ions into the solution. In the storage battery, on the other hand, the sulfate ions can reach most of the lead atoms because the lead is so porous. When they do, they create lead sulfate right where the lead atoms are. They don’t really need entire lead atoms because they have two more electrons than they should, so there are two extra electrons for every molecule of lead sulfate that forms. That’s why the porous lead plate is negative.
The lead sulphate won’t dissolve, so it stays there on the plate as a whitish coating. Now see what that means. What are the hydrogen ions going to do? As long as there was sulphuric acid in the water there was plenty of sulphate ions for them to associate with as often as they met; and they would meet pretty often. But if the sulphate ions get tied up 31with the lead of the plate there will be too many hydrogen ions left in the solution. Now what are the hydrogen ions to do? They are going to get as far away from each other as they can, for they are nothing but protons; and protons don’t like to associate. They only stayed around in the first place because there was always plenty of sulphate ions with whom they liked to play.
The lead sulfate won't dissolve, so it stays on the plate as a whitish coating. Now let's see what that means. What are the hydrogen ions going to do? As long as there was sulfuric acid in the water, there were plenty of sulfate ions for them to hang out with whenever they met, which was pretty often. But if the sulfate ions get tied up 31 with the lead on the plate, there will be too many hydrogen ions left in the solution. So what are the hydrogen ions going to do? They're going to spread out as much as possible because they're just protons, and protons don't like to stick together. They only stuck around in the first place because there were always plenty of sulfate ions to interact with.
When the hydrogen ions try to get away from each other they go to the other plate of the battery, and there they will get some electrons, if they have to steal in their turn.
When the hydrogen ions try to move away from each other, they go to the other plate of the battery, and there they'll pick up some electrons, even if they have to take them by force.
I won’t try to tell you all that happens at the other plate. The hydrogen ions get the electrons which they need, but they get something more. They get some of the oxygen away from the plate and so form molecules of water. You remember that water molecules are made of two atoms of hydrogen and one of oxygen. Meanwhile, the lead atoms, which have lost their oxygen companions, combine with some of the sulphate ions which are in that neighborhood. During the mix-up electrons are carried away from the plate and that leaves it positive.
I won’t explain everything that happens at the other plate. The hydrogen ions gain the electrons they need, but they also get something extra. They take some of the oxygen from the plate and create water molecules. Remember, water molecules are made up of two hydrogen atoms and one oxygen atom. At the same time, the lead atoms, which have lost their oxygen partners, combine with some of the sulfate ions nearby. During this process, electrons are pulled away from the plate, leaving it positively charged.
The result of all this is a little lead sulphate on each plate, a negative plate where the spongy lead was, and a positive plate where the lead peroxide was.
The result of all this is a little lead sulfate on each plate, a negative plate where the spongy lead was, and a positive plate where the lead peroxide was.
Notice very carefully that I said “a little lead sulphate on each plate.” The sort of thing I have been describing doesn’t go on very long. If it did the 32battery would run down inside itself and then when we came to start our automobile we would have to get out and crank.
Notice very carefully that I said “a little lead sulfate on each plate.” The type of thing I’ve been describing doesn’t last very long. If it did, the 32battery would drain itself, and then when we tried to start our car, we’d have to get out and crank it.
How long does it go on? Answer another question first. So far we haven’t connected any wire between the two plates of the battery, and so none of the electrons on the negative plate have any way of getting around to the positive plate where electrons are badly needed. Every time a negative sulphate ion combines with the spongy lead of the negative plate there are two more electrons added to that plate. You know how well electrons like each other. Do they let the sulphate ions keep giving that plate more electrons? There is the other question; and the answer is that they do not. Every electron that is added to that plate makes it just so much harder for another sulphate ion to get near enough to do business at all. That’s why after a few extra electrons have accumulated on the spongy lead plate the actions which I was describing come to a stop.
How long does it go on? Answer another question first. So far, we haven’t connected any wires between the two plates of the battery, so none of the electrons on the negative plate have a way to reach the positive plate where they’re really needed. Every time a negative sulfate ion combines with the spongy lead of the negative plate, it adds two more electrons to that plate. You know how well electrons get along with each other. Do they allow the sulfate ions to keep giving that plate more electrons? That’s the other question; and the answer is that they do not. Every electron added to that plate makes it harder for another sulfate ion to get close enough to do anything. That’s why after a few extra electrons have built up on the spongy lead plate, the processes I was describing come to a halt.
Do they ever begin again? They do just as soon as there is any reduction in the number of electrons which are hopping around in the negative plate trying to keep out of each other’s way. When we connect a wire between the plates we let some of these extra electrons of the negative plate pass along to the positive plate where they will be welcome. And the moment a couple of them start off on that errand along comes another sulphate ion in the solution and lands two more electrons on the plate. That’s how the battery keeps on discharging.
Do they ever start over? They do as soon as there’s a decrease in the number of electrons moving around in the negative plate, trying to avoid each other. When we connect a wire between the plates, we allow some of these extra electrons from the negative plate to flow to the positive plate, where they're wanted. The moment a couple of them head off on that journey, another sulfate ion in the solution shows up and brings two more electrons to the plate. That’s how the battery keeps discharging.
33We mustn’t let it get too much discharged for the lead sulphate is not soluble, as I just told you, and it will coat up that plate until there isn’t much chance of getting the process to reverse. That’s why we are so careful not to let the discharge process go on too long before we reverse it and charge. That’s why, when the car battery has been used pretty hard to start the car, I like to run quite a while to let the generator charge the battery again. When the battery charges, the process reverses and we get spongy lead on the negative plate and lead peroxide on the positive plate.
33We shouldn’t let it get too discharged because lead sulfate isn’t soluble, as I mentioned before, and it will cover that plate until there’s hardly any chance of reversing the process. That’s why we’re very careful not to let the discharge go on too long before we reverse it and charge. So, when the car battery has been used quite a bit to start the car, I prefer to run it for a while to let the generator recharge the battery. When the battery charges, the process reverses, and we end up with spongy lead on the negative plate and lead peroxide on the positive plate.
You’ve learned enough for one day. Write me your questions and I’ll answer and then go on in my next letter to tell how the audion works. You know about conduction of electricity in wires; that is, about the electron stream, and about batteries which can cause the stream. Now you are ready for the most wonderful little device known to science: the audion.
You’ve learned enough for today. Write me your questions, and I’ll answer them. In my next letter, I'll explain how the audion works. You already understand how electricity travels through wires, meaning you’re familiar with the flow of electrons and batteries that create that flow. Now you're ready to discover the most amazing little device known to science: the audion.
34LETTER 5
GETTING ELECTRONS FROM A HEATED WIRE
Dear Son:
Dear Son:
I was pleased to get your letter and its questions. Yes, a proton is a speck of electricity of the kind we call positive and an electron is of the kind we call negative. You might remember this simple law; “Like kinds of electricity repel, and unlike attract.”
I was happy to receive your letter and its questions. Yes, a proton is a tiny bit of electricity that we call positive, and an electron is what we call negative. You might recall this basic rule: “Like kinds of electricity repel each other, and unlike kinds attract.”
The word ion[2] is used to describe any atom, or part of a molecule which can travel by itself and has more or less than its proper number of electrons. By proper number of electrons I mean proper for the number of protons which it has. If an ion has more electrons than protons it is negative; if the inequality is the other way around it is positive. An atom or molecule has neither more nor less protons than electrons. It is neutral or “uncharged,” as we say.
The term ion[2] refers to any atom or part of a molecule that can move independently and has either more or fewer electrons than it should. By "proper number of electrons," I mean the number that corresponds to the number of protons it has. If an ion has more electrons than protons, it's considered negative; if it has fewer, it's positive. An atom or molecule has an equal number of protons and electrons, making it neutral or "uncharged," as we say.
No, not every substance which will dissolve will dissociate or split up into positive and negative ions. The salt which you eat will, but the sugar will not. If you want a name for those substances which will dissociate in solution, call them “electrolytes.” To make a battery we must always use an electrolyte.
No, not every substance that dissolves will break apart into positive and negative ions. The salt you eat will, but sugar won't. If you want a term for those substances that will break apart in a solution, call them "electrolytes." To make a battery, we always need to use an electrolyte.
Yes, it is hard to think of a smooth piece of metal or a wire as full of holes. Even in the densest solids like lead the atoms are quite far apart and there are 35large spaces between the nuclei and the planetary electrons of each atom.
Yes, it’s hard to see a smooth piece of metal or a wire as being full of holes. Even in the densest solids like lead, the atoms are relatively far apart, and there are 35large gaps between the nuclei and the surrounding electrons of each atom.
I hope this clears up the questions in your mind for I want to get along to the vacuum tube. By a vacuum we mean a space which has very few atoms or molecules in it, just as few as we can possibly get, with the best methods of pumping and exhausting. For the present let’s suppose that we can get all the gas molecules, that is, all the air, out of a little glass bulb.
I hope this clears up your questions because I want to move on to the vacuum tube. By a vacuum, we mean a space that has very few atoms or molecules in it, as few as we can possibly achieve using the best pumping and exhausting methods. For now, let's assume we can remove all the gas molecules, that is, all the air, from a small glass bulb.
The audion is a glass bulb like an electric light bulb which has in it a thread, or filament, of metal. The ends of this filament extend out through the glass so that we may connect a battery to them and pass a current of electricity through the wire. If we do so the wire gets hot.
The audion is a glass bulb similar to an electric light bulb that contains a metal thread, or filament. The ends of this filament extend out through the glass, allowing us to connect a battery and pass an electric current through the wire. When we do this, the wire heats up.
What do we mean when we say “the wire gets hot?” We mean that it feels hot. It heats the glass bulb and we can feel it. But what do we mean in words of electrons and atoms? To answer this we must start back a little way.
What do we mean when we say “the wire gets hot?” We mean that it feels hot. It heats the glass bulb, and we can feel it. But what do we mean in terms of electrons and atoms? To answer this, we need to go back a bit.
In every bit of matter in our world the atoms and molecules are in very rapid motion. In gases they can move anywhere; and do. That’s why odors travel so fast. In liquids most of the molecules or atoms have to do their moving without getting out of the dish or above the surface. Not all of them stay in, however, for some are always getting away from the liquid and going out into the air above. That is why a dish of water will dry up so quickly. The faster the molecules are going the better chance 36they have of jumping clear away from the water like fish jumping in the lake at sundown. Heating the liquid makes its molecules move faster and so more of them are able to jump clear of the rest of the liquid. That’s why when we come in wet we hang our clothes where they will get warm. The water in them evaporates more quickly when it is heated because all we mean by “heating” is speeding up the molecules.
In every piece of matter in our world, the atoms and molecules are moving very quickly. In gases, they can move freely, and they do. That’s why smells spread so fast. In liquids, most of the molecules or atoms move around without leaving the container or breaking the surface. However, not all of them stay put; some are constantly escaping from the liquid and entering the air above. That’s why a bowl of water dries up so quickly. The faster the molecules are moving, the better chance 36 they have of jumping out of the water, like fish leaping in the lake at sunset. Heating the liquid makes its molecules move faster, which allows more of them to escape from the rest of the liquid. That’s why when we come in wet, we hang our clothes in a warm place. The water in them evaporates more quickly when heated because all we mean by “heating” is increasing the speed of the molecules.
In a solid body the molecules can’t get very far away from where they start but they keep moving back and forth and around and around. The hotter the body is, the faster are its molecules moving. Generally they move a little farther when the body is hot than when it is cold. That means they must have a little more room and that is why a body is larger when hot than when cold. It expands with heating because its molecules are moving more rapidly and slightly farther.
In a solid object, the molecules can’t move very far from their original position, but they keep jostling back and forth and swirling around. The hotter the object gets, the faster the molecules are moving. Typically, they move a bit further when the object is hot compared to when it’s cold. This means they need a bit more space, which is why an object is larger when it’s hot than when it’s cold. It expands when heated because its molecules are moving more quickly and slightly farther apart.
When a wire is heated its molecules and atoms are hurried up and they dash back and forth faster than before. Now you know that a wire, like the filament of a lamp, gets hot when the “electricity is turned on,” that is, when there is a stream of electrons passing through it. Why does it get hot? Because when the electrons stream through it they bump and jostle their way along like rude boys on a crowded sidewalk. The atoms have to step a bit more lively to keep out of the way. These more rapid motions of the atoms we recognize by the wire growing hotter.
When a wire heats up, its molecules and atoms speed up and move back and forth faster than before. You know that a wire, like the filament in a light bulb, gets hot when the “electricity is turned on,” meaning when there’s a flow of electrons passing through it. Why does it heat up? Because as the electrons flow through, they bump and jostle their way along like rude kids on a crowded sidewalk. The atoms have to move a bit quicker to avoid getting hit. We notice these faster movements of the atoms by the wire getting hotter.
37That is why an electric current heats a wire through which it is flowing. Now what happens to the electrons, the rude boys who are dodging their way along the sidewalk? Some of them are going so fast and so carelessly that they will have to dodge out into the gutter and off the sidewalk entirely. The more boys that are rushing along and the faster they are going the more of them will be turned aside and plunge off the sidewalks.
37That's why an electric current heats up a wire it’s passing through. So, what happens to the electrons, the troublemakers who are zigzagging along the sidewalk? Some of them are moving so quickly and carelessly that they have to dart into the gutter and off the sidewalk completely. The more electrons that are racing along and the faster they’re going, the more of them will be pushed aside and fall off the sidewalks.
The greater and faster the stream of electrons, that is the more current which is flowing through the wire, the more electrons will be “emitted,” that is, thrown out of the wire. If you could watch them you would see them shooting out of the wire, here, there, and all along its length, and going in every direction. The number which shoot out each second isn’t very large until they have stirred things up so that the wire is just about red hot.
The greater and faster the flow of electrons—meaning the more current passing through the wire—the more electrons will be "emitted," or expelled from the wire. If you could observe them, you would see them shooting out of the wire in all directions along its length. The number that escape each second isn't very large until they have heated things up enough that the wire is nearly red hot.
What becomes of them? Sometimes they don’t get very far away from the wire and so come back inside again. They scoot off the sidewalk and on again just as boys do in dodging their way along. Some of them start away as if they were going for good.
What happens to them? Sometimes they don’t get very far from the wire and end up coming back inside again. They dart off the sidewalk and back on just like boys do when they’re weaving their way along. Some of them take off as if they’re leaving for good.
If the wire is in a vacuum tube, as it is in the case of the audion, they can’t get very far away. Of course there is lots of room; but they are going so fast that they need more room just as older boys who run fast need a larger play ground than do the little tots. By and by there gets to be so many of them outside that they have to dodge each other and some of them are always dodging back into the 38wire while new electrons are shooting out from it.
If the wire is inside a vacuum tube, like in the case of the audion, they can't drift too far away. There's plenty of space, but they're moving so quickly that they need more room, just like older kids who run fast need a bigger playground than the little ones. Eventually, there are so many of them outside that they have to dodge each other, and some always end up dodging back into the 38wire while new electrons are shooting out from it.
When there are just as many electrons dodging back into the wire each second as are being emitted from it the vacuum in the tube has all the electrons it can hold. We might say it is “saturated” with electrons, which means, in slang, “full up.” If any more electrons are to get out of the filament just as many others which are already outside have to go back inside. Or else they have got to be taken away somewhere else.
When the same number of electrons are rushing back into the wire each second as are being released from it, the vacuum in the tube has as many electrons as it can handle. We could say it is “saturated” with electrons, which basically means it’s “full.” If any more electrons are going to escape from the filament, then an equal number of those already outside have to go back inside. Otherwise, they have to be removed to another place.
What I have just told you about electrons getting away from a heated wire is very much like what happens when a liquid is heated. The molecules of the liquid get away from the surface. If we cover a dish of liquid which is being heated the liquid molecules can’t get far away and very soon the space between the surface of the liquid and the cover gets saturated with them. Then every time another molecule escapes from the surface of the liquid there must be some molecule which goes back into the liquid. There is then just as much condensation back into liquid as there is evaporation from it. That’s why in cooking they put covers over the vessels when they don’t want the liquid all to “boil away.”
What I've just explained about electrons escaping from a heated wire is similar to what happens when you heat a liquid. The molecules in the liquid start to escape from the surface. If we put a lid on a pot of heated liquid, the molecules can't go very far and soon the space between the liquid's surface and the lid becomes filled with them. So, every time a molecule escapes from the surface of the liquid, another molecule must re-enter the liquid. This means that the amount of condensation back into the liquid equals the amount of evaporation from it. That’s why in cooking, they cover pots when they don’t want the liquid to “boil away.”
Sometimes we speak of the vacuum tube in the same words we would use in describing evaporation of a liquid. The molecules of the liquid which have escaped form what is called a “vapor” of the liquid. As you know there is usually considerable water vapor in the air. We say then that electrons are 39“boiled out” of the filament and that there is a “vapor of electrons” in the tube.
Sometimes we talk about the vacuum tube in the same way we describe the evaporation of a liquid. The molecules of the liquid that have escaped create what we call a “vapor” of that liquid. As you know, there is usually a significant amount of water vapor in the air. So, we say that electrons are 39 “boiled out” of the filament and that there is a “vapor of electrons” in the tube.
That is enough for this letter. Next time I shall tell you how use is made of these electrons which have been boiled out and are free in the space around the filament.
That’s all for this letter. Next time, I’ll explain how we use these electrons that have been boiled off and are now free in the space around the filament.
If the reader has omitted Letters 3 and 4 he should omit this paragraph and the next.
If the reader skipped Letters 3 and 4, they should skip this paragraph and the next one.
40LETTER 6
The Audion
Dear Son:
Dear Son:
In my last letter I told how electrons are boiled out of a heated filament. The hotter the filament the more electrons are emitted each second. If the temperature is kept steady, or constant as we say, then there are emitted each second just the same number of electrons. When the filament is enclosed in a vessel or glass bulb these electrons which get free from it cannot go very far away. Some of them, therefore, have to come back to the filament and the number which returns each second is just equal to the number which is leaving. You realize that this is what is happening inside an ordinary electric light bulb when its filament is being heated.
In my last letter, I explained how electrons are released from a heated filament. The hotter the filament gets, the more electrons are emitted each second. If the temperature stays steady or constant, then the same number of electrons is emitted every second. When the filament is inside a vessel or glass bulb, the electrons that are released can't travel very far. So, some of them have to return to the filament, and the number that comes back each second is equal to the number that is leaving. You can see that this is what's happening inside a regular electric light bulb when its filament is heated.

41An ordinary electric light bulb, however, is not an audion although it is like one in the emission of electrons from its filament. That reminds me that last night as I was waiting for a train I picked up one of the Radio Supplements which so many newspapers are now running. There was a column of enquiries. One letter told how its writer had tried to use an ordinary electric light bulb to receive radio signals.
41An ordinary electric light bulb, however, is not an audion even though it emits electrons from its filament in a similar way. That reminds me, last night while I was waiting for a train, I picked up one of the Radio Supplements that many newspapers are running now. There was a column of inquiries. One letter described how the writer had attempted to use a regular electric light bulb to pick up radio signals.
He had plenty of electrons in it but no way to control them and make their motions useful. In an audion besides the filament there are two other things. One is a little sheet or plate of metal with a connecting wire leading out through the glass walls and the other is a little wire screen shaped like a gridiron and so called a “grid.” It also has a connecting wire leading through the glass. Fig. 4 shows an audion. It will be most convenient, however, to represent an audion as in Fig. 5. There you see the filament, F, with its two terminals brought out from the tube, the plate, P, and between these the grid, G.
He had a lot of electrons in it but no way to control them and make their movements useful. In an audion, besides the filament, there are two other components. One is a small metal sheet or plate with a connecting wire that leads out through the glass walls, and the other is a little wire screen shaped like a grid, known as a "grid." It also has a connecting wire leading through the glass. Fig. 4 shows an audion. It will be easiest, though, to represent an audion as shown in Fig. 5. There you can see the filament, F, with its two terminals extending from the tube, the plate, P, and between them, the grid, G.

These three parts of the tube are sometimes called “elements.” Usually, however, they are called “electrodes” and that is why the audion is spoken of as the “three-electrode vacuum tube.” An electrode is what we call any piece of metal or wire which is so placed as to let us get at electrons (or 42ions) to control their motions. Let us see how it does so.
These three sections of the tube are sometimes referred to as “elements.” However, they’re generally called “electrodes,” which is why the audion is referred to as the “three-electrode vacuum tube.” An electrode is any piece of metal or wire that’s positioned in a way that allows us to access electrons (or 42ions) to control their movement. Let’s take a look at how it works.
To start with, we shall forget the grid and think of a tube with only a filament and a plate in it–a two-electrode tube. We shall represent it as in Fig. 6 and show the battery which heats the filament by some lines as at A. In this way of representing a battery each cell is represented by a short heavy line and a longer lighter line. The heavy line stands for the negative plate and the longer line for the positive plate. We shall call the battery which heats the filament the “filament battery” or sometimes the “A-battery.” As you see, it is formed by several battery cells connected in series.
To begin, let’s set aside the grid and think about a tube with just a filament and a plate inside it—a two-electrode tube. We’ll illustrate it like in Fig. 6 and show the battery that heats the filament with some lines as at A. In this representation of a battery, each cell is shown with a short thick line and a longer lighter line. The thick line represents the negative plate, while the longer line represents the positive plate. We’ll refer to the battery that heats the filament as the “filament battery” or sometimes the “A-battery.” As you can see, it consists of several battery cells connected in series.

Sometime later I may tell you how to connect battery cells together and why. For the present all you need to remember is that two batteries are in series if the positive plate of one is connected to the negative plate of the other. If the batteries are alike they will pull an electron just twice as hard as either could alone.
Sometime later, I might explain how to connect battery cells together and why it matters. For now, just remember that two batteries are in series if the positive terminal of one is connected to the negative terminal of the other. If the batteries are the same, they will pull an electron twice as hard as either one could by itself.
43To heat the filament of an audion, such as you will probably use in your set, will require three storage-battery cells, like the one I described in my fourth letter, all connected in series. We generally use storage batteries of about the same size as those in the automobile. If you will look at the automobile battery you will see that it is made of three cells connected in series. That battery would do very well for the filament circuit.
43To heat the filament of an audion, like the one you'll probably use in your setup, you'll need three storage battery cells, similar to the ones I described in my fourth letter, all connected in a series. We usually use storage batteries that are about the same size as those found in cars. If you check out a car battery, you'll see it's made up of three cells connected in series. That battery would work just fine for the filament circuit.

Pl. IV.–Radiotron (Courtesy of Radio Corporation of America).
Pl. IV.–Radiotron (Courtesy of Radio Corporation of America).
44By the way, do you know what a “circuit” is? The word comes from the same Latin word as our word “circus.” The Romans were very fond of chariot racing at their circuses and built race tracks around which the chariots could go. A circuit, therefore, is a path or track around which something can race; and an electrical circuit is a path around which electrons can race. The filament, the A-battery and the connecting wires of Fig. 6 form a circuit.
44By the way, do you know what a "circuit" is? The word comes from the same Latin root as our word "circus." The Romans loved chariot racing in their circuses and built tracks for the chariots to race around. So, a circuit is a path or track around which something can race; an electrical circuit is a path where electrons can flow. The filament, the A-battery, and the connecting wires in Fig. 6 create a circuit.

Let us imagine another battery formed by several cells in series which we shall connect to the tube as in Fig. 7. All the positive and negative terminals of these batteries are connected in pairs, the positive of one cell to the negative of the next, except for one positive and one negative. The remaining positive terminal is the positive terminal of the battery which we are making by this series connection. We then connect this positive terminal to the plate and the negative terminal to the filament as shown in the figure. This new battery we shall call the “plate battery” or the “B-battery.”
Let’s picture another battery made up of several cells connected in series, which we’ll attach to the tube as shown in Fig. 7. All the positive and negative terminals of these batteries are connected in pairs, with the positive of one cell linked to the negative of the next, except for one positive and one negative. The leftover positive terminal is the positive terminal of the battery we’re creating with this series connection. We then connect this positive terminal to the plate and the negative terminal to the filament, as illustrated in the figure. We’ll refer to this new battery as the “plate battery” or the “B-battery.”
Now what’s going to happen? The B-battery will want to take in electrons at its positive terminal and to send them out at its negative terminal. The positive is connected to the plate in the vacuum tube 45of the figure and so draws some of the electrons of the plate away from it. Where do these electrons come from? They used to belong to the atoms of the plate but they were out playing in the space between the atoms, so that they came right along when the battery called them. That leaves the plate with less than its proper number of electrons; that is, leaves it positive. So the plate immediately draws to itself some of the electrons which are dodging about in the vacuum around it.
Now what's going to happen? The B-battery will want to take in electrons at its positive terminal and send them out at its negative terminal. The positive is connected to the plate in the vacuum tube 45 of the figure and draws some of the electrons from the plate away from it. Where do these electrons come from? They used to belong to the atoms of the plate, but they were free in the space between the atoms, so they came right along when the battery called them. This leaves the plate with fewer electrons than it should have, making it positive. So the plate immediately attracts some of the electrons that are moving around in the vacuum around it.
Do you remember what was happening in the tube? The filament was steadily going on emitting electrons although there were already in the tube so many electrons that just as many crowded back into the filament each second as the filament sent out. The filament was neither gaining nor losing electrons, although it was busy sending them out and welcoming them home again.
Do you remember what was happening in the tube? The filament was constantly emitting electrons, even though there were already so many electrons in the tube that just as many were crowding back into the filament each second as it sent out. The filament was neither gaining nor losing electrons, even though it was actively sending them out and welcoming them back.
When the B-battery gets to work all this is changed. The B-battery attracts electrons to the plate and so reduces the crowd in the tube. Then there are not as many electrons crowding back into the filament as there were before and so the filament loses more than it gets back.
When the B-battery starts working, everything changes. The B-battery pulls electrons to the plate, reducing the congestion in the tube. As a result, fewer electrons are rushing back into the filament than before, meaning the filament loses more than it gains.
Suppose that, before the B-battery was connected to the plate, each tiny length of the filament was emitting 1000 electrons each second but was getting 1000 back each second. There was no net change. Now, suppose that the B-battery takes away 100 of these each second. Then only 900 get back to the filament and there is a net loss from the filament 46of 100. Each second this tiny length of filament sends into the vacuum 100 electrons which are taken out at the plate. From each little bit of filament there is a stream of electrons to the plate. Millions of electrons, therefore, stream across from filament to plate. That is, there is a current of electricity between filament and plate and this current continues to flow as long as the A-battery and the B-battery do their work.
Suppose that, before the B-battery was connected to the plate, each small section of the filament was releasing 1000 electrons per second but was also receiving 1000 back each second. There was no net change. Now, suppose the B-battery removes 100 of these electrons each second. Then only 900 return to the filament, resulting in a net loss from the filament 46 of 100. Each second, this small section of filament sends 100 electrons into the vacuum, which get extracted at the plate. Therefore, from each little piece of filament, there's a stream of electrons directed to the plate. Millions of electrons are thus flowing across from the filament to the plate. In other words, there is an electric current between the filament and the plate, and this current continues to flow as long as the A-battery and the B-battery keep functioning.
The negative terminal of the B-battery is connected to the filament. Every time this battery pulls an electron from the plate its negative terminal shoves one out to the filament. You know from my third and fourth letters that electrons are carried through a battery from its positive to its negative terminal. You see, then, that there is the same stream of electrons through the B-battery as there is through the vacuum between filament and plate. This same stream passes also through the wires which connect the battery to the tube. The path followed by the stream of electrons includes the wires, the vacuum and the battery in series. We call this path the “plate circuit.”
The negative terminal of the B-battery is connected to the filament. Every time this battery pulls an electron from the plate, its negative terminal pushes one out to the filament. You know from my third and fourth letters that electrons move through a battery from its positive to its negative terminal. So, you can see that there is a continuous flow of electrons through the B-battery just like there is through the vacuum between the filament and the plate. This same flow also goes through the wires that connect the battery to the tube. The route taken by the flow of electrons includes the wires, the vacuum, and the battery in series. We call this route the “plate circuit.”
We can connect a telephone receiver, or a current-measuring instrument, or any thing we wish which will pass a stream of electrons, so as to let this same stream of electrons pass through it also. All we have to do is to connect the instrument in series with the other parts of the plate circuit. I’ll show you how in a minute, but just now I want you to understand that we have a stream of electrons, 47for I want to tell you how it may be controlled.
We can connect a telephone receiver, a current-measuring instrument, or anything else that allows electrons to flow, so that this same flow of electrons can pass through it too. All we need to do is connect the instrument in series with the other components of the plate circuit. I’ll explain how to do this in a moment, but right now, I want you to understand that we have a flow of electrons, 47 because I want to explain how it can be controlled.
Suppose we use another battery and connect it between the grid and the filament so as to make the grid positive. That would mean connecting the positive terminal of the battery to the grid and the negative to the filament as shown by the C-battery of Fig. 8. This figure also shows a current-measuring instrument in the plate circuit.
Suppose we use a different battery and link it between the grid and the filament to make the grid positive. That would involve connecting the positive terminal of the battery to the grid and the negative terminal to the filament, as indicated by the C-battery in Fig. 8. This figure also displays a current-measuring instrument in the plate circuit.
What effect is this C-battery, or grid-battery, going to have on the current in the plate circuit? Making the grid positive makes it want electrons. It will therefore act just as we saw that the plate did and pull electrons across the vacuum towards itself.
What effect is this C-battery, or grid-battery, going to have on the current in the plate circuit? Making the grid positive makes it attract electrons. It will therefore act just like we observed the plate did and pull electrons across the vacuum towards itself.

What happens then is something like this: Electrons are freed at the filament; the plate and the grid both call them and they start off in a rush. Some of them are stopped by the wires of the grid but most of them go on by to the plate. The grid is mostly open space, you know, and the electrons move as fast as lightning. They are going too fast in the general direction of the grid to stop and look for its few and small wires.
What happens is something like this: Electrons are released at the filament; both the plate and the grid pull them in, and they take off in a hurry. Some of them get blocked by the wires in the grid, but most continue on to the plate. The grid is mostly empty space, and the electrons move like lightning. They’re moving so quickly toward the grid that they don’t stop to look for its few tiny wires.
When the grid is positive the grid helps the plate to call electrons away from the filament. Making the grid positive, therefore, increases the stream of electrons between filament and plate; that is, increases the current in the plate circuit.
When the grid is positive, it attracts electrons away from the filament. So, making the grid positive boosts the flow of electrons between the filament and the plate; in other words, it increases the current in the plate circuit.
We could get the same effect so far as concerns 48an increased plate current by using more batteries in series in the plate circuit so as to pull harder. But the grid is so close to the filament that a single battery cell in the grid circuit can call electrons so strongly that it would take several extra battery cells in the plate circuit to produce the same effect.
We could achieve the same result regarding 48 a higher plate current by adding more batteries in series in the plate circuit to boost the pull. However, the grid is positioned so closely to the filament that a single battery in the grid circuit can attract electrons with enough force that it would require several additional battery cells in the plate circuit to create the same effect.

If we reverse the grid battery, as in Fig. 9, so as to make the grid negative, then, instead of attracting electrons the grid repels them. Nowhere near as many electrons will stream across to the plate when the grid says, “No, go back.” The grid is in a strategic position and what it says has a great effect.
If we flip the grid battery, as shown in Fig. 9, making the grid negative, it will repel electrons instead of attracting them. Far fewer electrons will move to the plate when the grid says, “No, go back.” The grid is in a crucial position, and its commands have a significant impact.
When there is no battery connected to the grid it has no possibility of influencing the electron stream which the plate is attracting to itself. We say, then, that the grid is uncharged or is at “zero potential,” meaning that it is zero or nothing in possibility. But when the grid is charged, no matter how little, it makes a change in the plate current. When the grid says “Come on,” even though very softly, it has as much effect on the electrons as if the plate shouted at them, and a lot of extra electrons rush for the plate. But when the grid whispers “Go back,” many electrons which would otherwise have gone streaking off to the plate crowd back toward the filament. That’s how the audion works. There is an electron stream and a wonderfully sensitive way of controlling the stream.
When there’s no battery connected to the grid, it can’t influence the flow of electrons that the plate is attracting. We say that the grid is uncharged or at “zero potential,” meaning it has no ability to affect anything. But when the grid is charged, even a little, it changes the current to the plate. When the grid says “Come on,” even if very softly, it draws electrons just like if the plate were shouting at them, causing a lot of extra electrons to rush toward the plate. But when the grid whispers “Go back,” many electrons that would have gone to the plate turn around and head back toward the filament. That’s how the audion works. There’s a stream of electrons and a really sensitive way to control that stream.
49LETTER 7
HOW TO MEASURE AN ELECTRON STREAM
(This letter may be omitted on the first reading.)
(This letter can be skipped on the first reading.)
Dear Youth:
Dear Youth:
If we are to talk about the audion and how its grid controls the current in the plate circuit we must know something of how to measure currents. An electric current is a stream of electrons. We measure it by finding the rate at which electrons are traveling along through the circuit.
If we're going to discuss the audion and how its grid regulates the current in the plate circuit, we need to understand how to measure currents. An electric current is a flow of electrons. We measure it by determining the speed at which electrons move through the circuit.
What do we mean by the word “rate?” You know what it means when a speedometer says twenty miles an hour. If the car should keep going just as it was doing at the instant you looked at the speedometer it would go twenty miles in the next hour. Its rate is twenty miles an hour even though it runs into a smash the next minute and never goes anywhere again except to the junk heap.
What do we mean by the word “rate?” You know what it means when a speedometer reads twenty miles per hour. If the car keeps moving at the same speed as when you checked the speedometer, it will cover twenty miles in the next hour. Its rate is twenty miles per hour, even if it crashes the next minute and never drives again, except straight to the junkyard.
It’s the same when we talk of electric currents. We say there is a current of such and such a number of electrons a second going by each point in the circuit. We don’t mean that the current isn’t going to change, for it may get larger or smaller, but we do mean that if the stream of electrons keeps going just as it is there will be such and such a number of electrons pass by in the next second.
It’s the same when we talk about electric currents. We say there’s a current of a certain number of electrons per second passing each point in the circuit. We don’t mean the current won’t change, because it may increase or decrease, but we do mean that if the flow of electrons continues as it is, the same number of electrons will pass by in the next second.
In most of the electrical circuits with which you 50will deal you will find that electrons must be passing along in the circuit at a most amazing rate if there is to be any appreciable effect. When you turn on the 40-watt light at your desk you start them going through the filament of the lamp at the rate of about two and a half billion billion each second. You have stood on the sidewalk in the city and watched the people stream past you. Just suppose you could stand beside that narrow little sidewalk which the filament offers to the electrons and count them as they go by. We don’t try to count them although we do to-day know about how many go by in a second if the current is steady.
In most of the electrical circuits you'll encounter, you'll find that electrons need to be flowing through the circuit at an incredible rate for there to be any noticeable effect. When you switch on the 40-watt light at your desk, you start them moving through the lamp’s filament at a rate of about two and a half billion billion each second. You've stood on the sidewalk in the city and watched people pass by. Just imagine if you could stand next to that narrow little sidewalk that the filament provides for the electrons and count them as they go by. We don’t actually try to count them, but we do know today approximately how many pass by in a second if the current is steady.
If some one asks you how old you are you don’t say “About five hundred million seconds”; you tell him in years. When some one asks how large a current is flowing in a wire we don’t tell him six billion billion electrons each second; we tell him “one ampere.” Just as we use years as the units in which to count up time so we use amperes as the units in which to count up streams of electrons. When a wire is carrying a current of one ampere the electrons are streaming through it at the rate of about 6,000,000,000,000,000,000 a second.
If someone asks you how old you are, you don’t say “About five hundred million seconds”; you tell them in years. When someone asks how much current is flowing in a wire, we don’t say six billion billion electrons each second; we say “one ampere.” Just like we use years to measure time, we use amperes to measure the flow of electrons. When a wire is carrying a current of one ampere, the electrons are moving through it at a rate of about 6,000,000,000,000,000,000 per second.
Don’t try to remember this number but do remember that an ampere is a unit in which we measure currents just as a year is a unit in which we measure time. An ampere is a unit in which we measure streams of electrons just as “miles per hour” is a unit in which we measure the speed of trains or automobiles.
Don’t worry about memorizing this number, but just keep in mind that an ampere is a unit we use to measure electric current, similar to how a year measures time. An ampere measures the flow of electrons, just like “miles per hour” measures the speed of trains or cars.
51If you wanted to find the weight of something you would take a scale and weigh it, wouldn’t you? You might take that spring balance which hangs out in the kitchen. But if the spring balance said the thing weighed five pounds how would you know if it was right? Of course you might take what ever it was down town and weigh it on some other scales but how would you know those scales gave correct weight?
51If you wanted to find the weight of something, you’d use a scale, right? You might grab that spring scale sitting in the kitchen. But if that scale says the object weighs five pounds, how can you be sure it’s accurate? Sure, you could take it downtown and weigh it on a different scale, but how would you know if that scale is giving the correct weight?
The only way to find out would be to try the scales with weights which you were sure were right and see if the readings on the scale correspond to the known weights. Then you could trust it to tell you the weight of something else. That’s the way scales are tested. In fact that’s the way that the makers know how to mark them in the first place. They put on known weights and marked the lines and figures which you see. What they did was called “calibrating” the scale. You could make a scale for yourself if you wished, but if it was to be reliable you would have to find the places for the markings by applying known weights, that is, by calibration.
The only way to find out is to test the scales with weights you know are accurate and see if the readings match those weights. Then, you can trust it to measure something else. That’s how scales are tested. In fact, that's how the manufacturers know how to mark them in the first place. They use known weights to mark the lines and numbers you see. This process is called “calibrating” the scale. You could make a scale for yourself if you wanted, but to make it reliable, you would need to determine the markings by using known weights, which is calibration.
How would you know that the weights you used to calibrate your scale were really what you thought them to be? You would have to find some place where they had a weight that everybody would agree was correct and then compare your weight with that. You might, for example, send your pound weight to the Bureau of Standards in Washington and for a small payment have the Bureau compare it with the pound which it keeps as a standard.
How would you know if the weights you used to calibrate your scale were actually what you thought they were? You would need to find a place that had a weight everyone agreed was accurate and then compare your weight to that. For instance, you could send your pound weight to the Bureau of Standards in Washington, and for a small fee, have them compare it to the pound they keep as the standard.
52That is easy where one is interested in a pound. But it is a little different when one is interested in an ampere. You can’t make an ampere out of a piece of platinum as you can a standard pound weight. An ampere is a stream of electrons at about the rate of six billion billion a second. No one could ever count anywhere near that many, and yet everybody who is concerned with electricity wants to be able to measure currents in amperes. How is it done?
52That’s straightforward when you’re talking about a pound. But it gets a bit more complicated when you’re dealing with an ampere. You can’t create an ampere from a piece of platinum like you can with a standard pound weight. An ampere is a flow of electrons at roughly six billion billion per second. No one could possibly count anywhere near that amount, yet everyone who works with electricity wants to measure currents in amperes. How do they do that?
First there is made an instrument which will have something in it to move when electrons are flowing through the instrument. We want a meter for the flow of electrons. In the basement we have a meter for the flow of gas and another for the flow of water. Each of these has some part which will move when the water or the gas passes through. But they are both arranged with little gear wheels so as to keep track of all the water or gas which has flowed through; they won’t tell the rate at which the gas or water is flowing. They are like the odometer on the car which gives the “trip mileage” or the “total mileage.” We want a meter like the speedometer which will indicate at each instant just how fast the electrons are streaming through it.
First, we create a device that will have something that moves when electrons are flowing through it. We need a meter for the flow of electrons. In the basement, we have a meter for the flow of gas and another for the flow of water. Each of these has a component that moves when the water or gas flows through it. However, they are both set up with small gears to track all the water or gas that has passed through; they don’t measure the rate at which the gas or water is flowing. They are like the odometer in a car that shows the “trip mileage” or the “total mileage.” We want a meter like the speedometer that will indicate how fast the electrons are flowing through it at any given moment.
There are several kinds of meters but I shall not try to tell you now of more than one. The simplest to understand is called a “hot-wire meter.” You already know that an electron stream heats a wire. Suppose a piece of fine wire is fastened at the two ends and that there are binding posts also fastened 53to these ends of the wire so that the wire may be made part of the circuit where we want to know the electron stream. Then the same stream of electrons will flow through the fine wire as through the other parts of the circuit. Because the wire is fine it acts like a very narrow sidewalk for the stream of electrons and they have to bump and jostle pretty hard to get through. That’s why the wire gets heated.
There are various types of meters, but I’m only going to explain one right now. The easiest to understand is called a “hot-wire meter.” You already know that a stream of electrons heats a wire. Imagine a piece of fine wire is secured at both ends, and there are binding posts attached to these ends so that the wire can be included in the circuit where we want to measure the electron stream. The same stream of electrons will flow through the fine wire just like it does through the other parts of the circuit. Since the wire is fine, it acts like a very narrow path for the stream of electrons, making them bump and jostle quite a bit to get through. That’s why the wire heats up.
You know that a heated wire expands. This wire expands. It grows longer and because it is held firmly at the ends it must bow out at the center. The bigger the rate of flow of electrons the hotter it gets; and the hotter it gets the more it bows out. At the center we might fasten one end–the short end–of a little lever. A small motion of this short end of the lever will mean a large motion of the other end, just like a “teeter board” when one end is longer than the other; the child on the long end travels further than the child on the short end. The lever magnifies the motion of the center of the hot wire part of our meter so that we can see it easier.
You know that a heated wire expands. This wire expands. It gets longer and, since it's securely fixed at both ends, it has to bend in the middle. The faster the flow of electrons, the hotter it gets; and the hotter it gets, the more it bends. In the center, we could attach one end—the short end—of a small lever. A slight movement of this short end will result in a larger movement of the other end, just like a seesaw when one side is longer than the other; the kid on the longer side moves farther than the kid on the shorter side. The lever amplifies the motion of the hot wire’s center in our meter, making it easier for us to see.

There are several ways to make such a meter. The one shown in Fig. 10 is as easy to understand as any. We shape the long end of the lever like a pointer. Then the hotter the wire the farther the pointer moves.
There are several ways to create such a meter. The one shown in Fig. 10 is as easy to understand as any. We shape the long end of the lever like a pointer. The hotter the wire gets, the farther the pointer moves.
If we could put this meter in an electric circuit 54where we knew one ampere was flowing we could put a numeral “1” opposite where the pointer stood. Then if we could increase the current until there were two amperes flowing through the meter we could mark that position of the pointer “2” and so on. That’s the way we would calibrate the meter. After we had done so we would call it an “ammeter” because it measures amperes. Years ago people would have called it an “amperemeter” but no one who is up-to-date would call it so to-day.
If we could connect this meter to an electric circuit 54 where we knew one ampere was flowing, we could mark a “1” where the pointer is. Then, if we increased the current to two amperes flowing through the meter, we could label that position of the pointer “2,” and continue this way. That’s how we would calibrate the meter. Once we finished, we would call it an “ammeter” because it measures amperes. Years ago, people would have referred to it as an “amperemeter,” but nobody who is current would use that term today.

If we had a very carefully made ammeter we would send it to the Bureau of Standards to be calibrated. At the Bureau they have a number of meters which they know are correct in their readings. They would put one of their meters and ours into the same circuit so that both carry the same stream of electrons as in Fig. 11. Then whatever the reading was on their meter could be marked opposite the pointer on ours.
If we had a meticulously crafted ammeter, we would send it to the Bureau of Standards for calibration. The Bureau has several meters that they know give accurate readings. They would connect one of their meters and ours in the same circuit so that both carry the same flow of electrons as shown in Fig. 11. Then, whatever reading appears on their meter could be noted next to the pointer on ours.
Now I want to tell you how the physicists at the Bureau know what is an ampere. Several years ago there was a meeting or congress of physicists and electrical engineers from all over the world who discussed what they thought should be the unit in which to measure current. They decided just what they would call an ampere and then all the countries from which they came passed laws saying that an ampere 55should be what these scientists had recommended. To-day, therefore, an ampere is defined by law.
Now I want to explain how the physicists at the Bureau know what an ampere is. Several years ago, there was a meeting of physicists and electrical engineers from around the world who discussed what they believed should be the unit for measuring electric current. They agreed on the definition of an ampere, and then all the countries represented passed laws stating that an ampere 55 should be defined as these scientists recommended. Today, therefore, an ampere is defined by law.
To tell when an ampere of current is flowing requires the use of two silver plates and a solution of silver nitrate. Silver nitrate has molecules made up of one atom of silver combined with a group of atoms called “nitrate.” You remember that the molecule of copper sulphate, discussed in our third letter, was formed by a copper atom and a group called sulphate. Nitrate is another group something like sulphate for it has oxygen atoms in it, but it has three instead of four, and instead of a sulphur atom there is an atom of nitrogen.
To determine when an ampere of current is flowing, you need two silver plates and a silver nitrate solution. Silver nitrate is made up of one silver atom combined with a group of atoms known as “nitrate.” You might recall that the molecule of copper sulfate we talked about in our third letter is made from one copper atom and a group called sulfate. Nitrate is another group similar to sulfate; it contains oxygen atoms but has three instead of four, and instead of a sulfur atom, it has a nitrogen atom.
When silver nitrate molecules go into solution they break up into ions just as copper sulphate does. One ion is a silver atom which has lost one electron. This electron was stolen from it by the nitrate part of the molecule when they dissociated. The nitrate ion, therefore, is formed by a nitrogen atom, three oxygen atoms, and one extra electron.
When silver nitrate molecules dissolve, they break apart into ions just like copper sulfate does. One ion is a silver atom that has lost one electron. This electron was taken from it by the nitrate part of the molecule when they separated. Therefore, the nitrate ion is made up of a nitrogen atom, three oxygen atoms, and one extra electron.
If we put two plates of silver into such a solution nothing will happen until we connect a battery to the plates. Then the battery takes electrons away from one plate and gives electrons to the other. Some of the atoms in the plate which the battery is robbing of electrons are just like the silver ions which are moving around in the solution. That’s why they can go out into the solution and play with the nitrate ions each of which has an extra electron which it stole from some silver atom. But the moment silver ions 56leave their plate we have more silver ions in the solution than we do sulphate ions.
If we put two silver plates into such a solution, nothing will happen until we connect a battery to the plates. Then, the battery takes electrons away from one plate and gives electrons to the other. Some of the atoms in the plate that the battery is stealing electrons from are just like the silver ions floating around in the solution. That’s why they can dissolve into the solution and interact with the nitrate ions, each of which has an extra electron taken from a silver atom. But the moment silver ions 56leave their plate, we have more silver ions in the solution than sulfate ions.
The only thing that can happen is for some of the silver ions to get out of the solution. They aren’t going back to the positive silver plate from which they just came. They go on toward the negative plate where the battery is sending an electron for every one which it takes away from the positive plate. There start off towards the negative plate, not only the ions which just came from the positive plate, but all the ions that are in the solution. The first one to arrive gets an electron but it can’t take it away from the silver plate. And why should it? As soon as it has got this electron it is again a normal silver atom. So it stays with the other atoms in the silver plate. That’s what happens right along. For every atom which is lost from the positive plate there is one added to the negative plate. The silver of the positive plate gradually wastes away and the negative plate gradually gets an extra coating of silver.
The only thing that can happen is for some of the silver ions to leave the solution. They aren’t going back to the positive silver plate they just came from. Instead, they move towards the negative plate, where the battery sends an electron for every one it takes away from the positive plate. Not just the ions that just left the positive plate head towards the negative plate, but all the ions in the solution. The first one to arrive gets an electron, but it can’t take it away from the silver plate. And why would it? As soon as it receives this electron, it becomes a normal silver atom again. So it stays with the other atoms in the silver plate. That’s how it goes continuously. For every atom that is lost from the positive plate, one is added to the negative plate. The silver on the positive plate gradually diminishes, while the negative plate gradually gets an extra layer of silver.
Every time the battery takes an electron away from the positive plate and gives it to the negative plate there is added to the negative plate an atom of silver. If the negative plate is weighed before the battery is connected and again after the battery is disconnected we can tell how much silver has been added to it. Suppose the current has been perfectly steady, that is, the same number of electrons streaming through the circuit each second. Then if we 57know how long the current has been running we can tell how much silver has been deposited each second.
Each time the battery removes an electron from the positive plate and transfers it to the negative plate, an atom of silver is added to the negative plate. If we weigh the negative plate before connecting the battery and again after disconnecting it, we can determine how much silver has been added. Let's assume the current has been perfectly steady, meaning the same number of electrons are flowing through the circuit each second. Then, if we 57know how long the current has been running, we can figure out how much silver has been deposited each second.
The law says that if silver is being deposited at the rate of 0.001118 gram each second then the current is one ampere. That’s a small amount of silver, only about a thousandth part of a gram, and you know that it takes 28.35 grams to make an ounce. It’s a very small amount of silver but it’s an enormous number of atoms. How many? Six billion billion, of course, for there is deposited one atom for each electron in the stream.
The law states that if silver is being deposited at a rate of 0.001118 grams per second, then the current is one ampere. That’s a tiny amount of silver, just about a thousandth of a gram, and it takes 28.35 grams to make an ounce. It’s a really small quantity of silver, but it represents an immense number of atoms. How many? Six billion billion, because one atom is deposited for each electron in the stream.
In my next letter I’ll tell you how we measure the pull which batteries can give to electrons, and then we shall be ready to go on with more about the audion.
In my next letter, I’ll explain how we measure the force that batteries can exert on electrons, and then we’ll be ready to dive deeper into the audion.
58LETTER 8
ELECTRON MOVEMENT FORCES
(This letter may be omitted on the first reading.)
(This letter can be skipped on the first read.)
Dear Young Man:
Dear Young Man:
I trust you have a fairly good idea that an ampere means a stream of electrons at a certain definite rate and hence that a current of say 3 amperes means a stream with three times as many electrons passing along each second.
I trust you have a good understanding that an ampere represents a flow of electrons at a specific rate and therefore, a current of about 3 amperes indicates a flow of three times as many electrons passing through each second.
In the third and fourth letters you found out why a battery drives electrons around a conducting circuit. You also found that there are several different kinds of batteries. Batteries differ in their abilities to drive electrons and it is therefore convenient to have some way of comparing them. We do this by measuring the electron-moving-force or “electromotive force” which each battery can exert. To express electromotive force and give the results of our measurements we must have some unit. The unit we use is called the “volt.”
In the third and fourth letters, you learned why a battery moves electrons around a conducting circuit. You also discovered that there are different types of batteries. Batteries vary in their ability to move electrons, so it's helpful to have a way to compare them. We do this by measuring the force that drives the electrons, known as "electromotive force." To express electromotive force and present the results of our measurements, we need a unit. The unit we use is called the "volt."
The volt is defined by law and is based on the suggestions of the same body of scientists who recommended the ampere of our last letter. They defined it by telling how to make a particular kind of battery and then saying that this battery had an electromotive force of a certain number of volts. One can buy such standard batteries, or standard 59cells as they are called, or he can make them for himself. To be sure that they are just right he can then send them to the Bureau of Standards and have them compared with the standard cells which the Bureau has.
The volt is officially defined and is based on the recommendations of the same group of scientists who suggested the ampere in our last letter. They defined it by explaining how to create a specific type of battery and then stating that this battery had an electromotive force of a certain number of volts. You can buy these standard batteries, or standard 59 cells as they are called, or you can make them yourself. To ensure they are accurate, you can send them to the Bureau of Standards to be compared with the standard cells that the Bureau has.
I don’t propose to tell you much about standard cells for you won’t have to use them until you come to study physics in real earnest. They are not good for ordinary purposes because the moment they go to work driving electrons the conditions inside them change so their electromotive force is changed. They are delicate little affairs and are useful only as standards with which to compare other batteries. And even as standard batteries they must be used in such a way that they are not required to drive any electrons.
I don’t plan to explain much about standard cells since you won’t need to know about them until you start studying physics seriously. They aren’t suitable for everyday use because as soon as they start driving electrons, the conditions inside them change and so does their electromotive force. They are fragile and only serve as benchmarks to compare other batteries. Even as standard batteries, they must be used in a way that doesn’t require them to drive any electrons.

Let’s see how it can be done. Suppose two boys sit opposite each other on the floor and brace their feet together. Then with their hands they take hold of a stick and pull in opposite directions. If both have the same stick-motive-force the stick will not move.
Let’s see how it can be done. Suppose two boys are sitting across from each other on the floor, pressing their feet together. Then, with their hands, they grab a stick and pull in opposite directions. If both have the same stick-pulling force, the stick will not move.
Now suppose we connect the negative feet–I mean negative terminals–of two batteries together as in Fig. 12. Then we connect their positive terminals together by a wire. In the wire there will be lots of free electrons ready to go to the positive plate of the battery which pulls the harder. If the batteries are equal in electromotive force these electrons will stay right where they are. There will be no stream 60of electrons and yet we’ll be using one of the batteries to compare with the other.
Now, let’s say we connect the negative terminals of two batteries together like in Fig. 12. Next, we connect their positive terminals with a wire. In that wire, there will be plenty of free electrons ready to move toward the positive side of the battery that’s pulling harder. If the batteries have the same voltage, these electrons will remain right where they are. There won’t be any flow of electrons, yet we’ll still use one battery to compare with the other.
That is all right, you think, but what are we to do when the batteries are not just equal in e. m. f.? (e. m. f. is code for electromotive force). I’ll tell you, because the telling includes some other ideas which will be valuable in your later reading.
That’s fine, you think, but what do we do when the batteries aren't just the same in e.m.f.? (e.m.f. stands for electromotive force). I’ll explain, because this involves some other concepts that will be helpful in your future reading.

Suppose we take batteries which aren’t going to be injured by being made to work–storage batteries will do nicely–and connect them in series as in Fig. 13. When batteries are in series they act like a single stronger battery, one whose e. m. f. is the sum of the e. m. f.’s of the separate batteries. Connect these batteries to a long fine wire as in Fig. 14. There is a stream of electrons along this wire. Next connect the negative terminal of the standard cell to the negative terminal of the storage batteries, that is, brace their feet against each other. Then connect a wire to the positive terminal of the standard cell. This wire acts just like a long arm sticking out from the positive plate of this cell.
Suppose we take batteries that won’t be damaged by being used—storage batteries will work well—and connect them in series as shown in Fig. 13. When batteries are in series, they function like a single, stronger battery, one with an e.m.f. that’s the total of the e.m.f.s of the individual batteries. Connect these batteries to a long, thin wire as in Fig. 14. There will be a flow of electrons along this wire. Next, connect the negative terminal of the standard cell to the negative terminal of the storage batteries, meaning they are braced against each other. Then connect a wire to the positive terminal of the standard cell. This wire behaves like a long arm extending from the positive plate of this cell.

Touch the end of the wire, which is p of Fig. 14, 61 to some point as a on the fine wire. Now what do we have? Right at a, of course, there are some free electrons and they hear the calls of both batteries. If the standard battery, S of the figure, calls the stronger they go to it. In that case move the end p nearer the positive plate of the battery B, so that it will have a chance to exert a stronger pull. Suppose we try at c and find the battery B is there the stronger. Then we can move back to some point, say b, where the pulls are equal.
Touch the end of the wire, which is p of Fig. 14, 61, to some point like a on the fine wire. So, what do we have? Right at a, there are some free electrons that respond to both batteries. If the standard battery, S from the figure, has a stronger call, the electrons will go towards it. In that case, move the end p closer to the positive plate of battery B, so that it can exert a stronger pull. Suppose we try at c and find that battery B is stronger there. Then we can move back to some point, say b, where the pulls are equal.
To make a test like this we put a sensitive current-measuring instrument in the wire which leads from the positive terminal of the standard cell. We also use a long fine wire so that there can never be much of an electron stream anyway. When the pulls are equal there will be no current through this instrument.
To conduct a test like this, we place a sensitive current-measuring device in the wire connected to the positive terminal of the standard cell. We also use a long, thin wire to ensure that there isn't a significant electron flow. When the forces are balanced, there will be no current flowing through this device.
As soon as we find out where the proper setting is we can replace S by some other battery, say X, which we wish to compare with S. We find the setting for that battery in the same way as we just did for S. Suppose it is at d in Fig. 14 while the setting for S was at b. We can see at once that X is stronger than S. The question, however, is how much stronger.
As soon as we find out the correct setting, we can swap out S for another battery, let’s call it X, which we want to compare with S. We determine the setting for that battery in the same way we just did for S. Let’s say it’s at d in Fig. 14 while the setting for S was at b. We can clearly see that X is stronger than S. The question, though, is how much stronger.
Perhaps it would be better to try to answer this question by talking about e. m. f.’s. It isn’t fair to speak only of the positive plate which calls, we must speak also of the negative plate which is shooing electrons away from itself. The idea of e. m. f. takes care of both these actions. The steady stream of 62electrons in the fine wire is due to the e. m. f. of the battery B, that is to the pull of the positive terminal and the shove of the negative.
Perhaps it would be better to answer this question by discussing e.m.f.s. It’s not fair to only mention the positive terminal, which attracts; we also need to talk about the negative terminal, which pushes electrons away. The concept of e.m.f. accounts for both of these actions. The constant flow of 62electrons in the fine wire is due to the e.m.f. of the battery B, which involves the attraction of the positive terminal and the repulsion of the negative.
If the wire is uniform, that is the same throughout its length, then each inch of it requires just as much e. m. f. as any other inch. Two inches require twice the e. m. f. which one inch requires. We know how much e. m. f. it takes to keep the electron stream going in the part of the wire from n to b. It takes just the e. m. f. of the standard cell, S, because when that had its feet braced at n it pulled just as hard at b as did the big battery B.
If the wire is uniform, meaning it's the same along its entire length, then each inch requires the same amount of e.m.f. as any other inch. Two inches need twice the e.m.f. that one inch needs. We know how much e.m.f. it takes to keep the electron flow going in the section of the wire from n to b. It takes just the e.m.f. of the standard cell, S, because when it was connected at n, it pulled as hard at b as the large battery B did.
Suppose the distance n to d (usually written nd) is twice as great as that from n to b (nb). That means that battery X has twice the e. m. f. of battery S. You remember that X could exert the same force through the length of wire nd, as could the large battery. That is twice what cell S can do. Therefore if we know how many volts to call the e. m. f. of the standard cell we can say that X has an e. m. f. of twice as many volts.
Suppose the distance n to d (usually written nd) is twice as far as that from n to b (nb). This means that battery X has double the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of battery S. You remember that X could deliver the same power over the length of wire nd as the large battery could. That’s double what cell S can provide. So, if we know how many volts the e.m.f. of the standard cell is, we can say that X has an e.m.f. that is twice that amount in volts.
If we measured dry batteries this way we should find that they each had an e. m. f. of about 1.46 volts. A storage battery would be found to have about 2.4 volts when fully charged and perhaps as low as 2.1 volts when we had run it for a while.
If we measured dry batteries this way, we would find that each one had an e.m.f. of about 1.46 volts. A storage battery would show about 2.4 volts when fully charged and maybe as low as 2.1 volts after using it for a while.
That is the way in which to compare batteries and to measure their e. m. f.’s, but you see it takes a lot of time. It is easier to use a “voltmeter” which is an instrument for measuring e. m. f.’s. Here is how one could be made.
That’s how you compare batteries and measure their e.m.f.s, but it takes a lot of time. It’s easier to use a "voltmeter," which is an instrument for measuring e.m.f.s. Here’s how you could make one.
63First there is made a current-measuring instrument which is quite sensitive, so that its pointer will show a deflection when only a very small stream of electrons is passing through the instrument. We could make one in the same way as we made the ammeter of the last letter but there are other better ways of which I’ll tell you later. Then we connect a good deal of fine wire in series with the instrument for a reason which I’ll tell you in a minute. The next and last step is to calibrate.
63First, we create a sensitive current-measuring instrument that can show a deflection even when only a tiny stream of electrons is flowing through it. We could make one just like the ammeter from the last letter, but there are better methods, which I'll explain later. Next, we connect a lot of fine wire in series with the instrument for a reason I'll explain shortly. The final step is to calibrate it.
We know how many volts of e. m. f. are required to keep going the electron stream between n and b–we know that from the e. m. f. of our standard cell. Suppose then that we connect this new instrument, which we have just made, to the wire at n and b as in Fig. 15. Some of the electrons at n which are so anxious to get away from the negative plate of battery B can now travel as far as b through the wire of the new instrument. They do so and the pointer swings around to some new position. Opposite that we mark the number of volts which the standard battery told us there was between n and b.
We know how many volts of e.m.f. are needed to maintain the flow of electrons between n and b—we have that from the e.m.f. of our standard cell. Now, let's connect this new device we just made to the wires at n and b, as shown in Fig. 15. Some of the electrons at n, eager to escape from the negative plate of battery B, can now travel all the way to b through the wire of the new device. They do so, and the pointer moves to a new position. Across from that, we note the number of volts that the standard battery indicated was between n and b.

If we move the end of the wire from b to d the pointer will take a new position. Opposite this we mark twice the number of volts of the standard cell. We can run it to a point e where the distance ne is one-half nb, and mark our scale with half the number of volts of the standard cell, and so on for other 64 positions along the wire. That’s the way we calibrate a sensitive current-measuring instrument (with its added wire, of course) so that it will read volts. It is now a voltmeter.
If we move the end of the wire from b to d, the pointer will show a new position. Directly opposite this, we mark twice the number of volts of the standard cell. We can extend it to a point e where the distance ne is half of nb, and label our scale with half the number of volts of the standard cell, and continue this for other 64 positions along the wire. That’s how we calibrate a sensitive current-measuring instrument (with its extra wire, of course) so that it reads volts. It is now a voltmeter.
If we connect a voltmeter to the battery X as in Fig. 16 the pointer will tell us the number of volts in the e. m. f. of X, for the pointer will take the same position as it did when the voltmeter was connected between n and d.
If we hook up a voltmeter to battery X as shown in Fig. 16, the needle will indicate the voltage of the e.m.f. of X, because the needle will point the same way as it did when the voltmeter was connected between n and d.
There is only one thing to watch out for in all this. We must be careful that the voltmeter is so made that it won’t offer too easy a path for electrons to follow. We only want to find how hard a battery can pull an electron, for that is what we mean by e. m. f. Of course, we must let a small stream of electrons flow through the voltmeter so as to make the pointer move. That is why voltmeters of this kind are made out of a long piece of fine wire or else have a coil of fine wire in series with the current-measuring part. The fine wire makes a long and narrow path for the electrons and so there can be only a small stream. Usually we describe this condition by saying that a voltmeter has a high resistance.
There’s just one thing to be cautious about in all of this. We need to ensure that the voltmeter is designed in a way that it doesn’t make it too easy for the electrons to flow through. We only want to measure how strongly a battery can pull an electron, which is what we refer to as e.m.f. Of course, we have to allow a small current of electrons to pass through the voltmeter to make the pointer move. That’s why voltmeters like this are made with a long piece of fine wire or have a coil of fine wire connected in series with the part that measures current. The fine wire creates a long and narrow path for the electrons, limiting the flow to just a small current. We usually describe this situation by saying that a voltmeter has high resistance.

Fine wires offer more resistance to electron streams than do heavy wires of the same length. If a wire is the same diameter all along, the longer the length of it which we use the greater is the resistance which is offered to an electron stream.
Fine wires provide more resistance to electron flow than thicker wires of the same length. If a wire maintains the same diameter throughout, the longer it is, the greater the resistance to electron flow will be.
I can show you what an ohm is if I tell you a simple way to measure a resistance. Suppose you have a wire or coil of wire and want to know its resistance. Connect it in series with a battery and an ammeter as shown in Fig. 17. The same electron stream passes through all parts of this circuit and the ammeter tells us what this stream is in amperes. Now connect a voltmeter to the two ends of the coil as shown in the figure. The voltmeter tells in volts how much e. m. f. is being applied to force the current through the coil. Divide the number of volts by the number of amperes and the quotient (answer) is the number of ohms of resistance in the coil.
I can show you what an ohm is by explaining a simple way to measure resistance. Imagine you have a wire or a coil of wire, and you want to find out its resistance. Connect it in series with a battery and an ammeter as shown in Fig. 17. The same flow of electrons travels through all parts of this circuit, and the ammeter indicates how much this flow is in amperes. Next, connect a voltmeter to both ends of the coil as shown in the figure. The voltmeter shows in volts how much e.m.f. is being applied to push the current through the coil. Divide the number of volts by the number of amperes, and the result is the number of ohms of resistance in the coil.

Suppose the ammeter shows a current of one ampere and the voltmeter an e. m. f. of one volt. Then dividing 1 by 1 gives 1. That means that the coil has a resistance of one ohm. It also means one ohm is such a resistance that one volt will send through it a current of one ampere. You can get lots of meaning out of this. For example, it means also 66that one volt will send a current of one ampere through a resistance of one ohm.
Suppose the ammeter reads a current of one ampere and the voltmeter shows an e.m.f. of one volt. Then dividing 1 by 1 gives you 1. That means the coil has a resistance of one ohm. It also means that one ohm is the resistance that allows one volt to send a current of one ampere through it. There’s a lot of significance in this. For instance, it also means 66 that one volt will push a current of one ampere through a resistance of one ohm.
How many ohms would the coil have if it took 5 volts to send 2 amperes through it. Solution: Divide 5 by 2 and you get 2.5. Therefore the coil would have a resistance of 2.5 ohms.
How many ohms would the coil have if it took 5 volts to send 2 amperes through it? Solution: Divide 5 by 2 and you get 2.5. Therefore, the coil would have a resistance of 2.5 ohms.
Try another. If a coil of resistance three ohms is carrying two amperes what is the voltage across the terminals of the coil? For 1 ohm it would take 1 volt to give a current of 1 ampere, wouldn’t it? For 3 ohms it takes three times as much to give one ampere. To give twice this current would take twice 3 volts. That is, 2 amperes in 3 ohms requires 2x3 volts.
Try another one. If a three ohm resistor is carrying two amperes, what’s the voltage across the terminals of the resistor? For 1 ohm, it takes 1 volt to produce a current of 1 ampere, right? For 3 ohms, it takes three times that to produce 1 ampere. To get twice that current would take twice 3 volts. So, 2 amperes in 3 ohms requires 2x3 volts.
Here’s one for you to try by yourself. If an e. m. f. of 8 volts is sending current through a resistance of 2 ohms, how much current is flowing? Notice that I told the number of ohms and the number of volts, what are you going to tell? Don’t tell just the number; tell how many and what.
Here’s one for you to try on your own. If an emf of 8 volts is sending current through a resistance of 2 ohms, how much current is flowing? Notice that I mentioned the resistance in ohms and the voltage in volts; what are you going to mention? Don’t just give the number; specify how much and what it is.
67LETTER 9
THE AUDIO CHARACTERISTIC
My Dear Young Student:
My Dear Young Student
Although there is much in Letters 7 and 8 which it is well to learn and to think about, there are only three of the ideas which you must have firmly grasped to get the most out of this letter which I am now going to write you about the audion.
Although there’s a lot in Letters 7 and 8 that’s valuable to learn and consider, there are only three key ideas that you need to fully understand to get the most out of this letter I’m about to write to you about the audion.
First: Electric currents are streams of electrons. We measure currents in amperes. To measure a current we may connect into the circuit an ammeter.
First: Electric currents are flows of electrons. We measure currents in amperes. To measure a current, we can connect an ammeter to the circuit.
Second: Electrons move in a circuit when there is an electron-moving-force, that is an electromotive force or e. m. f. We measure e. m. f.’s in volts. To measure an e. m. f. we connect a voltmeter to the two points between which the e. m. f. is active.
Second: Electrons move in a circuit when there is a force that pushes them, called electromotive force or emf. We measure emf in volts. To measure an emf, we connect a voltmeter to the two points between which the emf is active.
Third: What current any particular e. m. f. will cause depends upon the circuit in which it is active. Circuits differ in the resistance which they offer to e. m. f.’s. For any particular e. m. f. (that is for any given e. m. f.) the resulting current will be smaller the greater the resistance of the circuit. We measure resistance in ohms. To measure it we find the quotient of the number of volts applied to the circuit by the number of amperes which flow.
Third: The current produced by a specific electromotive force (e.m.f.) depends on the circuit it's in. Circuits vary in the resistance they present to e.m.f.s. For any given e.m.f., the resulting current will be smaller if the circuit's resistance is greater. We measure resistance in ohms. To measure it, we divide the number of volts applied to the circuit by the number of amperes flowing.
In my sixth letter I told you something of how the audion works. It would be worth while to read again that letter. You remember that the current in the 68plate circuit can be controlled by the e. m. f. which is applied to the grid circuit. There is a relationship between the plate current and the grid voltage which is peculiar or characteristic to the tube. So we call such a relationship “a characteristic.” Let us see how it may be found and what it will be.
In my sixth letter, I explained a bit about how the audion works. It would be a good idea to read that letter again. You remember that the current in the 68 plate circuit can be controlled by the e.m.f. applied to the grid circuit. There's a specific relationship between the plate current and the grid voltage that's unique to the tube. We call this kind of relationship “a characteristic.” Let’s explore how we can determine it and what it will be.
Connect an ammeter in the plate- or B-circuit, of the tube so as to measure the plate-circuit current. You will find that almost all books use the letter “I” to stand for current. The reason is that scientists used to speak of the “intensity of an electric current” so that “I” really stands for intensity. We use I to stand for something more than the word “current.” It is our symbol for whatever an ammeter would read, that is for the amount of current.
Connect an ammeter in the plate or B-circuit of the tube to measure the plate-circuit current. You'll notice that nearly all books use the letter “I” for current. This is because scientists used to refer to the “intensity of an electric current,” so “I” actually represents intensity. We use I to signify something beyond just the word “current.” It is our symbol for whatever an ammeter would read, which is the amount of current.

Another convenience in symbols is this: We shall frequently want to speak of the currents in several different circuits. It saves time to use another letter along with the letter I to show the circuit to which we refer. For example, we are going to talk about the current in the B-circuit of the audion, so we call that current IB. We write the letter B below the line on which I stands. That is why we say the B is subscript, meaning “written below.” When you are reading to yourself be sure to read IB as “eye-bee” or else as “eye-subscript-bee.” IB therefore will stand for the number of amperes in the 69 plate circuit of the audion. In the same way IA would stand for the current in the filament circuit.
Another convenience in using symbols is this: We often need to refer to the currents in different circuits. It’s quicker to use another letter alongside the letter I to indicate the circuit we mean. For example, when we talk about the current in the B-circuit of the audion, we call that current IB. We write the letter B below the line where I is placed. This is why we say that B is subscript, meaning "written below." When you're reading to yourself, make sure to say IB as “eye-bee” or “eye-subscript-bee.” Thus, IB represents the number of amperes in the 69 plate circuit of the audion. Similarly, IA represents the current in the filament circuit.
We are going to talk about e. m. f.’s also. The letter “E” stands for the number of volts of e. m. f. in a circuit. In the filament circuit the battery has EA volts. In the plate circuit the e. m. f. is EB volts. If we put a battery in the grid circuit we can let EC represent the number of volts applied to the grid-filament or C-circuit.
We are going to discuss e.m.f.s as well. The letter “E” represents the voltage of e.m.f. in a circuit. In the filament circuit, the battery has EA volts. In the plate circuit, the e.m.f. is EB volts. If we place a battery in the grid circuit, we can use EC to represent the voltage applied to the grid-filament or C-circuit.
The characteristic relation which we are after is one between grid voltage, that is EC, and plate current, that is IB. So we call it the EC–IB characteristic. The dash between the letters is not a subtraction sign but merely a dash to separate the letters. Now we’ll find the “ee-see-eye-bee” characteristic.
The relationship we're looking for is between grid voltage, which is EC, and plate current, which is IB. So we refer to it as the EC–IB characteristic. The dash between the letters isn’t a subtraction sign; it’s just a separator. Now let’s identify the “ee-see-eye-bee” characteristic.
Connect some small dry cells in series for use in the grid circuit. Then connect the filament to the middle cell as in Fig. 19. Take the wire which comes from the grid and put a battery clip on it, then you can connect the grid anywhere you want along this series of batteries. See Fig. 18. In the figure this movable clip is represented by an arrow head. You can see that if it is at a the battery will make the grid positive. If it is moved to b the grid will be more positive. On the other hand if the clip is at o there will be no e. m. f. applied to the grid. If it is at c the grid will be made negative.
Connect some small dry batteries in series for use in the grid circuit. Then connect the filament to the middle battery as shown in Fig. 19. Take the wire coming from the grid and attach a battery clip to it, allowing you to connect the grid anywhere along this series of batteries. See Fig. 18. In the figure, this movable clip is represented by an arrowhead. You can see that if it’s at a, the battery will make the grid positive. If it’s moved to b, the grid will be even more positive. On the other hand, if the clip is at o, there will be no e.m.f. applied to the grid. If it’s at c, the grid will be negative.
Between grid and filament there is placed a voltmeter which will tell how much e. m. f. is applied to the grid, that is, tell the value of EC, for any position whatever of the clip.
Between the grid and the filament, there's a voltmeter that indicates how much voltage is applied to the grid, meaning it shows the value of EC for any position of the clip.
70We shall start with the filament heated to a deep red. The manufacturers of the audion tell the purchaser what current should flow through the filament so that there will be the proper emission of electrons. There are easy ways of finding out for one’s self but we shall not stop to describe them. The makers also tell how many volts to apply to the plate, that is what value EB should have. We could find this out also for ourselves but we shall not stop to do so.
70We'll begin with the filament glowing a deep red. The manufacturers of the audion inform the buyer of the current that should flow through the filament to ensure proper electron emission. There are simple methods to figure this out on your own, but we won't take the time to explain them. They also specify how many volts to apply to the plate, meaning what value EB should be. We could also discover this ourselves, but we won't pause to do that.

Now we set the battery clip so that there is no voltage applied to the grid; that is, we start with EC equal to zero. Then we read the ammeter in the plate circuit to find the value of IB which corresponds to this condition of the grid.
Now we adjust the battery clip so that there's no voltage applied to the grid; that is, we start with EC at zero. Then we check the ammeter in the plate circuit to find the value of IB that matches this condition of the grid.
Next we move the clip so as to make the grid as positive as one battery will make it, that is we move the clip to a in Fig. 19. We now have a different value of EC and will find a different value of IB when we read the ammeter. Next move the clip to apply two batteries to the grid. We get a new pair of values for EC and IB, getting EC from the voltmeter and IB from the ammeter. As we continue in this way, increasing EC, we find that the current IB increases 71 for a while and then after we have reached a certain value of EC the current IB stops increasing. Adding more batteries and making the grid more positive doesn’t have any effect on the plate current.
Next, we adjust the clip to make the grid as positive as a single battery allows, moving the clip to a in Fig. 19. We now have a different value of EC and will get a different reading for IB on the ammeter. Then, we move the clip to connect two batteries to the grid. This gives us a new set of values for EC and IB, with EC measured by the voltmeter and IB from the ammeter. As we continue this process, increasing EC, we observe that the current IB rises for a while, and then, once we reach a certain value of EC, the current IB levels off. Adding more batteries to make the grid more positive doesn’t change the plate current.

Before I tell you why this happens I want to show you how to make a picture of the pairs of values of EC and IB which we have been reading on the voltmeter and ammeter.
Before I explain why this happens, I want to show you how to create a graph of the pairs of values of EC and IB that we have been reading on the voltmeter and ammeter.
Imagine a city where all the streets are at right angles and the north and south streets are called streets and numbered while the east and west thorofares are called avenues. I’ll draw the map as in Fig. 20. Right through the center of the city goes Main Street. But the people who laid out the roads were mathematicians and instead of calling it Main Street they called it “Zero Street.” The first street east of Zero St. we should have called “East First Street” but they called it “Positive 1 St.” and the 72next beyond “Positive 2 St.,” and so on. West of the main street they called the first street “Negative 1 St.” and so on.
Imagine a city where all the streets intersect at right angles, with the north-south streets named and numbered as "streets," and the east-west roads referred to as "avenues." I'll sketch the map as shown in Fig. 20. Main Street runs right through the center of the city. However, the planners were mathematicians, so instead of calling it Main Street, they named it "Zero Street." The first street east of Zero St. should have been called "East First Street," but they named it "Positive 1 St.," with the next one being "Positive 2 St." and so on. To the west of the main street, the first street is called "Negative 1 St." and continues from there.
When they came to name the avenues they were just as precise and mathematical. They called the main avenue “Zero Ave.” and those north of it “Positive 1 Ave.,” “Positive 2 Ave.” and so on. Of course, the avenues south of Zero Ave. they called Negative.
When it was time to name the streets, they were just as exact and calculated. They named the main street “Zero Ave.” and the ones north of it “Positive 1 Ave.,” “Positive 2 Ave.,” and so on. Naturally, the streets south of Zero Ave. were called Negative.
The Town Council went almost crazy on the subject of numbering; they numbered everything. The silent policeman which stood at the corner of “Positive 2 St.” and “Positive 1 Ave.” was marked that way. Half way between Positive 2 St. and Positive 3 St. there was a garage which set back about two-tenths of a block from Positive 1 Ave. The Council numbered it and called it “Positive 2.5 St. and Positive 1.2 Ave.” Most of the people spoke of it as “Plus 2.5 St. and Plus 1.2 Ave.”
The Town Council went nearly crazy over numbering; they labeled everything. The silent policeman at the corner of “Positive 2 St.” and “Positive 1 Ave.” was marked that way. Halfway between Positive 2 St. and Positive 3 St., there was a garage that sat back about two-tenths of a block from Positive 1 Ave. The Council numbered it and called it “Positive 2.5 St. and Positive 1.2 Ave.” Most people referred to it as “Plus 2.5 St. and Plus 1.2 Ave.”
Sometime later there was an election in the city and a new Council was elected. The members were mostly young electricians and the new Highway Commissioner was a radio enthusiast. At the first meeting the Council changed the names of all the avenues to “Mil-amperes”[3] and of all the streets to “Volts.”
Sometime later, there was an election in the city, and a new Council was elected. The members were mostly young electricians, and the new Highway Commissioner was a radio fan. At the first meeting, the Council changed the names of all the avenues to “Mil-amperes”[3] and all the streets to “Volts.”
Then the Highway Commissioner who had just been taking a set of voltmeter and ammeter readings on an audion moved that there should be a new 73road known as “Audion Characteristic.” He said the road should pass through the following points:
Then the Highway Commissioner, who had just been taking voltmeter and ammeter readings on an audion, proposed that a new 73 road be created called “Audion Characteristic.” He stated that the road should go through the following points:
Zero Volt and Plus 1.0 Mil-ampere
Plus 2.0 Volts and Plus 1.7
Mil-amperes
Plus 4.0 Volts and Plus 2.6 Mil-amperes
Plus 6.0
Volts and Plus 3.4 Mil-amperes
Plus 8.0 Volts and Plus 4.3
Mil-amperes
Zero Volt and Plus 1.0 mA
Plus 2.0 Volts and Plus 1.7 mA
Plus 4.0 Volts and Plus 2.6 mA
Plus 6.0 Volts and Plus 3.4 mA
Plus 8.0 Volts and Plus 4.3 mA
And so on. Fig. 21 shows the new road.
And so on. Fig. 21 shows the new road.

One member of the Council jumped up and said “But what if the grid is made negative?” The Commissioner had forgotten to see what happened so he went home to take more readings.
One member of the Council jumped up and said, “But what if the grid goes negative?” The Commissioner had forgotten to check what happened, so he went home to take more readings.
He shifted the battery clip along, starting at c of 74 Fig. 22. At the next meeting of the Council he brought in the following list of readings and hence of points on his proposed road.
He moved the battery clip over, starting at c of 74 Fig. 22. At the next Council meeting, he presented the following list of readings and points for his proposed route.
Minus | 1.0 | Volts | and | Plus | 0.6 | Mil-ampere |
" | 2.0 | " | " | " | 0.4 | " |
" | 3.0 | " | " | " | 0.2 | " |
" | 4.0 | " | " | " | 0.1 | " |
" | 5.0 | " | " | " | 0.0 | " |
Then he showed the other members of the Council on the map of Fig. 23 how the Audion Characteristic would look.
Then he showed the other members of the Council on the map of Fig. 23 what the Audion Characteristic would look like.

There was considerable discussion after that and it appeared that different designs and makes of audions would have different characteristic curves. They all had the same general form of curve but they would pass through different sets of points depending upon the design and upon the B-battery voltage. It was several meetings later, however, before they found out what effects were due to the form of the curve. Right after this they found that they could get much better results with their radio sets.
There was a lot of discussion afterward, and it seemed that different designs and brands of audions had different characteristic curves. They all had a similar general shape, but they went through different sets of points depending on the design and the B-battery voltage. It took several more meetings, though, before they figured out what effects were due to the shape of the curve. Shortly after this, they discovered that they could achieve much better results with their radio sets.
Now look at the audion characteristic. Making the grid positive, that is going on the positive side of the zero volts in our map, makes the plate current 75larger. You remember that I told you in Letter 6 how the grid, when positive, helped call electrons away from the filament and so made a larger stream of electrons in the plate circuit. The grid calls electrons away from the filament. It can’t call them out of it; they have to come out themselves as I explained to you in the fifth letter.
Now let's look at the audio characteristics. Making the grid positive, meaning going to the positive side of zero volts in our diagram, increases the plate current. Remember, I mentioned in Letter 6 how a positive grid helps attract electrons away from the filament, resulting in a larger flow of electrons in the plate circuit. The grid attracts electrons away from the filament. It can't pull them out; they have to come out on their own, as I explained in the fifth letter.

You can see that as we make the grid more and more positive, that is, make it call louder and louder, a condition will be reached where it won’t do it any good to call any louder, for it will already be getting all the electrons away from the filament just as fast as they are emitted. Making the grid more positive after that will not increase the plate current any. That’s why the characteristic flattens off as you see at high values of grid voltage.
You can see that as we increase the grid's positivity, meaning we make it call louder and louder, there will come a point where calling any louder won't help at all, because it will already be pulling the electrons from the filament just as quickly as they are being emitted. Increasing the grid positivity beyond that won't boost the plate current any further. That’s why the characteristic levels off at high grid voltage values.
The arrangement which we pictured in Fig. 22 for 76making changes in the grid voltage is simple but it doesn’t let us change the voltage by less than that of a single battery cell. I want to show you a way which will. You’ll find it very useful to know and it is easily understood for it is something like the arrangement of Fig. 14 in the preceding letter.
The setup we illustrated in Fig. 22 for 76adjusting the grid voltage is straightforward, but it only allows us to change the voltage by the amount of a single battery cell. I want to show you a method that can do better. This will be really helpful to understand, and it's easy to grasp because it's similar to the arrangement in Fig. 14 from the previous letter.

Connect the cells as in Fig. 24 to a fine wire. About the middle of this wire connect the filament. As before use a clip on the end of the wire from the grid. If the grid is connected to a in the figure there is applied to the grid circuit that part of the e. m. f. of the battery which is active in the length of wire between o and a. The point a is nearer the positive plate of the battery than is the point o. So the grid will be positive and the filament negative.
Connect the cells as shown in Fig. 24 to a fine wire. In the middle of this wire, connect the filament. As before, use a clip at the end of the wire from the grid. If the grid is connected to a in the figure, that part of the battery's e.m.f. is applied to the grid circuit within the length of wire between o and a. The point a is closer to the positive plate of the battery than the point o. Therefore, the grid will be positive, and the filament will be negative.
On the other hand, if the clip is connected at b the grid will be negative with respect to the filament. We can, therefore, make the grid positive or negative depending on which side of o we connect the clip. How large the e. m. f. is which will be applied to the grid depends, of course, upon how far away from o the clip is connected.
On the other hand, if the clip is connected at b, the grid will be negative compared to the filament. Therefore, we can make the grid either positive or negative based on which side of o we attach the clip. The amount of e.m.f. applied to the grid depends on how far from o the clip is connected.
Suppose you took the clip in your hand and slid it along in contact with the wire, first from o to a 77 and then back again through o to b and so on back and forth. You would be making the grid alternately positive and negative, wouldn’t you? That is, you would be applying to the grid an e. m. f. which increases to some positive value and then, decreasing to zero, reverses, and increases just as much, only to decrease to zero, where it started. If you do this over and over again, taking always the same time for one round trip of the clip you will be impressing on the grid circuit an “alternating e. m. f.”
Suppose you took the clip in your hand and slid it along the wire, first from o to a 77 and then back again through o to b and so on back and forth. You would be making the grid alternately positive and negative, right? That is, you would be applying to the grid an e.m.f. that increases to some positive value and then decreases to zero, reversing, and increasing just as much, only to decrease to zero, where it started. If you do this over and over again, always taking the same time for one round trip of the clip, you will be impressing on the grid circuit an “alternating e.m.f.”
What’s going to happen in the plate circuit? When there is no e. m. f. applied to the grid circuit, that is when the grid potential (possibilities) is zero, there is a definite current in the plate circuit. That current we can find from our characteristic of Fig. 23 for it is where the curve crosses Zero Volts. As the grid becomes positive the current rises above this value. When the grid is made negative the current falls below this value. The current, IB, then is made alternately greater and less than the current when EC is zero.
What will happen in the plate circuit? When there is no e.m.f. applied to the grid circuit, meaning the grid potential (possibilities) is zero, there is a definite current in the plate circuit. We can determine that current from our characteristic in Fig. 23, which is where the curve crosses zero volts. As the grid becomes positive, the current increases above this value. When the grid becomes negative, the current drops below this value. The current, IB, is then alternately greater and less than the current when EC is zero.
You might spend a little time thinking over this, seeing what happens when an alternating e. m. f. is applied to the grid of an audion, for that is going to be fundamental to our study of radio.
You might want to take a moment to think about this and see what occurs when an alternating voltage is applied to the grid of a vacuum tube, because that's going to be essential to our study of radio.
A mil-ampere is a thousandth of an ampere just as a millimeter is a thousandth of a meter.
A milliamp is one-thousandth of an amp, just like a millimeter is one-thousandth of a meter.
78LETTER 10
Condensers and coils
Dear Son:
Dear Son:
In the last letter we learned of an alternating e. m. f. The way of producing it, which I described, is very crude and I want to tell how to make the audion develop an alternating e. m. f. for itself. That is what the audion does in the transmitting set of a radio telephone. But an audion can’t do it all alone. It must have associated with it some coils and a condenser. You know what I mean by coils but you have yet to learn about condensers.
In the last letter, we talked about an alternating e.m.f. The method I described for producing it is quite basic, and I want to explain how to have the audion generate an alternating e.m.f. on its own. That's what the audion does in the transmitting set of a radio telephone. However, an audion can't handle it by itself. It needs to be paired with some coils and a capacitor. You understand what I mean by coils, but you still need to learn about capacitors.
A condenser is merely a gap in an otherwise conducting circuit. It’s a gap across which electrons cannot pass so that if there is an e. m. f. in the circuit, electrons will be very plentiful on one side of the gap and scarce on the other side. If there are to be many electrons waiting beside the gap there must be room for them. For that reason we usually provide waiting-rooms for the electrons on each side of the gap. Metal plates or sheets of tinfoil serve nicely for this purpose. Look at Fig. 25. You see a battery and a circuit which would be conducting except for the gap at C. On each side of the gap there is a sheet of metal. The metal sheets may be separated by air or mica or paraffined paper. The 79combination of gap, plates, and whatever is between, provided it is not conducting, is called a condenser.
A condenser is just a break in an otherwise conductive circuit. It’s a break that electrons can’t cross, so if there’s an electromotive force in the circuit, there will be a lot of electrons on one side of the break and very few on the other. If there are going to be a lot of electrons waiting by the gap, there needs to be space for them. That’s why we usually create waiting areas for the electrons on each side of the break. Metal plates or sheets of tin foil work well for this. Check out Fig. 25. You see a battery and a circuit that would conduct except for the gap at C. On each side of the break, there’s a metal sheet. The metal sheets can be separated by air, mica, or paraffined paper. The 79 combination of the gap, plates, and whatever is between them, as long as it isn't conductive, is called a condenser.
Let us see what happens when we connect a battery to a condenser as in the figure. The positive terminal of the battery calls electrons from one plate of the condenser while the negative battery-terminal drives electrons away from itself toward the other plate of the condenser. One plate of the condenser, therefore, becomes positive while the other plate becomes negative.
Let’s see what happens when we connect a battery to a capacitor as shown in the figure. The positive terminal of the battery attracts electrons from one plate of the capacitor, while the negative terminal pushes electrons away from itself toward the other plate of the capacitor. As a result, one plate of the capacitor becomes positive, and the other plate becomes negative.

You know that this action of the battery will go on until there are so many electrons in the negative plate of the condenser that they prevent the battery from adding any more electrons to that plate. The same thing happens at the other condenser plate. The positive terminal of the battery calls electrons away from the condenser plate which it is making positive until so many electrons have left that the protons in the atoms of the plate are calling for electrons to stay home just as loudly and effectively as the positive battery-terminal is calling them away.
You know that the battery will keep working until there are so many electrons on the negative plate of the capacitor that they stop the battery from adding more electrons to that plate. The same process occurs on the other plate. The positive terminal of the battery pulls electrons away from the capacitor plate, which it is making positive, until there are so few electrons left that the protons in the atoms of the plate are attracting electrons just as strongly as the positive terminal of the battery is pulling them away.
When both these conditions are reached–and they are both reached at the same time–then the battery has to stop driving electrons around the circuit. The battery has not enough e. m. f. to drive any more electrons. Why? Because the condenser has now just enough e. m. f. with which to oppose the battery.
When both of these conditions are met—and they happen simultaneously—then the battery must stop pushing electrons through the circuit. The battery no longer has enough e.m.f. to push any more electrons. Why? Because the capacitor now has just enough e.m.f. to oppose the battery.
It would be well to learn at once the right words 80to use in describing this action. We say that the battery sends a “charging current” around its circuit and “charges the condenser” until it has the same e. m. f. When the battery is first connected to the condenser there is lots of space in the waiting-rooms so there is a great rush or surge of electrons into one plate and away from the other. Just at this first instant the charging current, therefore, is large but it decreases rapidly, for the moment electrons start to pile up on one plate of the condenser and to leave the other, an e. m. f. builds up on the condenser. This e. m. f., of course, opposes that of the battery so that the net e. m. f. acting to move electrons round the circuit is no longer that of the battery, but is the difference between the e. m. f. of the battery and that of the condenser. And so, with each added electron, the e. m. f. of the condenser increases until finally it is just equal to that of the battery and there is no net e. m. f. to act.
It’s important to understand the right terms to describe this process. We say that the battery sends a “charging current” through its circuit and “charges the capacitor” until it has the same voltage. When the battery is first connected to the capacitor, there’s a lot of space available, so there’s a strong rush of electrons into one plate and away from the other. At this very first moment, the charging current is large, but it quickly decreases because as electrons start to accumulate on one plate of the capacitor and leave the other, a voltage builds up across the capacitor. This voltage, of course, opposes that of the battery, so the total voltage driving electrons around the circuit is no longer just from the battery, but is the difference between the battery’s voltage and the capacitor’s voltage. As more electrons are added, the voltage of the capacitor increases until it finally equals that of the battery, and there’s no longer any net voltage to drive the current.
What would happen if we should then disconnect the battery? The condenser would be left with its extra electrons in the negative plate and with its positive plate lacking the same number of electrons. That is, the condenser would be left charged and its e. m. f. would be of the same number of volts as the battery.
What would happen if we disconnected the battery? The capacitor would have extra electrons on the negative plate and the positive plate would be missing the same number of electrons. In other words, the capacitor would be charged and its emf would be the same voltage as the battery.

Now suppose we connect a short wire between the plates of the condenser as in Fig. 26. The electrons rush home from the negative plate to the positive plate. As fast as electrons get home 81the e. m. f. decreases. When they are all back the e. m. f. has been reduced to zero. Sometimes we say that “the condenser discharges.” The “discharge current” starts with a rush the moment the conducting path is offered between the two plates. The e. m. f. of the condenser falls, the discharge current grows smaller, and in a very short time the condenser is completely discharged.
Now let's say we connect a short wire between the plates of the capacitor as shown in Fig. 26. The electrons quickly move from the negative plate to the positive plate. As soon as the electrons return home, 81 the electromotive force (e.m.f.) decreases. When all the electrons are back, the e.m.f. drops to zero. Sometimes we say that "the capacitor discharges." The "discharge current" starts with a rush the moment a conductive path is created between the two plates. The e.m.f. of the capacitor decreases, the discharge current grows weaker, and in a very short time, the capacitor is fully discharged.

That’s what happens when there is a short conducting path for the discharge current. If that were all that could happen I doubt if there would be any radio communication to-day. But if we connect a coil of wire between two plates of a charged condenser, as in Fig. 27, then something of great interest happens. To understand you must know something more about electron streams.
That’s what happens when there’s a short path for the discharge current. If that were all that could happen, I doubt there would be any radio communication today. But if we connect a coil of wire between two plates of a charged capacitor, like in Fig. 27, then something really interesting occurs. To understand this, you need to know a bit more about electron streams.
Suppose we should wind a few turns of wire on a cylindrical core, say on a stiff cardboard tube. We shall use insulated wire. Now start from one end of the coil, say a, and follow along the coiled wire for a few turns and then scratch off the insulation and solder onto the coil two wires, b, and c, as shown in Fig. 28. The further end of the coil we shall call d. Now let’s arrange a battery and switch so that we can send a current through the part of the coil between a and b. Arrange also a current-measuring instrument so as to show if any current is flowing in the part of the coil between c and d. For this purpose we shall use a kind of current-measuring 82 instrument which I have not yet explained. It is different from the hot-wire type described in Letter 7 for it will show in which direction electrons are streaming through it.
Suppose we wrap a few turns of wire around a cylindrical core, like a stiff cardboard tube. We'll use insulated wire. Now, start at one end of the coil, let's call it a, and follow the coiled wire for a few turns. Then, take off the insulation and solder two wires, b and c, onto the coil as shown in Fig. 28. The other end of the coil will be referred to as d. Now, let's set up a battery and switch so we can send a current through the section of the coil between a and b. We’ll also set up a current-measuring device to indicate whether any current is flowing in the section of the coil between c and d. For this, we'll use a type of current-measuring 82 instrument that I haven't explained yet. It's different from the hot-wire type discussed in Letter 7 because it will show the direction in which electrons are flowing through it.
The diagram of Fig. 28 indicates the apparatus of our experiment. When we close the switch, S, the battery starts a stream of electrons from a towards b. Just at that instant the needle, or pointer, of the current instrument moves. The needle moves, and thus shows a current in the coil cd; but it comes right back again, showing that the current is only momentary. Let’s say this again in different words. The battery keeps steadily forcing electrons through the circuit ab but the instrument in the circuit cd shows no current in that circuit except just at the instant when current starts to flow in the neighboring circuit ab.
The diagram in Fig. 28 shows the setup of our experiment. When we close the switch, S, the battery sends a stream of electrons from a to b. At that moment, the needle of the current meter moves. The needle moves, indicating a current in the coil cd; however, it quickly returns to its original position, indicating that the current is only temporary. To put it another way, the battery continuously pushes electrons through the circuit ab, but the instrument in the circuit cd shows no current except for the brief instant when current begins to flow in the adjacent circuit ab.

One thing this current-measuring instrument tells us is the direction of the electron stream through itself. It shows that the momentary stream of electrons goes through the coil from d to c, that is in the opposite direction to the stream in the part ab.
One thing this current-measuring instrument tells us is the direction of the electron flow through it. It shows that the current of electrons flows through the coil from d to c, which is the opposite direction of the flow in the section ab.
Now prepare to do a little close thinking. Read over carefully all I have told you about this experiment. You see that the moment the battery starts a stream of electrons from a towards b, something causes a momentary, that is a temporary, movement of electrons from d to c. We say that starting a 83 stream of electrons from a to b sets up or “induces” a stream of electrons from d to c.
Now get ready to do some careful thinking. Go through everything I've told you about this experiment. You can see that the instant the battery sends a flow of electrons from a to b, something causes a brief, temporary movement of electrons from d to c. We say that starting a 83 flow of electrons from a to b creates or “induces” a flow of electrons from d to c.
What will happen then if we connect the battery between a and d as in Fig. 29? Electrons will start streaming away from a towards b, that is towards d. But that means there will be a momentary stream from d towards c, that is towards a. Our stream from the battery causes this oppositely directed stream. In the usual words we say it “induces” in the coil an opposing stream of electrons. This opposing stream doesn’t last long, as we saw, but while it does last it hinders the stream which the battery is trying to establish.
What will happen if we connect the battery between a and d as shown in Fig. 29? Electrons will start flowing away from a towards b, which means towards d. But this also means there will be a brief flow from d towards c, which is towards a. The flow from the battery causes this opposing flow. As we usually put it, it “induces” an opposing flow of electrons in the coil. This opposing flow doesn’t last long, as we observed, but while it does last, it interferes with the flow that the battery is trying to create.

The stream of electrons which the battery causes will at first meet an opposition so it takes a little time before the battery can get the full-sized stream of electrons flowing steadily. In other words a current in a coil builds up slowly, because while it is building up it induces an effect which opposes somewhat its own building up.
The flow of electrons that the battery generates will initially face some resistance, so it takes a bit of time for the battery to get a steady, full flow of electrons. In other words, a current in a coil increases gradually because, as it's increasing, it creates an effect that somewhat opposes its own increase.
Did you ever see a small boy start off somewhere, perhaps where he shouldn’t be going, and find his conscience starting to trouble him at once. For a time he goes a little slowly but in a moment or two his conscience stops opposing him and he goes on steadily at his full pace. When he started he stirred up his conscience and that opposed him. Nobody else was hindering his going. It was all brought about by his own actions. The opposition which he 84met was “self-induced.” He was hindered at first by a self-induced effect of his own conscience. If he was a stream of electrons starting off to travel around the coil we would say that he was opposed by a self-induced e. m. f. And any path in which such an effect will be produced we say has “self-inductance.” Usually we shorten this term and speak of “inductance.”
Did you ever see a little boy set off somewhere, maybe where he really shouldn't be going, only to feel his conscience start to bother him right away? For a while, he moves a bit slowly, but after a moment or two, his conscience stops giving him a hard time, and he continues on confidently at full speed. When he began, he stirred up his conscience, which pushed back against him. No one else was stopping him; it was all caused by his own actions. The resistance he faced was “self-induced.” He was initially hindered by an effect of his own conscience. If we think of him as a stream of electrons starting to travel around a coil, we’d say that he was opposed by a self-induced e.m.f. Any path that creates such an effect is said to have “self-inductance.” Typically, we shorten this term and refer to it simply as “inductance.”
There is another way of looking at it. We know habits are hard to form and equally hard to break. It’s hard to get electrons going around a coil and the self-inductance of a circuit tells us how hard it is. The harder it is the more self-inductance we say that the coil or circuit has. Of course, we need a unit in which to measure self-inductance. The unit is called the “henry.” But that is more self-inductance than we can stand in most radio circuits, so we find it convenient to measure in smaller units called “mil-henries” which are thousandths of a henry.
There’s another way to see it. We know that forming habits is tough and breaking them is just as challenging. It’s tough to get electrons moving around a coil, and the self-inductance of a circuit shows us how tough it is. The harder it is, the more self-inductance we say the coil or circuit has. Naturally, we need a unit to measure self-inductance. This unit is called the “henry.” However, that's usually too much self-inductance for most radio circuits, so we find it easier to measure in smaller units called “mil-henries,” which are thousandths of a henry.
You ought to know what a henry[4] is, if we are to use the word, but it isn’t necessary just now to spend much time on it. The opposition which one’s self-induced conscience offers depends upon how rapidly one starts. It’s volts which make electrons move and so the conscience which opposes them will be measured in volts. Therefore we say that a coil has one henry of inductance when an electron stream 85which is increasing one ampere’s worth each second stirs up in the coil a conscientious objection of one volt. Don’t try to remember this now; you can come back to it later.
You should know what a henry[4] is if we're going to use the term, but right now, we don’t need to spend too much time on it. The opposition from your self-induced conscience depends on how quickly you start. It's volts that make electrons move, so the conscience resisting them will be measured in volts. That’s why we say a coil has one henry of inductance when an electron stream 85that’s increasing by one ampere each second creates a conscientious objection of one volt in the coil. Don’t worry about remembering this now; you can revisit it later.
There is one more effect of inductance which we must know before we can get very far with our radio. Suppose an electron stream is flowing through a coil because a battery is driving the electrons along. Now let the battery be removed or disconnected. You’d expect the electron stream to stop at once but it doesn’t. It keeps on for a moment because the electrons have got the habit.
There’s one more effect of inductance we need to understand before we can go further with our radio. Imagine an electron stream flowing through a coil powered by a battery. Now, if we remove or disconnect the battery, you’d expect the electron stream to stop immediately, but it doesn’t. It continues for a moment because the electrons are in the habit of flowing.

If you look again at Fig. 28 you will see what I mean. Suppose the switch is closed and a steady stream of electrons is flowing through the coil from a to b. There will be no current in the other part of the coil. Now open the switch. There will be a motion of the needle of the current-measuring instrument, showing a momentary current. The direction of this motion, however, shows that the momentary stream of electrons goes through the coil from c to d.
If you take another look at Fig. 28, you'll see what I mean. Let's say the switch is closed and a steady flow of electrons is moving through the coil from a to b. There won't be any current in the other part of the coil. Now, open the switch. You'll notice the needle of the current-measuring instrument move, indicating a brief current. However, the direction of this movement shows that the temporary flow of electrons is going through the coil from c to d.
Do you see what this means? The moment the battery is disconnected there is nothing driving the electrons in the part ab and they slow down. Immediately, and just for an instant, a stream of electrons starts off in the part cd in the same direction as if the battery was driving them along.
Do you see what this means? The moment the battery is disconnected, there’s nothing pushing the electrons in the part ab, so they slow down. Right away, even if just for a moment, a stream of electrons starts in the part cd, moving in the same direction as if the battery was driving them.
86Now look again at Fig. 29. If the battery is suddenly disconnected there is a momentary rush of electrons in the same direction as the battery was driving them. Just as the self-inductance of a coil opposes the starting of a stream of electrons, so it opposes the stopping of a stream which is already going.
86Now take another look at Fig. 29. If the battery is suddenly unplugged, there’s a brief surge of electrons moving in the same direction they were going when the battery was connected. Just like how the self-inductance of a coil resists the beginning of an electron flow, it also resists the stopping of a flow that’s already ongoing.

So far we haven’t said much about making an audion produce alternating e. m. f.’s and thus making it useful for radio-telephony. Before radio was possible all these things that I have just told you, and some more too, had to be known. It took hundreds of good scientists years of patient study and experiment to find out those ideas about electricity which have made possible radio-telephony.
So far, we haven't talked much about how to make an audio device produce alternating electromagnetic fields (emfs), which would make it useful for radio communication. Before radio was feasible, all the information I've just shared, along with some additional knowledge, had to be understood. It took many dedicated scientists years of careful study and experimentation to discover the principles of electricity that made radio communication possible.
Two of these ideas are absolutely necessary for the student of radio-communication. First: A condenser is a gap in a circuit where there are waiting-rooms for the electrons. Second: Electrons form habits. It’s hard to get them going through a coil of wire, harder than through a straight wire, but after they are going they don’t like to stop. They like it much less if they are going through a coil instead of a straight wire.
Two of these concepts are essential for anyone studying radio communication. First: A capacitor is a space in a circuit that acts like a holding area for electrons. Second: Electrons develop patterns. It's more difficult to push them through a coil of wire than through a straight wire, but once they start moving, they prefer to keep going. They particularly dislike it if they have to move through a coil instead of a straight wire.
In my next letter I’ll tell you what happens when we have a coil and a condenser together in a circuit.
In my next letter, I'll explain what happens when we use a coil and a capacitor together in a circuit.
The “henry” has nothing to do with a well-known automobile. It was named after Joseph Henry, a professor years ago at Princeton University.
The "henry" isn't related to a famous car. It was named after Joseph Henry, a professor at Princeton University many years ago.
87LETTER 11
A “C-W” Transmitter
Dear Son:
Dear Son:

Let’s look again at the coils of Fig. 28 which we studied in the last letter. I have reproduced them here so you won’t have to turn back. When electrons start from a towards b there is a momentary stream of electrons from d towards c. If the electron stream through ab were started in the opposite direction, that is from b to a the induced stream in the coil cd would be from c towards d.
Let’s take another look at the coils in Fig. 28 that we discussed in the last letter. I’ve included them here so you don’t have to flip back. When electrons move from a to b, there’s a brief flow of electrons from d to c. If the electron flow through ab were switched to the other direction, meaning from b to a, the induced flow in the coil cd would be from c to d.

It all reminds me of two boys with a hedge or fence between them as in Fig. 30. One boy is after the other. Suppose you were being chased; you know what you’d do. If your pursuer started off 88with a rush towards one end of the hedge you’d “beat it” towards the other. But if he started slowly and cautiously you would start slowly too. You always go in the opposite direction, dodging back and forth along the paths which you are wearing in the grass on opposite sides of the hedge. If he starts to the right and then slows up and starts back, you will start to your right, slow up, and start back. Suppose he starts at the center of the hedge. First he dodges to the right, and then back through the center as far to the left, then back again and so on. You follow his every change.
It all reminds me of two boys with a hedge or fence between them, like in Fig. 30. One boy is chasing the other. Imagine being chased; you know how you’d react. If your chaser took off with a rush toward one end of the hedge, you’d “beat it” to the other side. But if he started off slowly and cautiously, you would too. You always move in the opposite direction, weaving back and forth along the paths you’re wearing down in the grass on either side of the hedge. If he goes to the right and then slows down and comes back, you’ll go to your right, slow down, and come back. Suppose he starts in the middle of the hedge. He first dodges to the right, then back through the center to the left, then back again, and so on. You follow his every move.

I am going to make a picture of what you two do. Let’s start with the other fellow. He dodges or alternates back and forth. Some persons would say he “oscillates” back and forth in the same path. As 89he does so he induces you to move. I am on your side of the hedge with a moving-picture camera. My camera catches both of you. Fig. 31 shows the way the film would look if it caught only your heads. The white circle represents the tow-head on my side of the hedge and the black circle, young Brown who lives next door. Of course, the camera only catches you each time the shutter opens but it is easy to draw a complete picture of what takes place as time goes on. See Fig. 32.
I’m going to create a visual of what you two are doing. Let's begin with the other guy. He dodges or moves back and forth. Some people might say he “oscillates” as he goes along the same path. As 89 he does this, he encourages you to move. I’m on your side of the hedge with a video camera. My camera captures both of you. Fig. 31 shows what the film would look like if it only captured your heads. The white circle represents the tow-headed kid on my side of the hedge, and the black circle is young Brown who lives next door. Obviously, the camera only captures you each time the shutter opens, but it's easy to create a full picture of what happens over time. See Fig. 32.

Now suppose you are an electron in coil cd of Fig. 33 and “Brownie” is one in coil ab. Your motions are induced by his. What’s true of you two is true of all the other electrons. I have separated the coils a little in this sketch so that you can think of a hedge between. I don’t know how one electron can affect another on the opposite side of this hedge but it can. And I don’t know anything really about the hedge, which is generally called “the ether.” The hedge isn’t air. The effect would be the same if the coils were in a vacuum. The “ether” is just a name for whatever is left in the space about us when we have taken out everything 90 which we can see or feel–every molecule, every proton and every electron.
Now imagine you’re an electron in coil cd of Fig. 33 and “Brownie” is one in coil ab. Your movements are influenced by his. What applies to you both applies to all the other electrons as well. I’ve spaced the coils apart in this illustration so you can picture a barrier in between. I’m not sure how one electron can influence another on the opposite side of this barrier, but it can. I don't really know much about the barrier itself, which is commonly known as “the ether.” The barrier isn’t air. The effect would be the same even if the coils were in a vacuum. The “ether” is simply a term for whatever remains in the space around us after we’ve removed everything 90 we can observe or feel—every molecule, every proton, and every electron.

Why and how electrons can affect one another when they are widely separated is one of the great mysteries of science. We don’t know any more about it than about why there are electrons. Let’s accept it as a fundamental fact which we can’t as yet explain.
Why and how electrons can influence each other even when they are far apart is one of the big mysteries in science. We understand no more about it than we do about why electrons exist in the first place. Let’s acknowledge it as a basic fact that we still can't explain.

And now we can see how to make an audion produce an alternating current or as we sometimes say “make an audion oscillator.” We shall set up an audion with its A-battery as in Fig. 34. Between the grid and the filament we put a coil and a condenser. Notice that they are in parallel, as we say. In the plate-filament circuit we connect the B-battery and a switch, S, and another coil. This coil in the plate circuit of the audion we place close to the other coil so that the two coils are just like the coils ab and cd of which I have been telling you. The moment any current flows in coil ab there will be a current flow in the coil cd. (An induced electron stream.) Of course, as long as the switch in the B-battery is open no current can flow.
And now we can see how to make an audion create an alternating current, or as we sometimes say, "make an audion oscillator." We'll set up an audion with its A-battery as shown in Fig. 34. Between the grid and the filament, we place a coil and a condenser. Notice that they're connected in parallel, as we say. In the plate-filament circuit, we connect the B-battery and a switch, S, along with another coil. This coil in the plate circuit of the audion is positioned close to the other coil so that the two coils are just like coils ab and cd that I have been discussing. The moment any current flows through coil ab, there will be a current flow in coil cd (an induced electron stream). Of course, as long as the switch in the B-battery is open, no current can flow.
The moment the switch S is closed the B-battery makes the plate positive with respect to the filament and there is a sudden surge of electrons round the 91 plate circuit and through the coil from a to b. You know what that does to the coil cd. It induces an electron stream from d towards c. Where do these electrons come from? Why, from the grid and the plate 1 of the condenser. Where do they go? Most of them go to the waiting-room offered by plate 2 of the condenser and some, of course, to the filament. What is the result? The grid becomes positive and the filament negative.
The moment the switch S is closed, the B-battery makes the plate positive compared to the filament, causing a sudden surge of electrons through the 91 plate circuit and through the coil from a to b. You know what that does to the coil cd. It creates a flow of electrons from d to c. Where do these electrons come from? They come from the grid and plate 1 of the condenser. Where do they go? Most of them head to the waiting area provided by plate 2 of the condenser, and some, of course, go to the filament. What is the outcome? The grid becomes positive and the filament becomes negative.

This is the crucial moment in our study. Can you tell me what is going to happen to the stream of electrons in the plate circuit? Remember that just at the instant when we closed the switch the grid was neither positive nor negative. We were at the point of zero volts on the audion characteristic of Fig. 35. When we close the switch the current in the plate circuit starts to jump from zero mil-amperes to the number of mil-amperes which represents the point where Zero Volt St. crosses Audion Characteristic. But this jump in plate current makes the grid positive as we have just seen. So the grid will help the plate call electrons and that will make the current in the plate circuit still larger, that is, result in a larger stream of electrons from a to b.
This is the key moment in our study. Can you tell me what’s going to happen to the flow of electrons in the plate circuit? Keep in mind that at the moment we closed the switch, the grid was neither positive nor negative. We were at the zero volts point on the audion characteristic shown in Fig. 35. Once we close the switch, the current in the plate circuit begins to jump from zero milliamperes to the level of milliamperes that represents the point where Zero Volt St. intersects with the Audion Characteristic. However, this increase in plate current makes the grid positive, as we’ve just observed. So, the grid will assist the plate in attracting electrons, which will result in an even larger current in the plate circuit, meaning a bigger flow of electrons from a to b.
This increase in current will be matched by an increased effect in the coil cd, for you remember 92how you and “Brownie” behaved. And that will pull more electrons away from plate 1 of the condenser and send them to the waiting-room of 2. All this makes the grid more positive and so makes it call all the more effectively to help the plate move electrons.
This increase in current will lead to a greater effect in the coil cd, since you remember 92 how you and “Brownie” acted. This will pull more electrons away from plate 1 of the condenser and send them to waiting-room 2. All this makes the grid more positive, which causes it to call even more effectively for help in moving electrons from the plate.

Pl. V.–Variometer (top) and Variable Condenser (bottom) of the General Radio Company.
Voltmeter and Ammeter of the Weston Instrument Company.
Pl. V.–Variometer (top) and Variable Condenser (bottom) of the General Radio Company.
Voltmeter and Ammeter of the Weston Instrument Company.
We “started something” that time. It’s going on all by itself. The grid is getting more positive, the plate current is getting bigger, and so the grid is getting more positive and the plate current still bigger. Is it ever going to stop? Yes. Look at the audion characteristic. There comes a time when making the grid a little more positive won’t have any effect on the plate-circuit current. So the plate current stops increasing.
We “started something” back then. It’s happening on its own now. The grid is becoming more positive, the plate current is increasing, and as a result, the grid is getting even more positive and the plate current is still rising. Is it ever going to stop? Yes. Check out the audion characteristic. There comes a point when making the grid slightly more positive won’t affect the plate-circuit current anymore. So, the plate current stops increasing.
There is nothing now to keep pulling electrons away from plate 1 and crowding them into waiting-room 2. Why shouldn’t the electrons in this waiting-room go home to that of plate 1? There is now no reason and so they start off with a rush.
There’s nothing holding electrons back from plate 1 and pushing them into waiting-room 2 anymore. So why shouldn’t the electrons in this waiting-room head back to plate 1? There’s no reason not to, so they take off quickly.
Of course, some of them came from the grid and as fast as electrons get back to the grid it becomes less and less positive. As the grid becomes less and less positive it becomes less and less helpful to the plate.
Of course, some of them came from the grid, and as quickly as electrons return to the grid, it becomes less and less positive. As the grid becomes less positive, it becomes less and less beneficial to the plate.
If the grid doesn’t help, the plate alone can’t keep up this stream of electrons. All the plate can do by itself is to maintain the current represented by the intersection of zero volts and the audion characteristic. The result is that the current in the plate circuit, that is, of course, the current in coil ab,93 becomes gradually less. About the time all the electrons, which had left the grid and plate 1 of the condenser, have got home the plate current is back to the value corresponding to EC=0.
If the grid doesn’t help, the plate alone can't keep up with this flow of electrons. All the plate can do on its own is maintain the current indicated by the point where zero volts intersects with the audion characteristic. As a result, the current in the plate circuit, which is essentially the current in coil ab,93, gradually decreases. By the time all the electrons that left the grid and plate 1 of the condenser have returned, the plate current drops back to the value corresponding to EC=0.
The plate current first increases and then decreases, but it doesn’t stop decreasing when it gets back to zero-grid value. And the reason is all due to the habit forming tendencies of electrons in coils. To see how this comes about, let’s tell the whole story over again. In other words let’s make a review and so get a sort of flying start.
The plate current initially goes up and then comes down, but it doesn’t stop dropping when it returns to zero-grid value. This happens because of the tendency of electrons in coils to form habits. To understand how this works, let’s go through the entire story again. In other words, let’s review it to get a kind of jumpstart.

When we close the battery switch, S in Fig. 34, we allow a current to flow in the plate circuit. This current induces a current in the coil cd and charges the condenser which is across it, making plate 1 positive and plate 2 negative. A positive grid helps the plate so that the current in the plate circuit builds up to the greatest possible value as shown by the audion characteristic. That’s the end of the increase in current. Now the condenser discharges, sending electrons through the coil cd and making the grid less positive until finally it is at zero potential, that is neither positive nor negative.
When we turn on the battery switch, S in Fig. 34, we allow current to flow in the plate circuit. This current generates a current in the coil cd and charges the condenser across it, making plate 1 positive and plate 2 negative. A positive grid supports the plate, causing the current in the plate circuit to reach its maximum value, as shown by the audion characteristic. That’s the peak of the current increase. Now the condenser discharges, sending electrons through the coil cd and reducing the grid’s positivity until it eventually reaches zero potential, meaning it is neither positive nor negative.
While the condenser is discharging the electrons in the coil cd get a habit of flowing from c toward d, that is from plate 2 to plate 1. If it wasn’t for this 94 habit the electron stream in cd would stop as soon as the grid had reduced to zero voltage. Because of the habit, however, a lot of electrons that ought to stay on plate 2 get hurried along and land on plate 1. It is a little like the old game of “crack the whip.” Some electrons get the habit and can’t stop quickly enough so they go tumbling into waiting-room 1 and make it negative.
While the condenser is discharging, the electrons in the coil cd tend to flow from c to d, which means from plate 2 to plate 1. If it weren't for this 94 tendency, the electron stream in cd would stop as soon as the grid voltage dropped to zero. However, because of this tendency, many electrons that should remain on plate 2 get pushed along and end up on plate 1. It's a bit like the old game "crack the whip." Some electrons pick up this tendency and can't stop fast enough, so they tumble into waiting-room 1 and make it negative.
That means that the condenser not only discharges but starts to get charged in the other direction with plate 1 negative and plate 2 positive. The grid feels the effect of all this, because it gets extra electrons if plate 1 gets them. In fact the voltage effective between grid and filament is always the voltage between the plates of the condenser.
That means the condenser not only releases energy but also begins to charge in the opposite direction, with plate 1 becoming negative and plate 2 becoming positive. The grid is affected by this because it receives extra electrons if plate 1 does. In fact, the effective voltage between the grid and the filament is always the voltage between the plates of the condenser.
The audion characteristic tells us what is the result. As the grid becomes negative it opposes the plate, shooing electrons back towards the filament and reducing the plate current still further. But you have already seen in my previous letter what happens when we reduce the current in coil ab. There is then induced in coil cd an electron stream from c to d. This induced current is in just the right direction to send more electrons into waiting-room 1 and so to make the grid still more negative. And the more negative the grid gets the smaller becomes the plate current until finally the plate current is reduced to zero. Look at the audion characteristic again and see that making the grid sufficiently negative entirely stops the plate current.
The audion characteristic shows us the outcome. As the grid becomes negative, it pushes against the plate, driving electrons back toward the filament and lowering the plate current even more. But you've already seen in my previous letter what happens when we decrease the current in coil ab. This creates an electron stream in coil cd from c to d. This induced current is perfectly aligned to send more electrons into waiting-room 1, making the grid even more negative. The more negative the grid becomes, the smaller the plate current gets until it eventually drops to zero. Check the audion characteristic again and see that making the grid sufficiently negative completely halts the plate current.
When the plate current stops, the condenser in 95the grid circuit is charged, with plate 1 negative and 2 positive. It was the plate current which was the main cause of this change for it induced the charging current in coil cd. So, when the plate current becomes zero there is nothing to prevent the condenser from discharging.
When the plate current stops, the capacitor in 95 the grid circuit is charged, with plate 1 negative and plate 2 positive. The plate current was the main reason for this change because it generated the charging current in coil cd. So, when the plate current drops to zero, there's nothing stopping the capacitor from discharging.
Its discharge makes the grid less and less negative until it is zero volts and there we are–back practically where we started. The plate current is increasing and the grid is getting positive, and we’re off on another “cycle” as we say. During a cycle the plate current increases to a maximum, decreases to zero, and then increases again to its initial value.
Its discharge makes the grid less and less negative until it reaches zero volts, and there we are—back to pretty much where we started. The plate current is rising, and the grid is becoming positive, so we’re starting another “cycle,” as we say. During a cycle, the plate current peaks, goes down to zero, and then rises back to its starting value.

This letter has a longer continuous train of thought than I usually ask you to follow. But before I stop I want to give you some idea of what good this is in radio.
This letter has a longer flow of thoughts than I usually ask you to keep up with. But before I finish, I want to give you some insight into how beneficial this is in radio.
What about the current which flows in coil cd? It’s an alternating current, isn’t it? First the electrons stream from d towards c, and then back again from c towards d.
What about the current flowing in coil cd? It’s an alternating current, right? First, the electrons move from d to c, and then they flow back from c to d.
Suppose we set up another coil like CD in Fig. 36. It would have an alternating current induced in it. If this coil was connected to an antenna there would be radio waves sent out. The switch S could be used for a key and kept closed longer or shorter intervals 96 depending upon whether dashes or dots were being set. I’ll tell you more about this later, but in this diagram are the makings of a “C-W Transmitter,” that is a “continuous wave transmitter” for radio-telegraphy.
Suppose we set up another coil like CD in Fig. 36. It would have an alternating current induced in it. If this coil was connected to an antenna, it would send out radio waves. The switch S could act as a key and could be kept closed for longer or shorter intervals 96 depending on whether dashes or dots were being created. I’ll provide more details on this later, but in this diagram, you can see the components of a “C-W Transmitter,” which is a “continuous wave transmitter” used for radio telegraphy.
It would be worth while to go over this letter again using a pencil and tracing in the various circuits the electron streams which I have described.
It would be helpful to go over this letter again with a pencil and trace the different circuits of the electron streams that I've described.
97LETTER 12
Inductance and Capacitance
Dear Sir:
Dear Sir,
In the last letter I didn’t stop to draw you a picture of the action of the audion oscillator which I described. I am going to do it now and you are to imagine me as using two pencils and drawing simultaneously two curves. One curve shows what happens to the current in the plate circuit. The other shows how the voltage of the grid changes. Both curves start from the instant when the switch is closed; and the two taken together show just what happens in the tube from instant to instant.
In the last letter, I didn’t take the time to illustrate the operation of the audion oscillator that I talked about. I’m going to do that now, and you can picture me using two pencils to simultaneously draw two curves. One curve represents the current in the plate circuit, while the other shows how the grid voltage changes. Both curves begin at the moment the switch is turned on, and together they illustrate exactly what happens in the tube from moment to moment.
Fig. 37 shows the two curves. You will notice how I have drawn them beside and below the audion characteristic. The grid voltage and the plate current are related, as I have told you, and the audion characteristic is just a convenient way of showing the relationship. If we know the current in the plate circuit we can find the voltage of the grid and vice versa.
Fig. 37 shows the two curves. You’ll see how I’ve drawn them next to and below the audion characteristic. The grid voltage and the plate current are connected, as I mentioned, and the audion characteristic is just a handy way to illustrate this relationship. If we know the current in the plate circuit, we can determine the voltage of the grid and vice versa.
As time goes on, the plate current grows to its maximum and decreases to zero and then goes on climbing up and down between these two extremes. The grid voltage meanwhile is varying alternately, having its maximum positive value when the plate current is a maximum and its maximum negative 98value when the plate current is zero. Look at the two curves and see this for yourself.
As time passes, the plate current increases to its peak, then drops to zero, and continues to oscillate between these two extremes. Meanwhile, the grid voltage fluctuates alternately, reaching its highest positive value when the plate current is at its peak and its highest negative value when the plate current is zero. Check out the two curves and observe this for yourself.

Now I want to tell you something about how fast these oscillations occur. We start by learning two words. One is “cycle” with which you are already partly familiar and the other is “frequency.” Take cycle first. Starting from zero the current increases to a maximum, decreases to zero, and is ready again for the same series of changes. We say the current has passed through “a cycle of values.” It doesn’t make any difference where we start from. If we follow the current through all its different values until we are back at the same value as we started with and ready to start all over, then we have followed through a cycle of values.
Now, I want to explain how quickly these oscillations happen. Let’s start with two terms. One is “cycle,” which you might already know a bit about, and the other is “frequency.” First, let's talk about cycles. Starting from zero, the current rises to a maximum, drops back down to zero, and then gets ready to go through that same process again. We say the current has gone through “a cycle of values.” It doesn’t matter where we begin. If we track the current through all its various values until we return to the same value we started with and are ready to begin again, then we have experienced a cycle of values.
99Once you get the idea of a cycle, and the markings on the curves in Fig. 31 will help you to understand, then the other idea is easy. By “frequency” we mean the number of cycles each second. The electric current which we use in lighting our house goes through sixty cycles a second. That means the current reverses its direction 120 times a second.
99Once you understand the concept of a cycle, and the markings on the curves in Fig. 31 will assist you with that, the other concept becomes simple. By “frequency,” we refer to how many cycles occur each second. The electric current we use to light our homes completes sixty cycles each second. This means the current changes direction 120 times a second.
In radio we use alternating currents which have very high frequencies. In ship sets the frequency is either 500,000 or 1,000,000 cycles per second. Amateur transmitting sets usually have oscillators which run at well over a million cycles per second. The longer range stations use lower frequencies.
In radio, we use alternating currents that have very high frequencies. In ship equipment, the frequency is either 500,000 or 1,000,000 cycles per second. Amateur transmitting equipment usually has oscillators that operate at well over a million cycles per second. Longer-range stations use lower frequencies.
You’ll find, however, that the newspaper announcements of the various broadcast stations do not tell the frequency but instead tell the “wave length.” I am not going to stop now to explain what that means but I am going to give you a simple rule. Divide 300,000,000 by the “wave length” and you’ll have the frequency. For example, ships are supposed to use wave lengths of 300 meters or 600 meters. Dividing three hundred million by three hundred gives one million and that is one of the frequencies which I told you were used by ship sets. Dividing by six hundred gives 500,000 or just half the frequency. You can remember that sets transmitting with long waves have low frequencies, but sets with short waves have high frequencies. The frequency and the wave length don’t change in the same way. They change in opposite ways or inversely, 100as we say. The higher the frequency the shorter the wave length.
You’ll notice, though, that the newspaper announcements from different broadcast stations don’t mention the frequency but instead refer to the “wave length.” I’m not going to explain what that means right now, but here’s a simple rule: Divide 300,000,000 by the “wave length,” and you’ll get the frequency. For example, ships are supposed to use wave lengths of 300 meters or 600 meters. Dividing three hundred million by three hundred gives one million, which is one of the frequencies used by ship sets. Dividing by six hundred gives 500,000, or just half the frequency. You can remember that sets transmitting with long waves have low frequencies, while sets with short waves have high frequencies. The frequency and the wave length don’t change in the same way; they change in opposite ways, or inversely, 100 as we say. The higher the frequency, the shorter the wave length.
I’ll tell you about wave lengths later. First let’s see how to control the frequency of an audion oscillator like that of Fig. 38.
I’ll tell you about wavelengths later. First, let’s see how to control the frequency of an audion oscillator like the one in Fig. 38.

It takes time to get a full-sized stream going through a coil because of the inductance of the coil. That you have learned. And also it takes time for such a current to stop completely. Therefore, if we make the inductance of the coil small, keeping the condenser the same, we shall make the time required for the current to start and stop smaller. That will mean a higher frequency for there will be more oscillations each second. One rule, then, for increasing the frequency of an audion oscillator is to decrease the inductance.
It takes time to get a full-sized current flowing through a coil because of the coil's inductance. You've learned that. It also takes time for that current to stop completely. So, if we reduce the coil's inductance while keeping the capacitor the same, we'll make the time needed for the current to start and stop shorter. This will result in a higher frequency because there will be more oscillations per second. One rule for increasing the frequency of an audion oscillator is to decrease the inductance.
Later in this letter I shall tell you how to increase or decrease the inductance of a coil. Before I do so, however, I want to call your attention to the other way in which we can change the frequency of an audion oscillator.
Later in this letter, I will explain how to increase or decrease the inductance of a coil. Before that, though, I want to point out another way we can change the frequency of an audion oscillator.
Let’s see how the frequency will depend upon the capacity of the condenser. If a condenser has a large capacity it means that it can accommodate in its waiting-room a large number of electrons before the e. m. f. of the condenser becomes large enough to stop the stream of electrons which is charging the condenser. If the condenser in the grid circuit of Fig. 38 is of large capacity it means 101that it must receive in its upper waiting-room a large number of electrons before the grid will be negative enough to make the plate current zero. Therefore, the charging current will have to flow a long time to store up the necessary number of electrons.
Let's see how the frequency depends on the capacity of the condenser. If a condenser has a large capacity, it means it can hold a lot of electrons in its waiting area before the electromotive force (e.m.f.) becomes strong enough to stop the flow of electrons charging the condenser. If the condenser in the grid circuit of Fig. 38 has a large capacity, it means 101that it needs to gather a significant number of electrons in its upper waiting area before the grid becomes negative enough to bring the plate current to zero. Therefore, the charging current will need to flow for a long time to collect the necessary number of electrons.
You will get the same idea, of course, if you think about the electrons in the lower room. The current in the plate circuit will not stop increasing until the voltage of the grid has become positive enough to make the plate current a maximum. It can’t do that until enough electrons have left the upper room and been stored away in the lower. Therefore the charging current will have to flow for a long time if the capacity is large. We have, therefore, the other rule for increasing the frequency of an audion oscillator, that is, decrease the capacity.
You’ll understand the same concept if you consider the electrons in the lower room. The current in the plate circuit won’t stop increasing until the grid voltage is positive enough to reach the maximum plate current. This can’t happen until enough electrons have moved from the upper room and been stored in the lower room. So, if the capacity is large, the charging current will need to flow for a long time. Therefore, we have another rule for increasing the frequency of an audion oscillator: decrease the capacity.
These rules can be stated the other way around. To decrease the frequency we can either increase the capacity or increase the inductance or do both.
These rules can be expressed the other way around. To reduce the frequency, we can either increase the capacity, increase the inductance, or do both.
But what would happen if we should decrease the capacity and increase the inductance? Decreasing the capacity would make the frequency higher, but increasing the inductance would make it lower. What would be the net effect? That would depend upon how much we decreased the capacity and how much we increased the inductance. It would be possible to decrease the capacity and then if we increased the inductance just the right amount to have no change in the frequency. No matter how large or how small we make the capacity we can 102always make the inductance such that there isn’t any change in frequency. I’ll give you a rule for this, after I have told you some more things about capacities and inductances.
But what would happen if we decreased the capacitance and increased the inductance? Reducing the capacitance would raise the frequency, but increasing the inductance would lower it. What would the overall effect be? That would depend on how much we lowered the capacitance and how much we raised the inductance. It’s possible to lower the capacitance and then increase the inductance just the right amount to keep the frequency the same. No matter how large or small we make the capacitance, we can always adjust the inductance so that there’s no change in frequency. I’ll give you a rule for this after I share more information about capacitance and inductance.
First as to inductances. A short straight wire has a very small inductance, indeed. The longer the wire the larger will be the inductance but unless the length is hundreds of feet there isn’t much inductance anyway. A coiled wire is very different.
First as to inductances. A short straight wire has a very small inductance, indeed. The longer the wire, the larger the inductance will be, but unless the length is hundreds of feet, there isn’t much inductance anyway. A coiled wire is very different.
A coil of wire will have more inductance the more turns there are to it. That isn’t the whole story but it’s enough for the moment. Let’s see why. The reason why a stream of electrons has an opposing conscience when they are started off in a coil of wire is because each electron affects every other electron which can move in a parallel path. Look again at the coils of Figs. 28 and 29 which we discussed in the tenth letter. Those sketches plainly bring out the fact that the electrons in part cd travel in paths which are parallel to those of the electrons in part ab.
A coil of wire will have more inductance with more turns. That’s not the whole picture, but it’s enough for now. Let’s explore why. The reason a flow of electrons pushes back when they start moving in a coil of wire is that each electron influences every other electron that can move in a similar path. Look again at the coils in Figs. 28 and 29 that we talked about in the tenth letter. Those illustrations clearly show that the electrons in part cd travel in paths parallel to those of the electrons in part ab.

If we should turn these coils as in Fig. 39 so that all the paths in cd are at right angles to those in ab there wouldn’t be any effect in cd when a current in ab started or stopped. Look at the circuit of the oscillating audion in Fig. 38. If we should turn these coils at right angles to each other we would stop the oscillation. Electrons only influence other electrons which are in parallel paths.
If we rotate these coils as shown in Fig. 39 so that all the paths in cd are perpendicular to those in ab, there wouldn’t be any effect in cd when the current in ab starts or stops. Check out the circuit of the oscillating audion in Fig. 38. If we rotate these coils so that they are at right angles to each other, we would stop the oscillation. Electrons only affect other electrons that are in parallel paths.
103When we want a large inductance we wind the coil so that there are many parallel paths. Then when the battery starts to drive an electron along, this electron affects all its fellows who are in parallel paths and tries to start them off in the opposite direction to that in which it is being driven. The battery, of course, starts to drive all the electrons, not only those nearest its negative terminal but those all along the wire. And every one of these electrons makes up for the fact that the battery is driving it along by urging all its fellows in the opposite direction.
103When we need a large inductance, we wind the coil to create many parallel paths. When the battery begins to push an electron, that electron influences all the others in the parallel paths, trying to get them moving in the opposite direction. The battery drives all the electrons, not just those closest to its negative terminal, but all along the wire. Each of these electrons compensates for the battery's pull by encouraging all its counterparts to move in the opposite direction.
It is not an exceptional state of affairs. Suppose a lot of boys are being driven out of a yard where they had no right to be playing. Suppose also that a boy can resist and lag back twice as much if some other boy urges him to do so. Make it easy and imagine three boys. The first boy lags back not only on his own account but because of the urging of the other boys. That makes him three times as hard to start as if the other boys didn’t influence him. The same is true of the second boy and also of the third. The result is the unfortunate property owner has nine times as hard a job getting that gang started as if only one boy were to be dealt with. If there were two boys it would be four times as hard as for one boy. If there were four in the group it would be sixteen times, and if five it would be twenty-five times. The difficulty increases much more rapidly than the number of boys.
It's not an unusual situation. Imagine a bunch of boys being chased out of a yard where they shouldn’t be playing. Also, if one boy is encouraged by another boy to resist and hang back, he can do it twice as much. Picture three boys. The first boy lags behind not just for himself but because the other boys are urging him on. This makes it three times harder to get him moving than if the other boys weren’t influencing him. The same goes for the second and third boys. So, the poor property owner has nine times the trouble getting that group moving as if there were only one boy to deal with. With two boys, it would be four times as hard as dealing with one. With four boys, it would be sixteen times, and with five boys, it would be twenty-five times. The difficulty increases much faster than the number of boys.
Now all we have to do to get the right idea of inductance 104is to think of each boy as standing for the electrons in one turn of the coil. If there are five turns there will be twenty-five times as much inductance, as for a single turn; and so on. You see that we can change the inductance of a coil very easily by changing the number of turns.
Now, to really understand inductance 104, we just need to picture each boy representing the electrons in one loop of the coil. If there are five loops, the inductance will be twenty-five times greater than that of a single loop; and it continues like that. As you can see, we can easily adjust the inductance of a coil by changing the number of loops.
I’ll tell you two things more about inductance because they will come in handy. The first is that the inductance will be larger if the turns are large circles. You can see that for yourself because if the circles were very small we would have practically a straight wire.
I’ll share two more things about inductance that will be useful. First, the inductance increases if the loops are large circles. You can see this for yourself because if the circles were very small, we would basically have a straight wire.
The other fact is this. If that property owner had been an electrical engineer and the boys had been electrons he would have fixed it so that while half of them said, “Aw, don’t go; he can’t put you off”; the other half would have said “Come on, let’s get out.” If he did that he would have a coil without any inductance, that is, he would have only the natural inertia of the electrons to deal with. We would say that he had made a coil with “pure resistance” or else that he had made a “non-inductive resistance.”
The other fact is this. If that property owner had been an electrical engineer and the boys had been electrons, he would have arranged it so that while half of them said, “Come on, don’t go; he can’t kick you out,” the other half would have said, “Let’s get out of here.” If he did that, he would have a coil with no inductance, meaning he would only have to deal with the natural inertia of the electrons. We would say that he had created a coil with “pure resistance” or that he had made a “non-inductive resistance.”

How would he do it? Easy enough after one learns how, but quite ingenious. Take the wire and fold it at the middle. Start with the middle and wind the coil with the doubled wire. Fig. 40 shows how the coil would look and you can see that part of the way the electrons are going around the coil in one direction and the rest of the way in the opposite 105direction. It is just as if the boys were paired off, a “goody-goody” and a “tough nut” together. They both shout at once opposite advice and neither has any effect.
How would he do it? It's pretty straightforward once you know how, but it's quite clever. Take the wire and fold it in half. Start from the center and wrap the coil with the doubled wire. Fig. 40 shows what the coil would look like, and you can see that part of the time the electrons are moving around the coil in one direction and the rest of the time in the opposite 105direction. It's just like when boys are paired together, a "goody-goody" and a "tough nut." They both shout conflicting advice at the same time, and neither has any impact.
I have told you all except one of the ways in which we can affect the inductance of a circuit. You know now all the methods which are important in radio. So let’s consider how to make large or small capacities.
I have shared with you all but one of the ways we can influence the inductance of a circuit. You now understand all the methods that matter in radio. So let’s discuss how to create large or small capacities.
First I want to tell you how we measure the capacity of a condenser. We use units called “microfarads.” You remember that an ampere means an electron stream at the rate of about six billion billion electrons a second. A millionth of an ampere would, therefore, be a stream at the rate of about six million million electrons a second–quite a sizable little stream for any one who wanted to count them as they went by. If a current of one millionth of an ampere should flow for just one second six million million electrons would pass along by every point in the path or circuit.
First, I want to explain how we measure the capacity of a condenser. We use units called “microfarads.” You remember that an ampere represents an electron flow of about six billion billion electrons per second. A millionth of an ampere would then be a flow of about six million million electrons per second—definitely a significant amount for anyone trying to count them as they pass. If a current of one millionth of an ampere flows for just one second, six million million electrons would pass by every point in the circuit.
That is what would happen if there weren’t any waiting-rooms in the circuit. If there was a condenser then that number of electrons would leave one waiting-room and would enter the other. Well, suppose that just as the last electron of this enormous number[5] entered its waiting-room we should know that the voltage of the condenser was just one volt. Then we would say that the condenser had a capacity of one microfarad. If it takes half that 106number to make the condenser oppose further changes in the contents of its waiting-rooms, with one volt’s worth of opposition, that is, one volt of e. m. f., then the condenser has only half a microfarad of capacity. The number of microfarads of capacity (abbreviated mf.) is a measure of how many electrons we can get away from one plate and into the other before the voltage rises to one volt.
That’s what would happen if there weren’t any waiting rooms in the circuit. If there was a capacitor, then that number of electrons would leave one waiting room and enter the other. Now, suppose that just as the last electron of this huge number[5] entered its waiting room, we knew the voltage of the capacitor was exactly one volt. Then we would say that the capacitor had a capacity of one microfarad. If it takes half that 106 number to make the capacitor resist further changes in the contents of its waiting rooms, with one volt’s worth of resistance, that is, one volt of e.m.f., then the capacitor has only half a microfarad of capacity. The number of microfarads of capacity (abbreviated mf.) measures how many electrons we can move from one plate to the other before the voltage rises to one volt.
What must we do then to make a condenser with large capacity? Either of two things; either make the waiting-rooms large or put them close together.
What should we do then to create a condenser with a large capacity? We have two options: either make the waiting rooms bigger or place them close together.
If we make the plates of a condenser larger, keeping the separation between them the same, it means more space in the waiting-rooms and hence less crowding. You know that the more crowded the electrons become the more they push back against any other electron which some battery is trying to force into their waiting-room, that is the higher the e. m. f. of the condenser.
If we increase the size of a condenser's plates while keeping the distance between them the same, it creates more room in the waiting area, reducing congestion. You know that as electrons get more crowded, they push back harder against any other electron that a battery is trying to introduce into their waiting area, which means the higher the e.m.f. of the condenser.
The other way to get a larger capacity is to bring the plates closer together, that is to shorten the gap. Look at it this way: The closer the plates are together the nearer home the electrons are. Their home is only just across a little gap; they can almost see the electronic games going on around the nuclei they left. They forget the long round-about journey they took to get to this new waiting-room and they crowd over to one side of this room to get just as close as they can to their old homes. That’s why it’s always easier, and takes less voltage, to get the same number of electrons moved from one plate to the 107other of a condenser which has only a small space between plates. It takes less voltage and that means that the condenser has a smaller e. m. f. for the same number of electrons. It also means that before the e. m. f. rises to one volt we can get more electrons moved around if the plates are close together. And that means larger capacity.
The other way to increase capacity is to bring the plates closer together, which means reducing the gap. Think of it this way: The closer the plates are, the nearer the electrons are to their "home." Their home is just across a small gap; they can almost see the electronic activities happening around the nuclei they left behind. They forget the long, roundabout journey they took to reach this new waiting room and crowd over to one side of it to get as close as they can to their old homes. That's why it's always easier and requires less voltage to move the same number of electrons from one plate to the 107other of a condenser with a small space between the plates. It takes less voltage, which means the condenser has a lower e.m.f. for the same number of electrons. It also means that before the e.m.f. rises to one volt, we can move more electrons around if the plates are close together. And that leads to larger capacity.
There is one thing to remember in all this: It doesn’t make any difference how thick the plates are. It all depends upon how much surface they have and how close together they are. Most of the electrons in the plate which is being made negative are way over on the side toward their old homes, that is, toward the plate which is being made positive. And most of the homes, that is, atoms which have lost electrons, are on the side of the positive plate which is next to the gap. That’s why I said the electrons could almost see their old homes.
There’s one thing to keep in mind through all this: It doesn’t matter how thick the plates are. What really matters is how much surface area they have and how close they are to each other. Most of the electrons in the negatively charged plate are mostly over on the side that's nearest to where they used to be, meaning they're closer to the positively charged plate. And most of the atoms that have lost electrons, which can be thought of as their homes, are on the side of the positive plate that's next to the gap. That’s why I said the electrons could almost see their old homes.

All this leads to two very simple rules for building condensers. If you have a condenser with too small a capacity and want one, say, twice as large, you can either use twice as large plates or bring the plates you already have twice as close together; that is, make the gap half as large. Generally, of course, the 108gap is pretty well fixed. For example, if we make a condenser by using two pieces of metal and separating them by a sheet of mica we don’t want the job of splitting the mica. So we increase the size of the plates. We can do that either by using larger plates or other plates and connecting it as in Fig. 41 so that the total waiting-room space for electrons is increased.
All of this leads to two very simple rules for building capacitors. If you have a capacitor with too small a capacity and want one that’s, say, twice as large, you can either use plates that are twice the size or bring the plates you already have twice as close together; that is, make the gap half as large. Generally, though, the 108 gap is pretty well fixed. For example, if we make a capacitor by using two metal pieces and separating them with a sheet of mica, we don’t want to deal with cutting the mica. So we increase the size of the plates. We can do that either by using larger plates or different plates and connecting them as shown in Fig. 41 so that the total space available for electrons is increased.

Pl. VI.–Low-power Transmitting Tube, U V 202 (Courtesy of Radio Corporation of America).
Pl. VI.–Low-power Transmitting Tube, U V 202 (Courtesy of Radio Corporation of America).

109If you have got these ideas you can understand how we use both sides of the same plate in some types of condensers. Look at Fig. 42. There are two plates connected together and a third between them. Suppose electrons are pulled from the outside plates and crowded into the middle plate. Some of them go on one side and some on the other, as I have shown. The negative signs indicate electrons and the plus signs their old homes. If we use more plates as in Fig. 43 we have a larger capacity.
109If you understand these concepts, you can see how we use both sides of the same plate in certain types of condensers. Check out Fig. 42. There are two plates connected together with a third one in between. Imagine electrons being pulled from the outer plates and pushed into the middle plate. Some of them go to one side and some to the other, as I’ve illustrated. The negative signs represent electrons, and the plus signs indicate their original locations. If we add more plates like in Fig. 43, we’ll have a greater capacity.


What if we have two plates which are not directly opposite one another, like those of Fig. 44? What does the capacity depend upon? Imagine yourself an electron on the negative plate. Look off toward the positive plate and see how big it seems to you. The bigger it looks the more capacity the condenser has. When the plates are right opposite one another the positive plate looms up pretty large. But if they slide apart you don’t see so much of it; and if it is off to one side about all you 110see is the edge. If you can’t see lots of atoms which have lost electrons and so would make good homes for you, there is no use of your staying around on that side of the plate; you might just as well be trying to go back home the long way which you originally came.
What happens if we have two plates that aren't directly across from each other, like in Fig. 44? What affects the capacity? Picture yourself as an electron on the negative plate. Look over to the positive plate and notice how large it appears to you. The larger it seems, the greater the capacity of the condenser. When the plates are directly opposite each other, the positive plate appears quite large. But if they move apart, you see less of it; and if it sits off to one side, all you can see is the edge. If you can't see many atoms that have lost electrons and could offer you good spots to settle, there's no point in sticking around on that side of the plate; you might as well try to return home the long way you originally came.
That’s why in a variable plate condenser there is very little capacity when no parts of the plates are opposite each other, and there is the greatest capacity when they are exactly opposite one another.
That’s why in a variable plate condenser, there’s very little capacity when no parts of the plates are facing each other, and the maximum capacity occurs when they are directly opposite one another.

While we are at it we might just as well clean up this whole business of variable capacities and inductances by considering two ways in which to make a variable inductance. Fig. 45 shows the simplest way but it has some disadvantages which I won’t try now to explain. We make a long coil and then take off taps. We can make connections between one end of the coil and any of the taps. The more turns there are included in the part of the coil which we are using the greater is the inductance. If we want to do a real job we can bring each of these taps to a little stud and arrange a sliding or rotating contact with them. Then we have an inductance the value of which we can vary “step-by-step” in a convenient manner.
While we're at it, we might as well sort out the whole issue of variable capacities and inductances by looking at two methods for creating a variable inductance. Fig. 45 shows the simplest way, but it does come with some drawbacks that I won’t explain right now. We create a long coil and then take off taps. We can connect one end of the coil to any of the taps. The more turns included in the part of the coil we're using, the greater the inductance. If we want to do a proper job, we can lead each of these taps to a small stud and set up a sliding or rotating contact with them. This way, we have an inductance value that we can adjust “step-by-step” in a convenient way.
Another way to make a variable inductance is to make what is called a “variometer.” I dislike the name because it doesn’t “meter” anything. If properly calibrated it would of course “meter” inductance, 111but then it should be called an “inducto-meter.”
Another way to create a variable inductance is to design something called a “variometer.” I’m not a fan of the name because it doesn’t actually “meter” anything. If it were calibrated correctly, it would indeed “meter” inductance, 111so it should really be called an “inducto-meter.”
Do you remember the gang of boys that fellow had to drive off his property? What if there had been two different gangs playing there? How much trouble he has depends upon whether there is anything in common between the gangs. Suppose they are playing in different parts of his property and so act just as if the other crowd wasn’t also trespassing. He could just add the trouble of starting one gang to the trouble of starting the other.
Do you remember the group of boys that guy had to chase off his property? What if there were two different groups hanging out there? The amount of trouble he has depends on whether there’s anything connecting the two groups. Let’s say they’re playing in separate areas of his property and they act like the other group isn’t also trespassing. He could just combine the trouble of dealing with one group with the trouble of dealing with the other.
It would be very different if the gangs have anything in common. Then one would encourage the other much as the various boys of the same gang encourage each other. He would have a lot more trouble. And this extra trouble would be because of the relations between gangs, that is, because of their “mutual inductance.”
It would be totally different if the gangs shared anything in common. Then one would motivate the other just like the guys in the same gang support each other. He would face a lot more challenges. And this extra challenge would come from the relationships between the gangs, meaning because of their “mutual inductance.”
On the other hand suppose the gangs came from different parts of the town and disliked each other. He wouldn’t have nearly the trouble. Each gang would be yelling at the other as they went along: “You’d better beat it. He knows all right, all right, who broke that bush down by the gate. Just wait till he catches you.” They’d get out a little easier, each in the hope the other crowd would catch it from the owner. There’s a case where their mutual relations, their mutual inductance, makes the job easier.
On the other hand, let’s say the gangs came from different parts of town and didn’t like each other. He wouldn’t have as much trouble. Each gang would be shouting at the other as they went by: “You’d better get out of here. He knows for sure who messed up that bush by the gate. Just wait until he gets his hands on you.” They’d be off a bit easier, each hoping the other group would take the blame from the owner. This shows how their relationship, their mutual dislike, makes things easier.
That’s true of coils with inductance. Suppose you wind two inductance coils and connect them in series. If they are at right angles to each other as in Fig. 11246a they have no effect on each other. There is no mutual inductance. But if they are parallel and wound the same way like the coils of Fig. 46b they will act like a single coil of greater inductance. If the coils are parallel but wound in opposite directions as in Fig. 46c they will have less inductance because of their mutual inductance. You can check these statements for yourself if you’ll refer back to Letter 10 and see what happens in the same way as I told you in discussing Fig. 28.
That’s true for inductive coils. Imagine you wind two inductive coils and connect them in series. If they are positioned at right angles to each other like in Fig. 11246a, they won’t affect each other. There’s no mutual inductance. However, if they are parallel and wound the same way, like the coils in Fig. 46b, they will function as a single coil with greater inductance. If the coils are parallel but wound in opposite directions, as shown in Fig. 46c, they will have lower inductance due to their mutual inductance. You can verify these statements yourself by referring back to Letter 10 and seeing what happens in the same manner I described in discussing Fig. 28.


If the coils are neither parallel nor at right angles there will be some mutual inductance but not as much as if they were parallel. By turning the coils we can get all the variations in mutual relations from the case of Fig. 46b to that of Fig. 46c. That’s what we arrange to do in a variable inductance of the variometer type.
If the coils aren't parallel or at right angles, there will still be some mutual inductance, but it won't be as much as if they were parallel. By rotating the coils, we can achieve all the variations in mutual relations from the situation shown in Fig. 46b to that in Fig. 46c. That's the setup we use in a variable inductance of the variometer type.

There is another way of varying the mutual inductance. We can make one coil slide inside another. If it is way inside, the total inductance which the two coils offer is either larger than the sum of what they can offer separately or less, depending upon whether the windings are in 113the same direction or opposite. As we pull the coil out the mutual effect becomes less and finally when it is well outside the mutual inductance is very small.
There’s another way to change the mutual inductance. We can move one coil inside another. When it’s fully inside, the total inductance that the two coils provide is either greater than the sum of what they can provide separately or less, depending on whether the windings are in 113the same direction or in opposite directions. As we pull the coil out, the mutual effect decreases and eventually, when it’s completely outside, the mutual inductance becomes very small.
Now we have several methods of varying capacity and inductance and therefore we are ready to vary the frequency of our audion oscillator; that is, “tune” it, as we say. In my next letter I shall show you why we tune.
Now we have a few methods for adjusting capacity and inductance, so we’re ready to change the frequency of our audion oscillator; that is, to “tune” it, as we say. In my next letter, I’ll explain why we tune.
Now for the rule which I promised. The frequency to which a circuit is tuned depends upon the product of the number of mil-henries in the coil and the number of microfarads in the condenser. Change the coil and the condenser as much as you want but keep this product the same and the frequency will be the same.
Now for the rule I promised. The frequency that a circuit is tuned to depends on the product of the number of millihenries in the coil and the number of microfarads in the capacitor. You can change the coil and the capacitor as much as you want, but if you keep this product the same, the frequency will be the same.
More accurately the number is 6,286,000,000,000.
More precisely, the number is 6,286,000,000,000.
114LETTER 13
Tuning
Dear Radio Enthusiast:
Dear Radio Fan:
I want to tell you about receiving sets and their tuning. In the last letter I told you what determines the frequency of oscillation of an audion oscillator. It was the condenser and inductance which you studied in connection with Fig. 36. That’s what determines the frequency and also what makes the oscillations. All the tube does is to keep them going. Let’s see why this is so.
I want to talk to you about receiving sets and how to tune them. In my last letter, I explained what affects the frequency of an audion oscillator. It’s the capacitor and inductance that you studied with Fig. 36. That’s what sets the frequency and creates the oscillations. All the tube does is maintain them. Let’s explore why this is the case.

Start first, as in Fig. 47a, with a very simple circuit of a battery and a non-inductive resistance, that is, a wire wound like that of Fig. 40 in the previous letter, so that it has no inductance. The battery must do work forcing electrons through that wire. It has the ability, or the energy as we say.
Start first, as shown in Fig. 47a, with a very simple circuit consisting of a battery and a non-inductive resistor, which is a wire wound like in Fig. 40 from the previous letter, ensuring it has no inductance. The battery must work to push electrons through that wire. It has the capacity, or the energy, as we call it.

Now connect a condenser to the battery as in Fig. 47b. The connecting wires are very short; and so practically all the work which the battery does is in storing electrons in the negative plate of the condenser and robbing the positive plate. The battery displaces a certain number of electrons in the waiting-rooms of the condenser. How many, depends upon how hard it 115can push and pull, that is on its e. m. f., and upon how much capacity the condenser has.
Now connect a capacitor to the battery as shown in Fig. 47b. The wires you use are very short, so almost all the work the battery does is about storing electrons in the negative plate of the capacitor while taking them from the positive plate. The battery moves a certain number of electrons into the waiting areas of the capacitor. The amount depends on how strongly it can push and pull, which is based on its e.m.f., and on the capacity of the capacitor.

Remove the battery and connect the charged condenser to the resistance as in Fig. 47c. The electrons rush home. They bump and jostle their way along, heating the wire as they go. They have a certain amount of energy or ability to do work because they are away from home and they use it all up, bouncing along on their way. When once they are home they have used up all the surplus energy which the battery gave them.
Remove the battery and connect the charged capacitor to the resistor as shown in Fig. 47c. The electrons race back home, bumping and jostling their way through, heating the wire as they travel. They have a certain amount of energy or ability to do work because they’re away from home, and they use it all up as they bounce along. Once they reach home, they have exhausted all the extra energy that the battery provided.
Try it again, but this time, as in Fig. 47d, connect the charged condenser to a coil which has inductance. The electrons don’t get started as fast because of the inductance. But they keep going because the electrons in the wire form the habit. The result is that about the time enough electrons have got into plate 2 (which was positive), to satisfy all its lonely protons, the electrons in the wire are streaming along at a great rate. A lot of them keep going until they land on this plate and so make it negative.
Try it again, but this time, like in Fig. 47d, connect the charged capacitor to a coil that has inductance. The electrons don’t start moving as quickly because of the inductance. However, they keep moving because the electrons in the wire develop a routine. As a result, just as enough electrons have flowed into plate 2 (which is positive) to satisfy all its lonely protons, the electrons in the wire are moving along at a fast pace. Many of them continue until they reach this plate, making it negative.

That’s the same sort of thing that happens in the case of the inductance and condenser in the oscillating audion circuit except for one important fact. There is nothing to keep electrons going to the 2 plate except this habit. And there are plenty of stay-at-home electrons to stop them as they rush along. They bump and jostle, but some of them are stopped or else diverted so 116that they go bumping around without getting any nearer plate 2. Of course, they spend all their energy this way, getting every one all stirred up and heating the wire.
That’s pretty much what happens with the inductance and capacitor in the oscillating audion circuit, except for one major difference. There's nothing to keep the electrons moving toward plate 2 except for this tendency. And there are plenty of stationary electrons ready to stop them as they rush by. They collide and push against each other, but some of them get blocked or redirected so 116that they end up bouncing around without getting any closer to plate 2. Of course, they waste all their energy like this, making everything heat up.
Some of the energy which the electrons had when they were on plate 1 is spent, therefore, and there aren’t as many electrons getting to plate 2. When they turn around and start back, as you know they do, the same thing happens. The result is that each successive surge of electrons is smaller than the preceding. Their energy is being wasted in heating the wire. The stream of electrons gets smaller and smaller, and the voltage of the condenser gets smaller and smaller, until by-and-by there isn’t any stream and the condenser is left uncharged. When that happens, we say the oscillations have “damped out.”
Some of the energy that the electrons had when they were on plate 1 gets used up, so there aren’t as many electrons reaching plate 2. When they turn around and head back, as you know they do, the same thing occurs. The result is that each consecutive wave of electrons is smaller than the one before. Their energy is being wasted as heat in the wire. The flow of electrons dwindles down, and the voltage of the capacitor decreases until eventually there’s no flow left and the capacitor becomes uncharged. When that happens, we say the oscillations have “damped out.”

That’s one way of starting oscillations which damp out–to start with a charged condenser and connect an inductance across it. There is another way which leads us to some important ideas. Look at Fig. 48. There is an inductance and a condenser. Near the coil is another coil which has a battery and a key in circuit with it. The coils are our old friends of Fig. 33 in Letter 10. Suppose we close the switch S. It starts a current through the coil ab which goes on steadily as soon as it really gets going. While it is starting, however, it induces an electron stream 117 in coil cd. There is only a momentary or transient current but it serves to charge the condenser and then events happen just as they did in the case where we charged the condenser with a battery.
That’s one way to start oscillations that eventually fade out—by using a charged capacitor and connecting an inductor across it. There’s another method that leads us to some important concepts. Take a look at Fig. 48. There’s an inductor and a capacitor. Close to the coil is another coil that has a battery and a switch in the circuit. These coils are our familiar friends from Fig. 33 in Letter 10. Suppose we close the switch S. This starts a current through the coil ab that continues steadily once it gets going. However, while it's starting up, it generates an electron flow 117 in coil cd. This creates only a brief or transient current, but it serves to charge the capacitor, and then things happen just like they did when we charged the capacitor using a battery.

Now take away this coil ab with its battery and substitute the oscillator of Fig. 36. What’s going to happen? We have two circuits in which oscillations can occur. See Fig. 49. One circuit is associated with an audion and some batteries which keep supplying it with energy so that its oscillations are continuous. The other circuit is near enough to the first to be influenced by what happens in that circuit. We say it is “coupled” to it, because whatever happens in the first circuit induces an effect in the second circuit.
Now remove this coil ab with its battery and replace it with the oscillator from Fig. 36. What will happen? We have two circuits where oscillations can occur. See Fig. 49. One circuit is connected to an audion and some batteries that continuously supply it with energy, allowing its oscillations to be constant. The other circuit is close enough to the first to be affected by what happens there. We say it is "coupled" to the first circuit because everything that occurs in the first circuit creates an effect in the second circuit.
Suppose first that in each circuit the inductance and capacity have such values as to produce oscillations of the same frequency. Then the moment we start the oscillator we have the same effect in both circuits. Let me draw the picture a little differently (Fig. 50) so that you can see this more easily. I have merely made the coil ab in two parts, one of which can affect cd in the oscillator and the other the coil L of the second circuit.
Suppose first that in each circuit the inductance and capacitance are set to produce oscillations at the same frequency. The moment we activate the oscillator, both circuits will exhibit the same effect. Let me illustrate this a bit differently (Fig. 50) so you can grasp it more easily. I have simply divided the coil ab into two parts, with one part influencing cd in the oscillator and the other part affecting the coil L of the second circuit.
118But suppose that the two circuits do not have the same natural frequencies, that is the condenser and inductance in one circuit are so large that it just naturally takes more time for an oscillation in that circuit than in the other. It is like learning to dance. You know about how well you and your partner would get along if you had one frequency of oscillation and she had another. That’s what happens in a case like this.
118But imagine that the two circuits have different natural frequencies, meaning that the capacitor and inductor in one circuit are so large that it simply takes longer for an oscillation to occur in that circuit compared to the other. It's like learning to dance. You can picture how well you and your partner would match up if you had one frequency of oscillation and she had another. That’s the situation in a case like this.

If circuit L-C takes longer for each oscillation than does circuit ab its electron stream is always working at cross purposes with the electron stream in ab which is trying to lead it. Its electrons start off from one condenser plate to the other and before they have much more than got started the stream in ab tries to call them back to go in the other direction. It is practically impossible under these conditions to get a stream of any size going in circuit L-C. It is equally hard if L-C has smaller capacity and inductance than ab so that it naturally oscillates faster.
If circuit L-C takes longer for each oscillation than circuit ab, its electron flow is always working against the electron flow in ab, which is trying to lead it. The electrons start from one condenser plate to the other, and before they even get going, the flow in ab tries to pull them back in the opposite direction. Under these conditions, it's almost impossible to get a significant flow going in circuit L-C. It's just as difficult if L-C has less capacity and inductance than ab, causing it to naturally oscillate faster.
I’ll tell you exactly what it is like. Suppose you and your partner are trying to dance without any piano or other source of music. She has one tune running through her head and she dances to that, 119except as you drag her around the floor. You are trying to follow another tune. As a couple you have a difficult time going anywhere under these conditions. But it would be all right if you both had the same tune.
I’ll tell you exactly what it's like. Imagine you and your partner are trying to dance without any music playing. She has a song stuck in her head and dances to that, 119but you’re just pulling her around the floor. You’re trying to move to a different beat. As a couple, it's tough to get anywhere under these circumstances. But it would work out if you both had the same song in mind.
If we want the electron stream in coil ab to have a large guiding effect on the stream in coil L-C we must see that both circuits have the same tune, that is the same natural frequency of oscillation.
If we want the electron flow in coil ab to effectively guide the flow in coil L-C, we need to ensure that both circuits are tuned the same, meaning they have the same natural frequency of oscillation.

This can be shown very easily by a simple experiment. Suppose we set up our circuit L-C with an ammeter in it, so as to be able to tell how large an electron stream is oscillating in that circuit. Let us also make the condenser a variable one so that we can change the natural frequency or tune of the circuit. Now let’s see what happens to the current as we vary this condenser, changing the capacity and thus changing the tune of the circuit. If we use a variable plate condenser it will have a scale on top graduated in degrees and we can note the reading of the ammeter for each position of the movable 120 plates. If we do, we find one position of these plates, that is one setting, corresponding to one value of capacity in the condenser, where the current in the circuit is a maximum. This is the setting of the condenser for which the circuit has the same tune or natural frequency as the circuit cd. Sometimes we say that the circuits are now in resonance. We also refer to the curve of values of current and condenser positions as a “tuning curve.” Such a curve is shown in Fig. 51.
This can be demonstrated easily with a simple experiment. Imagine we set up our circuit L-C with an ammeter so we can measure how strong the electron flow is oscillating in that circuit. Let’s also make the capacitor adjustable so we can change the circuit's natural frequency or tuning. Now, let’s observe what happens to the current as we adjust this capacitor, altering its capacity and thus the circuit's tuning. If we use a variable plate capacitor, it will have a scale on top marked in degrees, and we can record the ammeter reading for each position of the movable 120 plates. If we do this, we find one position of these plates—one setting—that corresponds to a specific capacity in the capacitor, where the current in the circuit reaches a maximum. This setting of the capacitor is where the circuit matches the natural frequency of the circuit cd. Sometimes, we say that the circuits are now in resonance. We also call the graph of current values and capacitor positions a “tuning curve.” Such a curve is shown in Fig. 51.

That’s all there is to tuning–adjusting the capacity and inductance of a circuit until it has the same natural frequency as some other circuit with which we want it to work. We can either adjust the capacity as we just did, or we can adjust the inductance. In that case we use a variable inductance as in Fig. 52.
That’s all there is to tuning—adjusting the capacity and inductance of a circuit until it matches the natural frequency of another circuit we want it to work with. We can either adjust the capacity like we just did, or we can change the inductance. In that case, we use a variable inductance as shown in Fig. 52.
If we want to be able to tune to any of a large range of frequencies we usually have to take out or put into the circuit a whole lot of mil-henries at a time. When we do we get these mil-henries of inductance from a coil which we call a “loading coil.” That’s why your friends add a loading coil when they 121want to tune for the long wave-length stations, that is, those with a low frequency.
If we want to be able to tune into a wide range of frequencies, we usually have to add or remove a lot of millihenries at once. When we do this, we get these millihenries of inductance from a coil that we call a “loading coil.” That’s why your friends use a loading coil when they 121want to tune into the long wavelength stations, which are those with a low frequency.
When our circuit L-C of Fig. 49 is tuned to the frequency of the oscillator we get in it a maximum current. There is a maximum stream of electrons, and hence a maximum number of them crowded first into one and then into the other plate of the condenser. And so the condenser is charged to a maximum voltage, first in one direction and then in the other.
When our circuit L-C in Fig. 49 is tuned to the frequency of the oscillator, we get the highest current. There's a maximum flow of electrons, meaning a maximum number of them crowd into one plate of the capacitor and then into the other. As a result, the capacitor is charged to a maximum voltage, first in one direction and then in the other.

Now connect the circuit L-C to the grid of an audion. If the circuit is tuned we’ll have the maximum possible voltage applied between grid and filament. In the plate circuit we’ll get an increase and then a decrease of current. You know that will happen for I prepared you for this moment by the last page of my ninth letter. I’ll tell you more about that current in the plate circuit in a later letter. I am connecting a telephone receiver in the plate circuit, and also a condenser, the latter for a reason to be explained later. The combination appears then as in Fig. 53. That figure shows a C-W transmitter and an audion detector. This is the sort of a detector 122 we would use for radio-telephony, but the transmitter is the sort we would use for radio-telegraphy. We shall make some changes in them later.
Now connect the circuit L-C to the grid of an audion. If the circuit is tuned, we’ll have the maximum voltage possible between the grid and the filament. In the plate circuit, we’ll see an increase followed by a decrease in current. You know this will happen because I prepared you for it on the last page of my ninth letter. I’ll tell you more about that current in the plate circuit in a later letter. I'm connecting a telephone receiver in the plate circuit, along with a condenser, which I'll explain the purpose of later. The setup appears as shown in Fig. 53. That figure displays a C-W transmitter and an audion detector. This is the kind of detector 122 we would use for radio-telephony, but the transmitter is the type we would use for radio-telegraphy. We’ll make some changes to them later.

Whenever we start the oscillating current in the transmitter we get an effect in the detector circuit, of which I’ll tell you more later. For the moment I am interested in showing you how the transmitter and the detector may be separated by miles and still there will be an effect in the detector circuit every time the key in the transmitter circuit is closed.
Whenever we turn on the oscillating current in the transmitter, we see an effect in the detector circuit, which I’ll explain more about later. Right now, I want to show you how the transmitter and the detector can be miles apart, yet the detector circuit still responds every time the key in the transmitter circuit is closed.
This is how we do it. At the sending station, that is, wherever we locate the transmitter, we make a condenser using the earth, or ground, as one plate. We do the same thing at the receiving station where the detector circuit is located. To these condensers we connect inductances and these inductances we couple to our transmitter and receiver as shown in Fig. 54. The upper plate of the condenser in each 123case is a few horizontal wires. The lower plate is the moist earth of the ground and we arrange to get in contact with that in various ways. One of the simplest methods is to connect to the water pipes of the city water-system.
This is how we do it. At the sending station, wherever we place the transmitter, we create a condenser using the ground as one plate. We do the same thing at the receiving station where the detector circuit is located. We connect inductors to these condensers, and we couple these inductors to our transmitter and receiver as shown in Fig. 54. The upper plate of the condenser in each 123 case consists of a few horizontal wires. The lower plate is the moist earth of the ground, and we arrange to make contact with it in various ways. One of the easiest methods is to connect to the water pipes of the city water system.
Now we have our radio transmitting-station and a station for receiving its signals. You remember we can make dots and dashes by the key or switch in the oscillator circuit. When we depress the key we start the oscillator going. That sets up oscillations in the circuit with the inductance and the capacity formed by the antenna. If we want a real-sized stream of electrons up and down this antenna lead (the vertical wire), we must tune that circuit. That is why I have shown a variable inductance in the circuit of the transmitting antenna.
Now we have our radio transmission station and a station to receive its signals. You remember we can create dots and dashes using the key or switch in the oscillator circuit. When we press the key, we activate the oscillator. That generates oscillations in the circuit with the inductance and capacitance created by the antenna. If we want a steady flow of electrons up and down this antenna lead (the vertical wire), we need to tune that circuit. That's why I've included a variable inductor in the circuit of the transmitting antenna.
What happens when these electrons surge back and forth between the horizontal wires and the ground, I don’t know. I do know, however, that if we tune the antenna circuit at the receiving station there will be a small stream of electrons surging back and forth in that circuit.
What happens when these electrons move back and forth between the horizontal wires and the ground, I'm not sure. I do know, though, that if we adjust the antenna circuit at the receiving station, there will be a small flow of electrons moving back and forth in that circuit.
Usually scientists explain what happens by saying that the transmitting station sends out waves in the ether and that these waves are received by the antenna system at the distant station. Wherever you put up a receiving station you will get the effect. It will be much smaller, however, the farther the two stations are apart.
Usually, scientists describe what happens by saying that the transmitting station sends out waves through the ether, which are then picked up by the antenna system at the remote station. No matter where you set up a receiving station, you'll get the effect. However, it will be significantly weaker the farther apart the two stations are.
I am not going to tell you anything about wave motion in the ether because I don’t believe we know 124enough about the ether to try to explain, but I shall tell you what we mean by “wave length.”
I’m not going to explain anything about wave motion in the ether because I don’t think we know 124 enough about the ether to even try, but I will tell you what we mean by “wave length.”
Somehow energy, the ability to do work, travels out from the sending antenna in all directions. Wherever you put up your receiving station you get more or less of this energy. Of course, energy is being sent out only while the key is depressed and the oscillator going. This energy travels just as fast as light, that is at the enormous speed of 186,000 miles a second. If you use meters instead of miles the speed is 300,000,000 meters a second.
Somehow, energy, which is the ability to do work, radiates from the transmitting antenna in all directions. No matter where you set up your receiving station, you'll receive varying amounts of this energy. Naturally, energy is only being transmitted while the key is pressed down and the oscillator is active. This energy travels at the speed of light, which is an amazing 186,000 miles per second. If you're using meters instead of miles, the speed is 300,000,000 meters per second.
Now, how far will the energy which is sent out from the antenna travel during the time it takes for one oscillation of the current in the antenna? Suppose the current is oscillating one million times a second. Then it takes one-millionth of a second for one oscillation. In that time the energy will have traveled away from the antenna one-millionth part of the distance it will travel in a whole second. That is one-millionth of 300 million meters or 300 meters.
Now, how far will the energy emitted from the antenna travel during one cycle of the current in the antenna? Let's say the current oscillates a million times a second. This means it takes one-millionth of a second for one cycle. In that time, the energy will have traveled away from the antenna one-millionth of the distance it would cover in a full second. That's one-millionth of 300 million meters, or 300 meters.
The distance which energy will go in the time taken by one oscillation of the source of that energy is the wave length. In the case just given that distance is 300 meters. The wave length, then, of 300 meters corresponds to a frequency of one million. In fact if we divide 300 million meters by the frequency we get the wave length, and that’s the same rule as I gave you in the last letter.
The distance that energy travels in the time it takes for one oscillation of the energy source is called the wavelength. In this example, that distance is 300 meters. So, a wavelength of 300 meters corresponds to a frequency of one million. In fact, if we divide 300 million meters by the frequency, we get the wavelength, and that's the same rule I mentioned in the last letter.
In further letters I’ll tell you how the audion works as a detector and how we connect a telephone 125transmitter to the oscillator to make it send out energy with a speech significance instead of a mere dot and dash significance, or signal significance. We shall have to learn quite a little about the telephone itself and about the human voice.
In future letters, I’ll explain how the audion works as a detector and how we connect a telephone 125transmitter to the oscillator to broadcast energy that carries speech meaning instead of just a series of dots and dashes or signals. We’ll need to learn a bit about the telephone itself and the human voice.
126LETTER 14
WHY AND HOW TO USE A DETECTOR
Dear Son:
Dear Son:
In the last letter we got far enough to sketch, in Fig. 54, a radio transmitting station and a receiving station. We should never, however, use just this combination because the transmitting station is intended to send telegraph signals and the receiving station is best suited to receiving telephonic transmission. But let us see what happens.
In the last letter, we went far enough to outline, in Fig. 54, a radio transmitting station and a receiving station. However, we should never rely solely on this combination because the transmitting station is designed to send telegraph signals, while the receiving station is more suitable for receiving telephone transmissions. But let's see what happens.

When the key in the plate circuit of the audion at the sending station is depressed an alternating current is started. This induces an alternating current in the neighboring antenna circuit. If this antenna circuit, which is formed by a coil and a condenser, is tuned to the frequency of oscillations which are 127being produced in the audion circuit then there is a maximum current induced in the antenna.
When the key in the plate circuit of the audion at the sending station is pressed, it triggers an alternating current. This creates an alternating current in the nearby antenna circuit. If this antenna circuit, made up of a coil and a capacitor, is tuned to the frequency of oscillations being generated in the audion circuit, there will be a maximum current induced in the antenna.
As soon as this starts the antenna starts to send out energy in all directions, or “radiate” energy as we say. How this energy, or ability to do work, gets across space we don’t know. However it may be, it does get to the receiving station. It only takes a small fraction of a second before the antenna at the receiving station starts to receive energy, because energy travels at the rate of 186,000 miles a second.
As soon as this begins, the antenna starts sending out energy in all directions, or "radiating" energy, as we call it. We don’t know exactly how this energy, or ability to do work, travels across space. Regardless, it reaches the receiving station. It only takes a tiny fraction of a second for the antenna at the receiving station to start picking up the energy, since energy travels at a speed of 186,000 miles per second.
The energy which is received does its work in making the electrons in that antenna oscillate back and forth. If the receiving antenna is tuned to the frequency which the sending station is producing, then the electrons in the receiving antenna oscillate back and forth most widely and there is a maximum current in this circuit.
The energy that is received makes the electrons in that antenna move back and forth. If the receiving antenna is tuned to the frequency generated by the sending station, then the electrons in the receiving antenna oscillate back and forth with the greatest amplitude, resulting in maximum current in this circuit.
The oscillations of the electrons in the receiving antenna induce similar oscillations in the tuned circuit which is coupled to it. This circuit also is tuned to the frequency which the distant oscillator is producing and so in it we have the maximum oscillation of the electrons. The condenser in that circuit charges and discharges alternately.
The fluctuations of the electrons in the receiving antenna create similar fluctuations in the connected tuned circuit. This circuit is also tuned to the frequency generated by the distant oscillator, resulting in the strongest oscillation of the electrons. The capacitor in that circuit alternately charges and discharges.
The grid of the receiving audion always has the same voltage as the condenser to which it is connected and so it becomes alternately positive and negative. This state of affairs starts almost as soon as the key at the sending station is depressed and continues as long as it is held down.
The grid of the receiving audion always has the same voltage as the condenser it's connected to, so it alternates between positive and negative. This situation begins almost immediately after the key at the sending station is pressed and continues as long as it is held down.
Now what happens inside the audion? As the 128grid becomes more and more positive the current in the plate circuit increases. When the grid no longer grows more positive but rather becomes less and less positive the current in the plate circuit decreases. As the grid becomes of zero voltage and then negative, that is as the grid “reverses its polarity,” the plate current continues to decrease. When the grid stops growing more negative and starts to become less so, the plate current stops decreasing and starts to increase.
Now, what happens inside the audion? As the 128 grid gets more positive, the current in the plate circuit goes up. When the grid stops getting more positive and instead starts to get less positive, the current in the plate circuit goes down. As the grid reaches zero voltage and then goes negative, meaning the grid "reverses its polarity," the plate current keeps decreasing. When the grid no longer gets more negative and starts to become less negative, the plate current stops decreasing and begins to increase.
All this you know, for you have followed through such a cycle of changes before. You know also how we can use the audion characteristic to tell us what sort of changes take place in the plate current when the grid voltage changes. The plate current increases and decreases alternately, becoming greater and less than it would be if the grid were not interfering. These variations in its intensity take place very rapidly, that is with whatever high frequency the sending station operates. What happens to the plate current on the average?
All this you already know because you've gone through this cycle of changes before. You also understand how we can use the audion characteristic to see what kind of changes occur in the plate current when the grid voltage changes. The plate current alternates, increasing and decreasing, becoming higher and lower than it would be if the grid weren't interfering. These variations in intensity happen very quickly, at whatever high frequency the sending station operates on. What is the average effect on the plate current?
The plate current, you remember, is a stream of electrons from the filament to the plate (on the inside of the tube), and from the plate back through the B-battery to the filament (on the outside of the tube). The grid alternately assists and opposes that stream. When it assists, the electrons in the plate circuit are moved at a faster rate. When the grid becomes negative and opposes the plate the stream of electrons is at a slower rate. The stream is always going in the same direction but it varies in its 129rate depending upon the changes in grid potential.
The plate current is the flow of electrons from the filament to the plate (inside the tube), and then from the plate back through the B-battery to the filament (outside the tube). The grid alternately helps and hinders that flow. When it helps, the electrons in the plate circuit move faster. When the grid turns negative and hinders the plate, the flow of electrons slows down. The flow always goes in the same direction, but its 129rate changes based on the grid potential.

When the grid is positive, that is for half a cycle of the alternating grid-voltage, the stream is larger than it would be if the plate current depended only on the B-battery. For the other half of a cycle it is less. The question I am raising is this: Do more electrons move around the plate circuit if there is a signal coming in than when there is no incoming signal? To answer this we must look at the audion characteristic of our particular tube and this characteristic must have been taken with the same B-battery as we use when we try to receive the signals.
When the grid is positive, which happens during half of the alternating grid voltage cycle, the current is greater than it would be if the plate current relied solely on the B-battery. During the other half of the cycle, it's lower. The question I'm asking is this: Do more electrons flow through the plate circuit when there’s a signal coming in compared to when there isn’t? To answer this, we need to examine the audion characteristics of our specific tube, and these characteristics must have been measured using the same B-battery we use when we're trying to receive the signals.
There are just three possible answers to this question. The first answer is: “No, there is a smaller number of electrons passing through the plate circuit each second if the grid is being affected by an incoming signal.” The second is: “The signal 130doesn’t make any difference in the total number of electrons which move each second from filament to plate.” And the third answer is: “Yes, there is a greater total number each second.”
There are just three possible answers to this question. The first answer is: “No, there are fewer electrons passing through the plate circuit each second if the grid is influenced by an incoming signal.” The second is: “The signal 130doesn’t affect the total number of electrons that move each second from filament to plate.” And the third answer is: “Yes, there is a greater total number each second.”

Any one of the three answers may be right. It all depends on the characteristic of the tube as we are operating it, and that depends not only upon the type and design of tube but also upon what voltages we are using in our batteries. Suppose the variations in the voltage of the grid are as represented in Fig. 55, and that the characteristic of the tube is as shown in the same figure. Then obviously the first answer is correct. You can see for yourself that when the grid becomes positive the current in the plate circuit can’t increase much anyway. For the other half of the cycle, that is, while the grid is negative, the current in the plate is very much decreased. The decrease in one half-cycle is larger than the increase during the other half-cycle, so that on the average the current is less when the 131signal is coming in. The dotted line shows the average current.
Any one of the three answers could be correct. It all depends on the characteristics of the tube as we’re using it, which relies not only on the type and design of the tube but also on the voltages we're using in our batteries. Suppose the voltage variations of the grid are as shown in Fig. 55, and the characteristics of the tube are depicted in the same figure. Then it's clear that the first answer is correct. You can see for yourself that when the grid goes positive, the current in the plate circuit can’t really increase much. For the other half of the cycle, when the grid is negative, the current in the plate decreases significantly. The drop in one half-cycle is greater than the increase during the other half-cycle, so on average, the current is lower when the 131signal is coming in. The dotted line represents the average current.
Suppose that we take the same tube and use a B-battery of lower voltage. The characteristic will have the same shape but there will not be as much current unless the grid helps, so that the characteristic will be like that of Fig. 56. This characteristic crosses the axis of zero volts at a smaller number of mil-amperes than does the other because the B-batteries can’t pull as hard as they did in the other case.
Suppose we take the same tube and use a B-battery with a lower voltage. The characteristic will have the same shape, but there won’t be as much current unless the grid assists, so the characteristic will look like that in Fig. 56. This characteristic crosses the zero-volt axis at a lower number of milliamperes than the other one because the B-batteries can’t exert as much force as they did in the other case.

You can see the result. When the grid becomes positive it helps and increases the plate current. When it becomes negative it opposes and decreases the plate current. But the increase just balances the decrease, so that on the average the current is unchanged, as shown by the dotted line.
You can see the result. When the grid goes positive, it boosts the plate current. When it goes negative, it counteracts and lowers the plate current. However, the increase just offsets the decrease, so that on average the current remains constant, as indicated by the dotted line.
If we want to know whether or not there is any incoming signal we will not use the tube in the second condition, that of Fig. 56, because it won’t tell us anything. On the other hand why use the tube under the first conditions where we need a large plate battery? If we can get the same result, that is an indication when the other station is signalling, by using a small battery let’s do it that way for batteries cost money. For that reason we shall confine ourselves to the study of what takes place under the conditions of Fig. 57.
If we want to find out if there's any incoming signal, we won't use the tube in the second scenario, like in Fig. 56, because it won't provide any information. On the other hand, why use the tube in the first scenario, where we need a large plate battery? If we can get the same result—an indication when the other station is signaling—by using a small battery, then let's go with that since batteries are expensive. For that reason, we'll focus on what happens under the conditions shown in Fig. 57.
We now know that when a signal is being sent by the distant station the current in the plate circuit of our audion at the receiving station is greater, on the average. We are ready to see what effect this has on the telephone receiver. And to do this requires a little study of how the telephone receiver works and why.
We now understand that when a signal is sent from the distant station, the current in the plate circuit of our audion at the receiving station is usually higher. We're now prepared to examine how this affects the telephone receiver. To do this, we need to take a closer look at how the telephone receiver operates and why.

I shall not stop now to tell you much about the telephone receiver for it deserves a whole letter all to itself. You know that a magnet attracts iron. Suppose you wind a coil of insulated wire around a bar magnet or put the magnet inside such a coil as in Fig. 58. Send a stream of electrons through the turns of the coil–a steady stream such as comes from the battery shown in 133the figure. The strength of the magnet is altered. For one direction of the electron stream through the coil the magnet is stronger. For the opposite direction of current the magnet will be weaker.
I won’t take the time to explain much about the telephone receiver because it deserves an entire letter on its own. You know that a magnet attracts iron. Imagine wrapping a coil of insulated wire around a bar magnet or placing the magnet inside that coil, like in Fig. 58. If you send a steady stream of electrons through the coil—like the one from the battery shown in 133—the strength of the magnet changes. When the electron stream flows in one direction through the coil, the magnet gets stronger. When the current goes in the opposite direction, the magnet becomes weaker.

Fig. 59 shows a simple design of telephone receiver. It is formed by a bar magnet, a coil about it through which a current can flow, and a thin disc of iron. The iron disc, or diaphragm, is held at its edges so that it cannot move as a whole toward the magnet. The center can move, however, and so the diaphragm is bowed out in the form shown in the smaller sketch.
Fig. 59 shows a basic design of a telephone receiver. It consists of a bar magnet, a coil wrapped around it that allows current to flow, and a thin iron disc. The iron disc, or diaphragm, is secured at its edges to prevent it from moving as a whole toward the magnet. However, the center can move, causing the diaphragm to bow outward as shown in the smaller sketch.
Now connect a battery to the receiver winding and allow a steady stream of electrons to flow. The magnet will be either strengthened or weakened. Suppose the stream of electrons is in the direction to make it stronger–I’ll give you the rule later. Then the diaphragm is bowed out still more. If we open the battery circuit and so stop the stream of electrons the diaphragm will fly back to its original position, for it is elastic. The effect is very much that of pushing in the bottom of a tin pan and letting it fly back when you remove your hand.
Now connect a battery to the receiver coil and let a steady flow of electrons pass through. The magnet will either become stronger or weaker. If the electron flow is directed to strengthen it—I'll share the rule later—then the diaphragm will bend out even more. If we break the battery circuit and stop the electron flow, the diaphragm will spring back to its original position since it's elastic. It works similarly to pushing down on the bottom of a tin pan and letting it pop back up when you remove your hand.
Next reverse the battery. The magnet does not pull as hard as it would if there were no current. The diaphragm is therefore not bowed out so much.
Next, flip the battery around. The magnet doesn't pull as strongly as it would without any current. As a result, the diaphragm isn't pushed out as much.
Suppose that instead of reversing the current by reversing the battery we arrange to send an alternating 134current through the coil. That will have the same effect. For one direction of current flow, the diaphragm is attracted still more by the magnet but for the other direction it is not attracted as much. The result is that the center of the diaphragm moves back and forth during one complete cycle of the alternating current in the coil.
Suppose that instead of changing the direction of the current by reversing the battery, we send an alternating 134 current through the coil. That will have the same effect. When the current flows one way, the diaphragm is pulled even more by the magnet, but when it flows the other way, it's not pulled as much. The result is that the center of the diaphragm moves back and forth during one complete cycle of the alternating current in the coil.
The diaphragm vibrates back and forth in tune with the alternating current in the receiver winding. As it moves away from the magnet it pushes ahead of it the neighboring molecules of air. These molecules then crowd and push the molecules of air which are just a little further away from the diaphragm. These in turn push against those beyond them and so a push or shove is sent out by the diaphragm from molecule to molecule until perhaps it reaches your ear. When the molecules of air next your ear receive the push they in turn push against your eardrum.
The diaphragm moves back and forth in sync with the alternating current in the receiver winding. As it moves away from the magnet, it pushes the nearby air molecules ahead of it. These molecules then crowd together and push on the air molecules just a bit farther from the diaphragm. This continues as they push against the next set of molecules, creating a wave that travels from the diaphragm through the air until it possibly reaches your ear. When the air molecules next to your ear receive the push, they in turn push against your eardrum.
In the meantime what has happened? The current in the telephone receiver has reversed its direction. The diaphragm is now pulled toward the magnet and the adjacent molecules of air have even more room than they had before. So they stop crowding each other and follow the diaphragm in the other direction. The molecules of air just beyond these, on the way toward your ear, need crowd no longer and they also move back. Of course, they go even farther than their old positions for there is now more room on the other side. That same thing happens all along the line until the air molecules next your ear start back and give your eardrum a chance 135to expand outward. As they move away they make a little vacuum there and the eardrum puffs out.
In the meantime, what’s happening? The current in the telephone receiver has reversed direction. The diaphragm is now being pulled toward the magnet, and the nearby air molecules have even more space than before. So, they stop pushing against each other and follow the diaphragm the other way. The air molecules just beyond these, heading toward your ear, no longer need to crowd together, so they move back too. Naturally, they go even farther than their original positions because there’s now more room on the other side. This same process continues along the line until the air molecules next to your ear push back and give your eardrum a chance 135 to expand outward. As they move away, they create a small vacuum there, causing the eardrum to puff out.
That goes on over and over again just as often as the alternating current passes through one cycle of values. And you, unless you are thinking particularly of the scientific explanations, say that you “hear a musical note.” As a matter of fact if we increase the frequency of the alternating current you will say that the “pitch” of the note has been increased or that you hear a note higher in the musical scale.
That happens repeatedly, just like the alternating current goes through one cycle of values. And you, unless you're focusing on the scientific details, say that you "hear a musical note." In fact, if we raise the frequency of the alternating current, you would say that the "pitch" of the note has gone up or that you're hearing a note higher in the musical scale.
If we started with a very low-frequency alternating current, say one of fifteen or twenty cycles per second, you wouldn’t say you heard a note at all. You would hear a sort of a rumble. If we should gradually increase the frequency of the alternating current you would find that about sixty or perhaps a hundred cycles a second would give you the impression of a musical note. As the frequency is made still larger you have merely the impression of a higher-pitched note until we get up into the thousands of cycles a second. Then, perhaps about twenty-thousand cycles a second, you find you hear only a little sound like wind or like steam escaping slowly from a jet or through a leak. A few thousand cycles more each second and you don’t hear anything at all.
If we started with a very low-frequency alternating current, like fifteen or twenty cycles per second, you wouldn’t really hear a note at all. Instead, it would sound more like a rumble. If we gradually increase the frequency of the alternating current, you'd notice that around sixty or maybe a hundred cycles a second would give you the feeling of a musical note. As the frequency gets even higher, you just perceive a higher pitch until we reach thousands of cycles per second. Then, at around twenty thousand cycles per second, you’d only hear a sound similar to wind or steam slowly escaping from a jet or a leak. A few thousand cycles higher, and you wouldn’t hear anything at all.
You know that for radio-transmitting stations we use audion oscillators which are producing alternating currents with frequencies of several hundred-thousand cycles per second. It certainly wouldn’t do any good to connect a telephone receiver in the 136antenna circuit at the receiving station as in Fig. 60. We couldn’t hear so high pitched a note.
You know that for radio stations we use audion oscillators that produce alternating currents with frequencies of several hundred thousand cycles per second. It definitely wouldn’t be helpful to connect a telephone receiver in the 136 antenna circuit at the receiving station as shown in Fig. 60. We wouldn’t be able to hear such a high-pitched sound.

Even if we could, there are several reasons why the telephone receiver wouldn’t work at such high frequencies. The first is that the diaphragm can’t be moved so fast. It has some inertia, you know, that is, some unwillingness to get started. If you try to start it in one direction and, before you really get it going, change your mind and try to make it go in the other direction, it simply isn’t going to go at all. So even if there is an alternating current in the coil around the magnet there will not be any corresponding vibration of the diaphragm if the frequency is very high, certainly not if it is above about 20,000 cycles a second.
Even if we could, there are several reasons why the phone receiver wouldn’t work at such high frequencies. The first is that the diaphragm can’t move that quickly. It has some inertia, which means it’s not eager to get started. If you try to push it in one direction and, before it really gets moving, change your mind and try to make it go the other way, it simply won’t move at all. So even if there's an alternating current in the coil around the magnet, there won’t be any corresponding vibration of the diaphragm if the frequency is very high, definitely not if it’s above about 20,000 cycles per second.
The other reason is that there will only be a very feeble current in the coil anyway, no matter what you do, if the frequency is high. You remember that the electrons in a coil are sort of banded together and each has an effect on all the others which can move in parallel paths. The result is that they have a great unwillingness to get started and an equal unwillingness to stop. Their unwillingness is much more than if the wire was long and straight. It is also made very much greater by the presence of the iron core. An alternating e. m. f. of high frequency hardly gets the electrons started at all before it’s 137time to get them going in the opposite direction. There is very little movement to the electrons and hence only a very small current in the coil if the frequency is high.
The other reason is that there will only be a very weak current in the coil anyway, no matter what you do, if the frequency is high. You remember that the electrons in a coil are kind of grouped together, and each one affects all the others, which can move in parallel paths. The result is that they are very reluctant to start moving and equally reluctant to stop. Their reluctance is much greater than if the wire were long and straight. It's also significantly increased by the presence of the iron core. An alternating e.m.f. of high frequency hardly gets the electrons moving at all before it’s time to make them move in the opposite direction. There is very little movement of the electrons, and therefore only a very small current in the coil if the frequency is high.
If you want a rule for it you can remember that the higher the frequency of an alternating e. m. f. the smaller the electron stream which it can set oscillating in a given coil. Of course, we might make the e. m. f. stronger, that is pull and shove the electrons harder, but unless the coil has a very small inductance or unless the frequency is very low we should have to use an e. m. f. of enormous strength to get any appreciable current.
If you want a guideline, remember that the higher the frequency of an alternating electromagnetic force, the smaller the stream of electrons it can set into oscillation in a given coil. Sure, we could make the electromagnetic force stronger, meaning we could push and pull the electrons harder, but unless the coil has a very small inductance or the frequency is very low, we would need to use an extremely strong electromagnetic force to get any significant current.
Condensers are just the other way in their action. If there is a condenser in a circuit, where an alternating e. m. f. is active, there is lots of trouble if the frequency is low. If, however, the frequency is high the same-sized current can be maintained by a smaller e. m. f. than if the frequency is low. You see, when the frequency is high the electrons hardly get into the waiting-room of the condenser before it is time for them to turn around and go toward the other room. Unless there is a large current, there are not enough electrons crowded together in the waiting-room to push back very hard on the next one to be sent along by the e. m. f. Because the electrons do not push back very hard a small e. m. f. can drive them back and forth.
Condensers work in exactly the opposite way. If there's a condenser in a circuit with an alternating e.m.f. active, it can cause a lot of issues if the frequency is low. However, if the frequency is high, the same-sized current can be sustained by a smaller e.m.f. than if the frequency is low. You see, when the frequency is high, the electrons barely have time to enter the waiting room of the condenser before they need to turn around and head to the other room. Unless there's a large current, not enough electrons gather in the waiting room to push back hard against the next one sent along by the e.m.f. Since the electrons don’t push back very strongly, a small e.m.f. can easily move them back and forth.
Now we are ready to study the receiving circuit of Fig. 54. I showed you in Fig. 57 how the current through, the tube will vary as time goes on. It increases and decreases with the frequency of the current in the antenna of the distant transmitting station. We have a picture, or graph, as we say, of how this plate current varies. It will be necessary to study that carefully and to resolve it into its components, that is to separate it into parts, which, added together again will give the whole. To show you what I mean I am going to treat first a very simple case involving money.
Now we're ready to study the receiving circuit shown in Fig. 54. In Fig. 57, I demonstrated how the current through the tube changes over time. It increases and decreases based on the frequency of the current in the antenna of the distant transmitting station. We have a graph that illustrates how this plate current varies. It's important to analyze this carefully and break it down into its components, meaning we need to separate it into parts that, when combined again, will give us the whole. To clarify what I mean, I will first discuss a very simple case involving money.
Suppose a boy was started by his father with 50 cents of spending money. He spends that and runs 50 cents in debt. The next day his father gives him a dollar. Half of this he has to spend to pay up his yesterday’s indebtedness. This he does at once and that leaves him 50 cents ahead. But again he buys something for a dollar and so runs 50 cents in debt. Day after day this cycle is repeated. We can show what happens by the curve of Fig. 61a.
Suppose a boy starts with 50 cents from his dad as spending money. He spends it and ends up 50 cents in debt. The next day, his dad gives him a dollar. Half of that goes to pay off his debt from the previous day. He does that right away, leaving him 50 cents ahead. But then he buys something for a dollar again, putting him back 50 cents in debt. This cycle repeats day after day. We can illustrate what happens with the curve shown in Fig. 61a.

On the other hand, suppose he already had 60 cents which, he was saving for some special purpose. This he doesn’t touch, preferring to run into debt each day and to pay up the next, as shown in Fig. 61a. Then we would represent the story of this 60 cents by the graph of Fig. 61b.
On the other hand, let’s say he already had 60 cents that he was saving for a specific reason. He doesn’t spend this money, choosing instead to go into debt each day and pay it off the next day, as illustrated in Fig. 61a. We would then show the situation of this 60 cents with the graph in Fig. 61b.

139Now suppose that instead of going in debt each day he uses part of this 60 cents. Each day after the first his father gives him a dollar, just as before. He starts then with 60 cents as shown in Fig. 61c, increases in wealth to $1.10, then spends $1.00, bringing his funds down to 10 cents. Then he receives $1.00 from his father and the process is repeated cyclically.
139Now imagine that instead of going into debt each day, he uses a portion of this 60 cents. Each day after the first, his father gives him a dollar, just like before. He starts with 60 cents as shown in Fig. 61c, increases his wealth to $1.10, then spends $1.00, reducing his funds to 10 cents. Then he receives another $1.00 from his father and the cycle repeats.

If you saw the graph of Fig. 61c you would be able to say that, whatever he actually did, the effect was the same as if he had two pockets, in one of which he kept 60 cents all the time as shown in Fig. 61b. In his other pocket he either had money or he was in debt as shown in Fig. 61a. If you did that you would be resolving the money changes of Fig. 61c into the two components of Figs. 61a and b.
If you looked at the graph in Fig. 61c, you'd be able to say that, no matter what he actually did, the outcome was like he had two pockets: one pocket always had 60 cents in it, as shown in Fig. 61b. In his other pocket, he either had money or he was in debt, as shown in Fig. 61a. By doing this, you'd be breaking down the money changes in Fig. 61c into the two parts represented in Figs. 61a and b.
That is what I want you to do with the curve of Fig. 57 which I am reproducing here, redrawn as Fig. 62a. You see it is really the result of adding together the two curves of Figs. 62b and c, which are shown on the following page.
That’s what I want you to do with the curve of Fig. 57, which I’m reproducing here as Fig. 62a. You can see it’s actually the result of combining the two curves from Figs. 62b and c, which are shown on the next page.

We can think, therefore, of the current in the plate circuit as if it were two currents added together, that is, two electron streams passing through the same 140wire. One stream is steady and the other alternates.
We can think of the current in the plate circuit as though it consists of two currents combined, meaning there are two streams of electrons flowing through the same 140 wire. One stream is constant while the other varies.

Now look again at the diagram of our receiving set which I am reproducing as Fig. 63. When the signal is incoming there flow in the plate circuit two streams of electrons, one steady and of a value in mil-amperes corresponding to that of the graph in Fig. 62b, and the other alternating as shown in Fig. 62c.
Now take another look at the diagram of our receiving set, which I am reproducing as Fig. 63. When the signal is incoming, two streams of electrons flow in the plate circuit: one steady, with a value in milliamperes that corresponds to the graph in Fig. 62b, and the other alternating, as shown in Fig. 62c.
The steady stream of electrons will have no more difficulty in getting through the coiled wire of the receiver than it would through the same amount of straight wire. On the other hand it cannot pass the gap of the condenser.
The constant flow of electrons will have no trouble passing through the coiled wire of the receiver any more than it would through the same length of straight wire. However, it can't cross the gap of the condenser.
The alternating-current component can’t get along in the coil because its frequency is so high that the coil impedes the motion of the electrons so much as practically to stop them. On the other hand these electrons can easily run into the waiting-room offered by the condenser and then run out again as soon as it is time.
The alternating-current component can’t function properly in the coil because its frequency is so high that the coil significantly hinders the movement of the electrons to the point of almost stopping them. On the other hand, these electrons can easily flow into the waiting space created by the capacitor and then exit as soon as it’s time.

When the current in the plate circuit is large all the electrons which aren’t needed for the steady stream through the telephone receiver run into one plate of the condenser. Of course, at that same instant an equal number leave the other plate and start off toward the B-battery and the filament. An instant later, when the current in the plate circuit is small, electrons start to come out of the 141plate and to join the stream through the receiver so that this stream is kept steady.
When the current in the plate circuit is high, all the electrons that aren’t needed for the continuous flow through the telephone receiver rush into one plate of the capacitor. At the same moment, an equal number leave the other plate and head toward the B-battery and the filament. A moment later, when the current in the plate circuit is low, electrons begin to come out of the 141 plate and join the flow through the receiver, keeping that flow steady.

This steady stream of electrons, which is passing through the receiver winding, is larger than it would be if there was no incoming radio signal. The result is a stronger pull on the diaphragm of the receiver. The moment the signal starts this diaphragm is pulled over toward the magnet and it stays pulled over as long as the signal lasts. When the signal ceases it flies back. We would hear then a click when the signal started and another when it stopped.
This constant flow of electrons passing through the receiver coil is bigger than it would be without an incoming radio signal. This creates a stronger pull on the diaphragm of the receiver. The instant the signal starts, the diaphragm gets pulled toward the magnet and remains there for as long as the signal is present. When the signal stops, it quickly returns. We would hear a click when the signal starts and another when it stops.
If we wanted to distinguish dots from dashes this wouldn’t be at all satisfactory. So in the next letter I’ll show you what sort of changes we can make in the apparatus. To understand what effect these changes will have you need, however, to understand pretty well most of this letter.
If we wanted to tell apart dots from dashes, this wouldn’t be very helpful at all. So in the next letter, I’ll show you what kinds of changes we can make to the setup. To grasp the impact these changes will have, you need to understand most of this letter fairly well.
142LETTER 15
Radio Communications
Dear Lad:
Dear Dude:
Before we start on the important subject matter of this letter let us make a short review of the preceding two letters.
Before we dive into the important topics of this letter, let's quickly recap the previous two letters.
An oscillating audion at the transmitting station produces an effect on the plate current of the detector audion at the receiving station. There is impressed upon the grid of the detector an alternating e. m. f. which has the same frequency as the alternating current which is being produced at the sending station. While this e. m. f. is active, and of course it is active only while the sending key is held down, there is more current through the winding of the telephone receiver and its diaphragm is consequently pulled closer to its magnet.
An oscillating audion at the transmitting station affects the plate current of the detector audion at the receiving station. An alternating e.m.f. is applied to the grid of the detector, matching the frequency of the alternating current generated at the sending station. As long as this e.m.f. is active—which it is only while the sending key is pressed—more current flows through the telephone receiver winding, causing its diaphragm to move closer to the magnet.
What will happen if the e. m. f. which is active on the grid of the detector is made stronger or weaker? The pull on the receiver diaphragm will be stronger or weaker and the diaphragm will have to move accordingly. If the pull is weaker the elasticity of the iron will move the diaphragm away from the magnet, but if the pull is stronger the diaphragm will be moved toward the magnet.
What happens if the emf that's active on the detector’s grid gets stronger or weaker? The force on the receiver diaphragm will be stronger or weaker, and the diaphragm will have to adjust accordingly. If the force is weaker, the elasticity of the iron will pull the diaphragm away from the magnet, but if the force is stronger, the diaphragm will be pulled closer to the magnet.
Every time the diaphragm moves it affects the air in the immediate neighborhood of itself and that air 143in turn affects the air farther away and so the ear of the listener. Therefore if there are changes in the intensity or strength of the incoming signal there are going to be corresponding motions of the receiver diaphragm. And something to listen, too, if these changes are frequent enough but not so frequent that the receiver diaphragm has difficulty in following them.
Every time the diaphragm moves, it impacts the air right around it, and that air impacts the air farther away, including the listener's ear. So, if there are changes in the intensity or strength of the incoming signal, the receiver diaphragm will also move correspondingly. It’s important to listen for these changes, as long as they happen often enough but not so often that the receiver diaphragm struggles to keep up with them.
There are many ways of affecting the strength of the incoming signal. Suppose, for example, that we arrange to decrease the current in the antenna of the transmitting station. That will mean a weaker signal and a smaller increase in current through the winding of the telephone receiver at the other station. On the other hand if the signal strength is increased there is more current in this winding.
There are many ways to influence the strength of the incoming signal. For instance, if we decide to reduce the current in the antenna of the transmitting station, it will result in a weaker signal and a smaller increase in current through the winding of the telephone receiver at the other station. Conversely, if the signal strength is increased, there will be more current in this winding.

Suppose we connect a fine wire in the antenna circuit as in Fig. 64 and have a sliding contact as shown. Suppose that when we depress the switch in the oscillator circuit and so start the oscillations that the sliding contact is at o as shown. Corresponding to that strength of signal there is a certain value of current through the receiver winding at the other station. Now let us move the slider, first to a and then back to b and so on, back and forth. You see what will happen. We alternately make the current in the antenna 144 larger and smaller than it originally was. When the slider is at b there is more of the fine wire in series with the antenna, hence more resistance to the oscillations of the electrons, and hence a smaller oscillating stream of electrons. That means a weaker outgoing signal. When the slider is at a there is less resistance in the antenna circuit and a larger alternating current.
Suppose we connect a thin wire in the antenna circuit as shown in Fig. 64 and have a sliding contact, like in the diagram. Let’s say that when we press the switch in the oscillator circuit to start the oscillations, the sliding contact is at o. At that point, there’s a specific strength of signal corresponding to a particular value of current flowing through the receiver winding at the other station. Now, if we move the slider first to a and then back to b, and keep going back and forth, you’ll see what happens. We’re alternately increasing and decreasing the current in the antenna 144 compared to where it started. When the slider is at b, there's more of the thin wire in series with the antenna, which means there's more resistance to the electron oscillations, resulting in a smaller oscillating stream of electrons. This leads to a weaker outgoing signal. When the slider is at a, the resistance in the antenna circuit is lower, allowing for a larger alternating current.


A picture of what happens would be like that of Fig. 65. The signal varies in intensity, therefore, becoming larger and smaller alternately. That means the voltage impressed on the grid of the detector is alternately larger and smaller. And hence the stream of electrons through the winding of the telephone receiver is alternately larger and smaller. 145And that means that the diaphragm moves back and forth in just the time it takes to move the slider back and forth.
A visual of what happens would look like Fig. 65. The signal changes in intensity, getting larger and smaller alternately. This means the voltage applied to the detector's grid alternates between being larger and smaller. As a result, the flow of electrons through the telephone receiver's winding alternates between larger and smaller as well. 145 This causes the diaphragm to move back and forth in sync with the slider's movement.
Instead of the slider we might use a little cup almost full of grains of carbon. The carbon grains lie between two flat discs of carbon. One of these discs is held fixed. The other is connected to the center of a thin diaphragm of steel and moves back and forth as this diaphragm is moved. The whole thing makes a telephone transmitter such as you have often talked to.
Instead of the slider, we could use a small cup filled with carbon grains. The carbon grains are placed between two flat discs made of carbon. One of these discs is held in place, while the other is attached to the center of a thin steel diaphragm, which moves back and forth as the diaphragm is activated. This entire setup creates a telephone transmitter that you've probably used often.

Wires connect to the carbon discs as shown in Fig. 66. A stream of electrons can flow through the wires and from grain to grain through the “carbon button,” as we call it. The electrons have less difficulty if the grains are compressed, that is the button then offers less resistance to the flow of current. If the diaphragm moves back, allowing the grains to have more room, the electron stream is smaller and we say the button is offering more resistance to the current.
Wires connect to the carbon discs as shown in Fig. 66. A stream of electrons can flow through the wires and from grain to grain through the “carbon button,” as we refer to it. The electrons have an easier time if the grains are compressed; in that case, the button offers less resistance to the current flow. If the diaphragm moves back and gives the grains more space, the electron stream decreases, and we say the button is offering more resistance to the current.

You can see what happens. Suppose some one talks into the transmitter and makes its diaphragm go back and forth as shown in Fig. 67a. Then the current in the antenna varies, being greater or less, depending upon whether the button offers less or 146more resistance. The corresponding variations in the antenna current are shown in Fig. 67b.
You can see what happens. Imagine someone talking into the transmitter, causing its diaphragm to move back and forth as shown in Fig. 67a. Then the current in the antenna changes, increasing or decreasing depending on whether the button provides less or 146more resistance. The related changes in the antenna current are shown in Fig. 67b.
In the antenna at the receiving station there are corresponding variations in the strength of the signal and hence corresponding variations in the strength of the current through the telephone receiver. I shall show graphically what happens in Fig. 68. You see that the telephone receiver diaphragm does just the same motions as does the transmitter diaphragm. That means that the molecules of air near the receiver diaphragm are going through just the same kind of motions as are those near the transmitter diaphragm. When these air molecules affect your eardrum you hear just what you would have heard if you had been right there beside the transmitter.
In the antenna at the receiving station, there are corresponding changes in the signal strength, which means there are also corresponding changes in the current strength through the telephone receiver. I'll illustrate what happens in Fig. 68. You can see that the telephone receiver diaphragm moves just like the transmitter diaphragm. This means that the air molecules close to the receiver diaphragm move in the same way as those near the transmitter diaphragm. When these air molecules hit your eardrum, you hear exactly what you would have heard if you were standing right next to the transmitter.
That’s one way of making a radio-telephone. It is not a very efficient method but it has been used in the past. Before we look at any of the more recent methods we can draw some general ideas from this method and learn some words that are used almost always in speaking of radio-telephones.
That’s one way to make a radio phone. It’s not the most efficient method, but it has been used before. Before we explore any of the more recent methods, we can take some general ideas from this approach and learn some terms that are commonly used when talking about radio phones.
In any system of radio-telephony you will always find that there is produced at the transmitting station a high-frequency alternating current and that this current flows in a tuned circuit one part of which is the condenser formed by the antenna and the ground (or something which acts like a ground). This high-frequency current, or radio-current, as we usually say, is varied in its strength. It is varied in conformity with the human voice. If the human 147voice speaking into the transmitter is low pitched there are slow variations in the intensity of the radio current. If the voice is high pitched there are more rapid variations in the strength of the radio-frequency current. That is why we say the radio-current is “modulated” by the human voice.
In any radio communication system, you will always find that a high-frequency alternating current is generated at the transmitting station, and this current flows through a tuned circuit, one part of which is the capacitor created by the antenna and the ground (or something that functions like a ground). This high-frequency current, or radio current as we often call it, changes in strength. It varies according to the human voice. When a low-pitched voice speaks into the transmitter, there are slow changes in the intensity of the radio current. When the voice is high-pitched, there are faster changes in the strength of the radio-frequency current. That’s why we say the radio current is “modulated” by the human voice.

The signal which radiates out from the transmitting antenna carries all the little variations in pitch and loudness of the human voice. When this signal reaches the distant antenna it establishes in that antenna circuit a current of high frequency which has just the same variations as did the current in the antenna at the sending station. The human voice isn’t there. It is not transmitted. It did its work at the sending station by modulating the radio-signal, 148“modulating the carrier current,” as we sometimes say. But there is speech significance hidden in the variations in strength of the received signal.
The signal sent out from the transmitting antenna carries all the subtle changes in pitch and volume of the human voice. When this signal hits the distant antenna, it creates a high-frequency current in that antenna's circuit, which mirrors the variations in the current from the sending station's antenna. The human voice isn't actually there; it doesn't get transmitted. It performs its role at the sending station by modulating the radio signal, 148 "modulating the carrier current," as we sometimes say. However, there is meaning in speech hidden within the changes in strength of the received signal.
If a telephone-receiver diaphragm can be made to vibrate in accordance with the variations in signal intensity then the air adjacent to that diaphragm will be set into vibration and these vibrations will be just like those which the human voice set up in the air molecules near the mouth of the speaker. All the different systems of receiving radio-telephone signals are merely different methods of getting a current which will affect the telephone receiver in conformity with the variations in signal strength. Getting such a current is called “detecting.” There are many different kinds of detectors but the vacuum tube is much to be preferred.
If a telephone receiver diaphragm can be made to vibrate according to changes in signal intensity, then the air next to that diaphragm will also vibrate, creating waves similar to those produced by the human voice near the speaker's mouth. All the various systems for receiving radio-telephone signals are simply different ways to get a current that will affect the telephone receiver in line with changes in signal strength. This process of obtaining such a current is called “detecting.” There are many types of detectors, but the vacuum tube is generally preferred.
The cheapest detector, but not the most sensitive, is the crystal. If you understand how the audion works as a detector you will have no difficulty in understanding the crystal detector.
The cheapest detector, though not the most sensitive, is the crystal. If you grasp how the audion functions as a detector, you'll easily understand the crystal detector.
The crystal detector consists of some mineral crystal and a fine-wire point, usually platinum. Crystals are peculiar things. Like everything else they are made of molecules and these molecules of atoms. The atoms are made of electrons grouped around nuclei which, in turn, are formed by close groupings of protons and electrons. The great difference between crystals and substances which are not crystalline, that is, substances which don’t have a special natural shape, is this: In crystals the molecules and atoms are all arranged in some orderly manner. 149In other substances, substances without special form, amorphous substances, as we call them, the molecules are just grouped together in a haphazard way.
The crystal detector is made up of a mineral crystal and a fine-wire point, usually made of platinum. Crystals are interesting objects. Like everything else, they are composed of molecules, which are made of atoms. Atoms consist of electrons grouped around nuclei, which are created by close clusters of protons and electrons. The key difference between crystals and non-crystalline substances, which don't have a specific natural shape, is this: In crystals, the molecules and atoms are all organized in a structured manner. 149 In other substances, those without a distinct shape, called amorphous substances, the molecules are simply thrown together randomly.

For some crystals we know very closely indeed how their molecules or rather their individual atoms are arranged. Sometime you may wish to read how this was found out by the use of X-rays.[6] Take the crystal of common salt for example. That is well known. Each molecule of salt is formed by an atom of sodium and one of chlorine. In a crystal of salt the molecules are grouped together so that a sodium atom always has chlorine atoms on every side of it, and the other way around, of course.
For some crystals, we really know how their molecules, or actually their individual atoms, are arranged. At some point, you might want to check out how this was discovered using X-rays.[6] Take common salt as an example. It's well known. Each molecule of salt is made up of one sodium atom and one chlorine atom. In a salt crystal, the molecules are organized so that a sodium atom is surrounded by chlorine atoms on all sides, and vice versa, of course.
Suppose you took a lot of wood dumb-bells and painted one of the balls of each dumb-bell black to stand for a sodium atom, leaving the other unpainted 150to stand for a chlorine atom. Now try to pile them up so that above and below each black ball, to the right and left of it, and also in front and behind it, there shall be a white ball. The pile which you would probably get would look like that of Fig. 69. I have omitted the gripping part of each dumbell because I don’t believe it is there. In my picture each circle represents the nucleus of an atom. I haven’t attempted to show the planetary electrons. Other crystals have more complex arrangements for piling up their molecules.
Imagine you have a bunch of wooden dumbbells and you paint one of the ends of each dumbbell black to represent a sodium atom, while leaving the other end unpainted to represent a chlorine atom. Now try to stack them up so that there’s a white end above and below each black end, as well as to the right, left, in front, and behind it. The arrangement you would probably create would look like Fig. 69. I've left out the handle part of each dumbbell because I don’t think it’s relevant. In my illustration, each circle stands for the nucleus of an atom. I haven't tried to depict the orbiting electrons. Other crystals have more complicated ways of organizing their molecules.
Now suppose we put two different kinds of substances close together, that is, make contact between them. How their electrons will behave will depend entirely upon what the atoms are and how they are piled up. Some very curious effects can be obtained.
Now imagine we place two different types of substances next to each other, making them touch. How their electrons behave will depend entirely on what the atoms are and how they are arranged. Some really interesting effects can occur.

The one which interests us at present is that across the contact points of some combinations of substances it is easier to get a stream of electrons to flow one way than the other. The contact doesn’t have the same resistance in the two directions. Usually also the resistance depends upon what voltage we are applying to force the electron stream across the point of contact.
The one that interests us right now is that at the contact points of certain combinations of substances, it's easier for a stream of electrons to flow in one direction compared to the other. The contact has different resistance depending on the direction. Typically, the resistance also varies based on the voltage we apply to push the electron stream across the contact point.
The one way to find out is to take the voltage-current characteristic of the combination. To do so we use the same general method as we did for the audion. 151And when we get through we plot another curve and call it, for example, a “platinum-galena characteristic.” Fig. 70 shows the set-up for making the measurements. There is a group of batteries arranged so that we can vary the e. m. f. applied across the contact point of the crystal and platinum. A voltmeter shows the value of this e. m. f. and an ammeter tells the strength of the electron stream. Each time we move the slider we get a new pair of values for volts and amperes. As a matter of fact we don’t get amperes or even mil-amperes; we get millionths of an ampere or “microamperes,” as we say. We can plot the pairs of values which we measure and make a curve like that of Fig. 71.
The only way to find out is to take the voltage-current characteristic of the combination. To do this, we use the same general method as we did for the audion. 151 When we finish, we plot another curve and call it, for example, a “platinum-galena characteristic.” Fig. 70 shows the setup for making the measurements. There’s a group of batteries arranged so that we can vary the e.m.f. applied across the contact point of the crystal and platinum. A voltmeter displays the value of this e.m.f., and an ammeter indicates the strength of the electron stream. Each time we move the slider, we obtain a new pair of values for volts and amperes. In fact, we don’t get amperes or even milliamperes; we get millionths of an ampere or “microamperes,” as we say. We can plot the pairs of values we measure and create a curve like the one in Fig. 71.

When the voltage across the contact is reversed, of course, the current reverses. Part of the curve looks something like the lower part of an audion characteristic.
When the voltage across the contact is reversed, naturally, the current reverses too. Part of the curve resembles the lower part of an audion characteristic.

Now connect this crystal in a receiving circuit as in Fig. 72. We use an antenna just as we did for the audion and we tune the antenna circuit to the frequency of the incoming signal. The receiving circuit is coupled to the antenna circuit and is tuned to the same frequency. Whatever voltage there may be across the condenser of this circuit is applied to the crystal detector. We haven’t put the telephone 152receiver in the circuit yet. I want to wait until you have seen what the crystal does when an alternating voltage is applied to it.
Now connect this crystal to a receiving circuit like in Fig. 72. We use an antenna just as we did for the audion, and we tune the antenna circuit to the frequency of the incoming signal. The receiving circuit is linked to the antenna circuit and is tuned to the same frequency. Any voltage present across the capacitor in this circuit is directed to the crystal detector. We haven't added the telephone 152receiver to the circuit yet. I want to hold off until you've seen how the crystal behaves when an alternating voltage is applied to it.

We can draw a familiar form of sketch as in Fig. 73 to show how the current in the crystal varies. You see that there flows through the crystal a current very much like that of Fig. 62a. And you know that such a current is really equivalent to two electron streams, one steady and the other alternating. The crystal detector gives us much the same sort of a current as does the vacuum tube detector of Fig. 54. The current isn’t anywhere near as large, however, for it is microamperes instead of mil-amperes.
We can create a familiar sketch like in Fig. 73 to show how the current in the crystal changes. You can see that a current flows through the crystal that's quite similar to the one in Fig. 62a. And as you know, this current is actually made up of two streams of electrons: one steady and one alternating. The crystal detector produces a current that's very similar to the vacuum tube detector in Fig. 54. However, the current is much smaller; it's measured in microamperes instead of milliamperes.
Our crystal detector produces the same results so far as giving us a steady component of current to send through a telephone receiver. So we can connect a receiver in series with the crystal as shown in Fig. 74. Because the receiver would offer a large impedance to the high-frequency current, that is, seriously impede and so reduce the high-frequency current, we connect a condenser around the receiver.
Our crystal detector gives us the same results when it comes to providing a steady current to send through a telephone receiver. So we can connect a receiver in series with the crystal as shown in Fig. 74. Since the receiver would present a high impedance to the high-frequency current, meaning it would significantly reduce the high-frequency current, we connect a capacitor around the receiver.

There is a simple crystal detector circuit. If the signal intensity varies then the current which passes through the receiver will vary. If these variations are caused by a human voice at the sending station the crystal will permit one to hear 153from the telephone receiver what the speaker is saying. That is just what the audion detector does very many times better.
There is a basic crystal detector circuit. If the signal strength changes, the current flowing through the receiver will also change. If these changes are triggered by a person's voice at the sending station, the crystal will allow you to hear 153from the phone what the speaker is saying. That's exactly what the audion detector does, and it does it much better.
In the letter on how to experiment you’ll find details as to the construction of a crystal-detector set. Excellent instructions for an inexpensive set are contained in Bull. No. 120 of the Bureau of Standards. A copy can be obtained by sending ten cents to the Commissioner of Public Documents, Washington, D. C.
In the letter about how to experiment, you'll find details on building a crystal-detector set. Great instructions for a budget-friendly set are included in Bull. No. 120 from the Bureau of Standards. You can get a copy by sending ten cents to the Commissioner of Public Documents, Washington, D. C.
154LETTER 16
THE HUMAN VOICE
Dear Sir:
Dear Sir:
The radio-telephone does not transmit the human voice. It reproduces near the ears of the listener similar motions of the air molecules and hence causes in the ears of the listener the same sensations of sound as if he were listening directly to the speaker. This reproduction takes place almost instantaneously so great is the speed with which the electrical effects travel outward from the sending antenna. If you wish to understand radio-telephony you must know something of the mechanism by which the voice is produced and something of the peculiar or characteristic properties of voice sounds.
The radio-telephone doesn't actually transmit the human voice. Instead, it creates movements in the air molecules close to the listener's ears, which produces the same sensations of sound as if the listener were directly hearing the speaker. This reproduction happens almost instantly because of the incredibly fast speed at which the electrical signals move from the sending antenna. To understand radio-telephony, you need to know a bit about how the voice is created and the unique properties of voice sounds.

The human voice is produced by a sort of organ pipe. Imagine a long pipe connected at one end to a pair of fire-bellows, and closed at the other end by two stretched sheets of rubber. Fig. 75 is a sketch of 155what I mean. Corresponding to the bellows there is the human diaphragm, the muscular membrane separating the thorax and abdomen, which expands or contracts as one breathes. Corresponding to the pipe is the windpipe. Corresponding to the two stretched pieces of rubber are the vocal cords, L and R, shown in cross section in Fig. 77. They are part of the larynx and do not show in Fig. 76 (Pl. viii) which shows the wind pipe and an outside view of the larynx.
The human voice is made by a type of organ pipe. Picture a long pipe connected at one end to a pair of bellows and closed at the other end by two stretched sheets of rubber. Fig. 75 is a sketch of 155 what I mean. Corresponding to the bellows is the human diaphragm, the muscle membrane that separates the chest and abdomen, which expands or contracts when we breathe. Corresponding to the pipe is the windpipe. Corresponding to the two stretched sheets of rubber are the vocal cords, L and R, shown in cross-section in Fig. 77. They are part of the larynx and do not appear in Fig. 76 (Pl. viii), which shows the windpipe and an external view of the larynx.

When the sides of the bellows are squeezed together the air molecules within are crowded closer together and the air is compressed. The greater the compression the greater, of course, is the pressure with which the enclosed air seeks to escape. That it can do only by lifting up, that is by blowing out, the two elastic strips which close the end of the pipe.
When the sides of the bellows are pressed together, the air molecules inside get pushed closer together, and the air is compressed. The more it's compressed, the higher the pressure with which the trapped air wants to escape. It can only do this by lifting up, meaning it blows out the two elastic strips that seal the end of the pipe.
The air pressure, therefore, rises until it is sufficient to push aside the elastic membranes or vocal cords and thus to permit some of the air to escape. It doesn’t force the membranes far apart, just enough to let some air out. But the moment some air has escaped there isn’t so much inside and the pressure is reduced just as in the case of an automobile tire from which you let the air escape. What is the result? The membranes fly back again and 156close the opening of the pipe. What got out, then, was just a little puff of air.
The air pressure builds up until it's strong enough to push apart the elastic membranes or vocal cords, allowing some air to escape. It doesn't separate the membranes very much, just enough to let a bit of air through. But once some air has escaped, there's less pressure inside, just like what happens when you let air out of a car tire. What happens next? The membranes snap back and 156 close the opening of the pipe. So, what escaped was just a small puff of air.
The bellows are working all the while, however, and so the space available for the remaining air soon again becomes so crowded with air molecules that the pressure is again sufficient to open the membranes. Another puff of air escapes.
The bellows are constantly operating, so the space left for the remaining air quickly becomes packed with air molecules, causing the pressure to rise enough to open the membranes again. Another puff of air escapes.
This happens over and over again while one is speaking or singing. Hundreds of times a second the vocal cords vibrate back and forth. The frequency with which they do so determines the note or pitch of the speaker’s voice.
This happens repeatedly while someone is talking or singing. Hundreds of times per second, the vocal cords vibrate back and forth. The speed at which they do this determines the note or pitch of the speaker's voice.
What determines the significance of the sounds which he utters? This is a most interesting question and one deserving of much more time than I propose to devote to it. To give you enough of an answer for your study of radio-telephony I am going to tell you first about vibrating strings for they are easier to picture than membranes like the vocal cords.
What determines the importance of the sounds he makes? This is a really interesting question and one that deserves a lot more time than I plan to spend on it. To give you a sufficient answer for your study of radio-telephony, I'm going to start by talking about vibrating strings because they’re easier to visualize than membranes like the vocal cords.
Suppose you have a stretched string, a piece of rubber band or a wire will do. You pluck it, that is pull it to one side. When you let go it flies back. Because it has inertia[7] it doesn’t stop when it gets to its old position but goes on through until it bows out almost as far on the other side.
Suppose you have a stretched string; a rubber band or a wire works too. You pluck it, which means you pull it to one side. When you let go, it snaps back. Because of inertia[7], it doesn’t stop when it returns to its original position but keeps going until it curves out almost as far on the other side.

Pl. VII.–Photographs of Vibrating Strings.
Fig. VII – Photos of Vibrating Strings.
157It took some work to pluck this string, not much perhaps; but all the work which you did in deforming it, goes to the string and becomes its energy, its ability to do work. This work it does in pushing the air molecules ahead of it as it vibrates. In this way it uses up its energy and so finally comes again to rest. Its vibrations “damp out,” as we say, that is die down. Each swing carries it a smaller distance away from its original position. We say that the “amplitude,” meaning the size, of its vibration decreases. The frequency does not. It takes just as long for a small-sized vibration as for the larger. Of course, for the vibration of large amplitude the string must move faster but it has to move farther so that the time required for a vibration is not changed.
157It took some effort to pluck this string, maybe not a lot, but all the effort you used to deform it contributes to the string's energy and its ability to work. This energy is spent by pushing air molecules in front of it as it vibrates. In this way, it gradually uses up its energy and eventually comes to a stop. Its vibrations “damp out,” as we say, meaning they die down. Each swing takes it a shorter distance from its original position. We say that the “amplitude,” which refers to the size, of its vibration decreases. The frequency stays the same. It takes just as long for a small vibration as it does for a larger one. Of course, for the larger amplitude vibration, the string must move faster, but it also has to move further, so the time needed for a vibration doesn’t change.
First the string crowds against each other the air molecules which are in its way and so leads to crowding further away, just as fast as these molecules can pass along the shove they are receiving. That takes place at the rate of about 1100 feet a second. When the string swings back it pushes away the molecules which are behind it and so lets those that were being crowded follow it. You know that they will. Air molecules will always go where there is the least crowding. Following the shove, therefore, there is a chance for the molecules to move back and even to occupy more room than they had originally.
First, the string pushes against the air molecules in its path, causing them to crowd together even more, as quickly as those molecules can pass on the push they’re getting. This happens at about 1,100 feet per second. When the string swings back, it pushes away the molecules behind it, allowing those that were being crowded to follow. You know they will. Air molecules always move to areas with less crowding. After the push, the molecules have a chance to spread out and occupy more space than they originally had.
The news of this travels out from the string just as fast as did the news of the crowding. As fast as molecules are able they move back and so make more room for their neighbors who are farther away; and these in turn move back.
The news of this spreads from the string just as quickly as the news of the crowding did. As fast as molecules can, they move back to create more space for their neighbors who are farther away, and those neighbors move back in turn.
Do you want a picture of it? Imagine a great crowd of people and at the center some one with authority. The crowd is the molecules of air and the 158one with authority is one of the molecules of the string which has energy. Whatever this molecule of the string says is repeated by each member of the crowd to his neighbor next farther away. First the string says: “Go back” and each molecule acts as soon as he gets the word. And then the string says: “Come on” and each molecule of air obeys as soon as the command reaches him. Over and over this happens, as many times a second as the string makes complete vibrations.
Do you want a picture of it? Imagine a huge crowd of people with someone important at the center. The crowd represents the air molecules, and the one in charge is one of the vibrating molecules in the string that has energy. Whatever this molecule of the string says gets passed along by each member of the crowd to the next person further away. First, the string says, “Go back,” and each molecule reacts as soon as it hears the command. Then the string says, “Come on,” and each air molecule responds as soon as it receives the order. This keeps happening, as many times per second as the string completes its vibrations.

If we should make a picture of the various positions of one of these air molecules much as we pictured “Brownie” in Letter 9 it would appear as in Fig. 78a where the central line represents the ordinary position of the molecule.
If we were to create an image of the different positions of one of these air molecules, similar to how we illustrated “Brownie” in Letter 9, it would look like Fig. 78a, where the central line shows the normal position of the molecule.
That’s exactly the picture also of the successive positions of an electron in a circuit which is “carrying an alternating current.” First it moves in one direction along the wire and then back in the opposite direction. The electron next to it does the same thing almost immediately for it does not take anywhere near as long for such an effect to pass through a crowd of electrons. If we make the string vibrate twice as fast, that is, have twice the frequency, the story of an adjacent particle of air will be as in Fig. 78b. Unless we tighten the string, however, we can’t make it vibrate 159as a whole and do it twice as fast. We can make it vibrate in two parts or even in more parts, as shown in Fig. 79 of Pl. VII. When it vibrates as a whole, its frequency is the lowest possible, the fundamental frequency as we say. When it vibrates in two parts each part of the string makes twice as many vibrations each second. So do the adjacent molecules of air and so does the eardrum of a listener.
That's exactly how an electron moves in a circuit that's "carrying an alternating current." First, it travels in one direction along the wire and then reverses direction. The electron next to it follows suit almost instantly since it doesn't take long for such a change to spread through a group of electrons. If we make the string vibrate twice as fast, meaning it has twice the frequency, a nearby air particle will behave as shown in Fig. 78b. However, unless we tighten the string, we can't make it vibrate as a whole at that increased speed. We can make it vibrate in two parts or even more parts, as illustrated in Fig. 79 of Pl. VII. When it vibrates as a whole, its frequency is at its lowest, known as the fundamental frequency. When it vibrates in two parts, each portion of the string vibrates twice as many times each second. The same goes for the nearby air molecules and the eardrum of a listener.
The result is that the listener hears a note of twice the frequency that he did when the string was vibrating as a whole. He says he hears the “octave” of the note he heard first. If the string vibrates in three parts and gives a note of three times the frequency the listener hears a note two octaves above the “fundamental note” of which the string is capable.
The result is that the listener hears a note with double the frequency compared to when the string was vibrating as a whole. He claims he hears the “octave” of the note he heard initially. If the string vibrates in three parts and produces a note with three times the frequency, the listener hears a note two octaves above the “fundamental note” that the string can produce.
It is entirely possible, however, for a string to vibrate simultaneously in a number of ways and so to give not only its fundamental note but several others at the same time. The photographs[8] of Fig. 80 of Pl. VII illustrate this possibility.
It is completely possible, though, for a string to vibrate in multiple ways at the same time, allowing it to produce not just its fundamental note, but several others as well. The photographs[8] of Fig. 80 of Pl. VII show this possibility.
What happens then to the molecules of air which are adjacent to the vibrating string? They must perform quite complex vibrations for they are called upon to move back and forth just as if there were several strings all trying to push them with different frequencies of vibration. Look again at the pictures, of Fig. 80 and see that each might just as well be 160the picture of several strings placed close together, each vibrating in a different way. Each of the strings has a different frequency of vibration and a different maximum amplitude, that is, greatest size of swing away from its straight position.
What happens to the air molecules next to the vibrating string? They have to move in pretty complex ways because they're being pushed back and forth as if there were several strings all trying to move them at different frequencies. Take another look at the images in Fig. 80 and notice that each could easily represent several strings placed close together, each vibrating differently. Every string has its own vibration frequency and a different maximum amplitude, which means the greatest distance it swings away from its rest position.

Suppose instead of a single string acting upon the adjacent molecules we had three strings. Suppose the first would make a nearby molecule move as in Fig. 81A, the second as in Fig. 81B, and the third as in Fig. 81C. It is quite evident that the molecule can satisfy all three if it will vibrate as in Fig. 81D.
Suppose instead of one string affecting the nearby molecules we had three strings. Imagine the first string makes a nearby molecule move like in Fig. 81A, the second like in Fig. 81B, and the third like in Fig. 81C. It's clear that the molecule can meet all three if it vibrates as shown in Fig. 81D.
161Now take it the other way around. Suppose we had a picture of the motion of a molecule and that it was not simple like those shown in Fig. 78 but was complex like that of Fig. 81D. We could say that this complex motion was made up of three parts, that is, had three component simple motions, each represented by one of the three other graphs of Fig. 81. That means we can resolve any complex vibratory motion into component motions which are simple.
161Now consider it the other way around. Imagine we have an image of a molecule's motion that isn’t straightforward like those in Fig. 78 but is complicated like what we see in Fig. 81D. We could say that this complex motion consists of three parts, meaning it has three simple component motions, each represented by one of the three other graphs in Fig. 81. This means we can break down any complex vibrational motion into simpler component motions.
It means more than that. It means that the vibrating string which makes the neighboring molecules of air behave as shown in Fig. 81D is really acting like three strings and is producing simultaneously three pure musical notes.
It means more than that. It means that the vibrating string that causes the nearby air molecules to behave as shown in Fig. 81D is actually acting like three strings and is simultaneously producing three pure musical notes.
Now suppose we had two different strings, say a piano string in the piano and a violin string on its proper mounting. Suppose we played both instruments and some musician told us they were in tune. What would he mean? He would mean that both strings vibrated with the same fundamental frequency.
Now, let's say we have two different strings, like a piano string inside the piano and a violin string on its proper setup. If we played both instruments and a musician said they were in tune, what would he mean? He would mean that both strings vibrated at the same fundamental frequency.
They differ, however, in the other notes which they produce at the same time that they produce their fundamental notes. That is, they differ in the frequencies and amplitudes of these other component vibrations or “overtones” which are going on at the same time as their fundamental vibrations. It is this difference which lets us tell at once which instrument is being played.
They do, however, differ in the other sounds they create simultaneously with their main notes. In other words, they vary in the frequencies and volumes of these additional vibrations, or “overtones,” that occur at the same time as their fundamental sounds. This difference allows us to instantly identify which instrument is being played.
That brings us to the main idea about musical sounds and about human speech. The pitch of any 162complex sound is the pitch of its fundamental or lowest sound; but the character of the complex sound depends upon all the overtones or “harmonics” which are being produced and upon their relative frequencies and amplitudes.
That brings us to the main idea about musical sounds and human speech. The pitch of any 162complex sound is determined by its fundamental or lowest tone; however, the quality of the complex sound depends on all the overtones or "harmonics" that are created, as well as their relative frequencies and amplitudes.

The organ pipe which ends in the larynx produces a very complex sound. I can’t show you how complex but I’ll show you in Fig. 82 the complicated motion of an air molecule which is vibrating as the result of being near an organ pipe. (Organ pipes differ–this is only one case.) You can see that 163there are a large number of pure notes of various intensities, that is, strengths, which go to make up the sound which a listener to this organ pipe would hear. The note from the human pipe is much more complex.
The organ pipe at the larynx creates a really complicated sound. I can’t show you how complex it is, but I’ll illustrate in Fig. 82 the intricate movement of an air molecule that vibrates because it’s close to an organ pipe. (There are different types of organ pipes—this is just one example.) You can see that 163 there are many pure notes of varying intensities, which means strengths, that contribute to the sound a listener would hear from this organ pipe. The note produced by the human voice is much more complicated.
When one speaks there are little puffs of air escaping from his larynx. The vocal cords vibrate as I explained. And the molecules of air near the larynx are set into very complex vibrations. These transmit their vibrations to other molecules until those in the mouth are reached. In the mouth, however, something very important happens.
When someone talks, small bursts of air come from their larynx. The vocal cords vibrate as I mentioned. The air molecules around the larynx start to vibrate in a very complex way. These vibrations pass to other molecules until they reach those in the mouth. However, something really important happens in the mouth.
Did you ever sing or howl down a rain barrel or into a long pipe or hallway and hear the sound? It sounds just about the same no matter who does it. The reason is that the long column of air in the pipe or barrel is set into vibration and vibrates according to its own ideas of how fast to do it. It has a “natural frequency” of its own. If in your voice there is a note of just that frequency it will respond beautifully. In fact it “resonates,” or sings back, when it hears this note.
Did you ever sing or howl into a rain barrel, a long pipe, or a hallway and hear the sound? It sounds pretty much the same no matter who does it. The reason is that the long column of air in the pipe or barrel starts to vibrate and vibrates based on its own rhythm. It has its own "natural frequency." If your voice hits a note that's just at that frequency, it will respond beautifully. In fact, it "resonates," or sings back, when it hears that note.
The net result is that it emphasizes this note so much that you don’t hear any of the other component notes of your voice–all you hear is the rain barrel. We say it reinforces one of the component notes of your voice and makes it louder.
The end result is that it highlights this note so much that you don't hear any of the other parts of your voice—all you hear is the rain barrel. We say it amplifies one of the parts of your voice and makes it louder.
That same thing happens in the mouth cavity of a speaker. The size and shape of the column of air in the mouth can be varied by the tongue and lip positions and so there are many different possibilities 164of resonance. Depending on lip and tongue, different frequencies of the complex sound which comes from the larynx are reinforced. You can see that for yourself from Fig. 83 which shows the tongue positions for three different vowel sounds. You can see also from Fig. 84, which shows the mouth positions for the different vowels, how the size and shape of the mouth cavity is changed to give different sounds. These figures are in Pl. VIII.
That same thing happens in the mouth of a speaker. The size and shape of the air column in the mouth can be changed by the positions of the tongue and lips, leading to many different resonance possibilities 164. Depending on the lip and tongue positions, various frequencies of the complex sound produced by the larynx get amplified. You can see this for yourself in Fig. 83, which shows the tongue positions for three different vowel sounds. Additionally, Fig. 84 illustrates how the mouth positions for the different vowels alter the size and shape of the mouth cavity to produce various sounds. These figures are in Pl. VIII.
The pitch of the note need not change as every singer knows. You can try that also for yourself by singing the vowel sound of “ahh” and then changing the shape of your mouth so as to give the sound “ah–aw–ow–ou.” The pitch of the note will not change because the fundamental stays the same. The speech significance of the sound, however, changes completely because the mouth cavity resonates to different ones of the higher notes which come from the larynx along with the fundamental note.
The pitch of the note doesn’t have to change, as every singer knows. You can test this for yourself by singing the vowel sound “ahh” and then adjusting the shape of your mouth to create the sounds “ah–aw–ow–ou.” The pitch will remain the same because the fundamental stays constant. However, the meaning of the sound changes completely, as the shape of your mouth resonates with different higher notes that come from the larynx along with the fundamental note.
Now you can see what is necessary for telephonic transmission. Each and every component note which enters into human speech must be transmitted and accurately reproduced by the receiver. More than that, all the proportions must be kept just the same as in the original spoken sound. We usually say that there must be reproduced in the air at the receiver exactly the same “wave form” as is present in the air at the transmitter. If that isn’t done the speech won’t be natural and one cannot recognize voices although he may understand pretty well. If 165there is too much “distortion” of the wave form, that is if the relative intensities of the component notes of the voice are too much altered, then there may even be a loss of intelligibility so that the listener cannot understand what is being said.
Now you can see what's needed for phone communication. Every single component of human speech has to be transmitted and accurately reproduced by the receiver. More importantly, all the proportions must be maintained exactly as they are in the original spoken sound. We often say that the “wave form” in the air at the receiver must match exactly with the one at the transmitter. If that doesn’t happen, the speech will sound unnatural, and even if someone can understand the words, they may not recognize the voices. If there’s too much “distortion” of the wave form—meaning the relative strengths of the different voice components are altered too much—then the listener might even lose the ability to understand what’s being said.
What particular notes are in the human voice depends partly on the person who is speaking. You know that the fundamental of a bass voice is lower than that of a soprano. Besides the fundamental, however, there are a lot of higher notes always present. This is particularly true when the spoken sound is a consonant, like “s” or “f” or “v.” The particular notes, which are present and are important, depend upon what sound one is saying.
What specific notes are in the human voice partly depends on who's speaking. You know that the fundamental frequency of a bass voice is lower than that of a soprano. In addition to the fundamental note, there are many higher notes always present. This is especially the case when the spoken sound is a consonant, like “s,” “f,” or “v.” The specific notes that are present and important depend on the sounds being made.
Usually, however, we find that if we can transmit and reproduce exactly all the notes which lie between a frequency of about 200 cycles a second and one of about 2000 cycles a second the reproduced speech will be quite natural and very intelligible. For singing and for transmitting instrumental music it is necessary to transmit and reproduce still higher notes.
Usually, though, we find that if we can transmit and reproduce exactly all the notes between a frequency of about 200 cycles per second and about 2000 cycles per second, the reproduced speech will sound pretty natural and be very clear. For singing and transmitting instrumental music, it's necessary to transmit and reproduce even higher notes.
What you will have to look out for, therefore, in a receiving set is that it does not cut out some of the high notes which are necessary to give the sound its naturalness. You will also have to make sure that your apparatus does not distort, that is, does not receive and reproduce some notes or “voice frequencies” more efficiently than it does some others which are equally necessary. For that reason when you buy a transformer or a telephone receiver it is 166well to ask for a characteristic curve of the apparatus which will show how the action varies as the frequency of the current is varied. The action or response should, of course, be practically the same at all the frequencies within the necessary part of the voice range.
What you need to watch for in a receiver is that it doesn’t cut out some of the high notes that are essential for making the sound feel natural. You also need to ensure that your equipment doesn’t distort, meaning it shouldn’t pick up and reproduce some notes or “voice frequencies” better than others that are equally important. For this reason, when you buy a transformer or a telephone receiver, it’s a good idea to ask for a characteristic curve of the device that shows how its performance changes as the frequency of the signal varies. The response should, ideally, be almost the same across all frequencies within the important part of the voice range.
Cf. Chap. VI of “The Realities of Modern Science.”
Cf. Chap. VI of “The Realities of Modern Science.”
My thanks are due to Professor D. C. Miller and to the Macmillan Company for permission to reproduce Figs. 79 to 83 inclusive from that interesting book, “The Science of Musical Sounds.”
My thanks go to Professor D. C. Miller and the Macmillan Company for allowing me to reproduce Figs. 79 to 83 from the fascinating book, “The Science of Musical Sounds.”
167LETTER 17
GRID BATTERIES AND GRID CONDENSERS FOR DETECTORS
Dear Son:
Dear Son:
You remember the audion characteristics which I used in Figs. 55, 56 and 57 of Letter 14 to show you how an incoming signal will affect the current in the plate circuit. Look again at these figures and you will see that these characteristics all had the same general shape but that they differed in their positions with reference to the “main streets” of “zero volts” on the grid and “zero mil-amperes” in the plate circuit. Changing the voltage of the B-battery in the plate circuit changed the position of the characteristic. We might say that changing the B-battery shifted the curve with reference to the axis of zero volts on the grid.
You remember the audio characteristics I used in Figs. 55, 56, and 57 of Letter 14 to demonstrate how an incoming signal affects the current in the plate circuit. Take another look at these figures, and you'll notice that while these characteristics all had a similar general shape, they were positioned differently in relation to the “main streets” of “zero volts” on the grid and “zero milliamperes” in the plate circuit. Adjusting the voltage of the B-battery in the plate circuit changed the position of the characteristic. We could say that changing the B-battery moved the curve in relation to the zero volts axis on the grid.


168In the case of the three characteristics which we are discussing the shift was made by changing the B-battery. Increasing B-voltage shifts characteristic to the left. It is possible, however, to produce such a shift by using a C-battery, that is, a battery in the grid circuit, which makes the grid permanently negative (or positive, depending upon how it is connected). This battery either helps or hinders the plate battery, and because of the strategic position of the grid right near the filament one volt applied to the grid produces as large an effect as would several volts in the plate battery. Usually, therefore, we arrange to shift the characteristic by using a C-battery.
168In the case of the three characteristics we're discussing, the shift was achieved by changing the B-battery. Increasing the B-voltage moves the characteristic to the left. However, you can also create this shift using a C-battery, which is connected in the grid circuit and makes the grid consistently negative (or positive, depending on how it's connected). This battery can either assist or hinder the plate battery, and because the grid is positioned so close to the filament, one volt applied to the grid has an effect similar to several volts in the plate battery. Therefore, we typically arrange to shift the characteristic by using a C-battery.

Suppose for example that we had an audion in the receiving circuit of Fig. 63 and that its characteristic under these conditions is given by Fig. 56. I’ve redrawn the figures to save your turning back. The audion will not act as a detector because an incoming signal will not change the average value of the current in the plate circuit. If, however, we connect a C-battery so as to make the grid negative, we can shift this characteristic so that the incoming signal will be detected. We have only to make the grid 169sufficiently negative to reduce the plate current to the value shown by the line oa in Fig. 85. Then the signal will be detected because, while it makes the plate current alternately larger and smaller than this value oa, it will result, on the average, in a higher value of the plate current.
Suppose, for example, that we had an audion in the receiving circuit of Fig. 63 and that its behavior under these conditions is shown in Fig. 56. I’ve redrawn the figures to save you from flipping back. The audion won’t function as a detector because an incoming signal won’t change the average value of the current in the plate circuit. However, if we connect a C-battery to make the grid negative, we can adjust this characteristic so that the incoming signal can be detected. We just need to make the grid 169 sufficiently negative to lower the plate current to the value indicated by the line oa in Fig. 85. Then the signal will be detected because, while it causes the plate current to fluctuate above and below this value oa, it will result, on average, in a higher value of the plate current.

You see that what we have done is to arrange the point on the audion characteristic about which the tube is to work by properly choosing the value of the grid voltage EC.
You can see that what we've done is set the operating point on the audion characteristic for the tube by correctly selecting the value of the grid voltage EC.
There is an important method of using an audion for a detector where we arrange to have the grid voltage change steadily, getting more and more negative all the time the signal is coming in. Before I tell how it is done I want to show you what will happen.
There’s a key method for using an audion as a detector by adjusting the grid voltage to gradually become more negative while the signal is being received. Before explaining how this works, I want to demonstrate what will happen.
Suppose we start with an audion detector, for which the characteristic is that of Fig. 56, but arranged as in Fig. 86 to give the grid any potential which we wish. The batteries and slide wire resistance which are connected in the grid circuit are already familiar to you.
Suppose we begin with an audio detector, which has the characteristics shown in Fig. 56, but set up like in Fig. 86 to provide the grid with any potential we want. The batteries and variable resistor connected in the grid circuit should already be familiar to you.
When the slider is set as shown in Fig. 86 the grid 170is at zero potential and we are at the point 1 of the characteristic shown in Fig. 87. Now imagine an incoming signal, as shown in that same figure, but suppose that as soon as the signal has stopped making the grid positive we shift the slider a little so that the C-battery makes the grid slightly negative. We have shifted the point on the characteristic about which the tube is being worked by the incoming signal from point 1 to point 2.
When the slider is set as shown in Fig. 86, the grid 170 is at zero potential, and we're at point 1 of the characteristic shown in Fig. 87. Now, picture an incoming signal, as shown in that same figure, but as soon as the signal stops making the grid positive, we slide the slider a bit so that the C-battery makes the grid slightly negative. We have moved the point on the characteristic about which the tube operates with the incoming signal from point 1 to point 2.

Every time the incoming signal makes one complete cycle of changes we shift the slider a little further and make the grid permanently more negative. You can see what happens. As the grid becomes more negative the current in the plate circuit decreases on the average. Finally, of course, the grid will become so negative that the current in the plate circuit will be reduced to zero. Under these conditions an incoming signal finally makes a large change in the plate current and hence in the current through the telephone.
Every time the incoming signal completes a full cycle of changes, we move the slider a bit further, making the grid more negative overall. You can observe what happens. As the grid gets more negative, the average current in the plate circuit decreases. Eventually, the grid will be so negative that the current in the plate circuit drops to zero. In this situation, an incoming signal will finally cause a significant change in the plate current, and consequently, in the current through the telephone.
The method of shifting a slider along, every time the incoming signal makes a complete cycle, is impossible to accomplish by hand if the frequency of the signal is high. It can be done automatically, however, no matter how high the frequency if we use a condenser in the grid circuit as shown in Fig. 88.
The method of moving a slider every time the incoming signal completes a cycle is impractical to do manually if the signal's frequency is high. However, it can be done automatically, regardless of how high the frequency, if we use a capacitor in the grid circuit as shown in Fig. 88.

When the incoming signal starts a stream of electrons through the coil L of Fig. 88 and draws them away from plate 1 of the condenser C it is also drawing electrons away from the 1 plate of the condenser CG which is in series with the grid. As electrons leave plate 1 of this condenser others rush away from the grid and enter plate 2. This means that the grid doesn’t have its ordinary number of electrons and so is positive.
When the incoming signal starts a flow of electrons through the coil L in Fig. 88 and pulls them away from plate 1 of the capacitor C, it also pulls electrons away from plate 1 of the capacitor CG, which is connected in series with the grid. As electrons exit plate 1 of this capacitor, others rapidly move from the grid to plate 2. This results in the grid having fewer electrons than usual, making it positive.
If the grid is positive it will be pleased to get electrons; and it can do so at once, for there are lots of electrons streaming past it on their way to the plate. While the grid is positive, therefore, there is a stream of electrons to it from the filament. Fig. 89 shows this current.
If the grid is positive, it will happily accept electrons, and it can do so immediately since there are plenty of electrons moving by on their way to the plate. While the grid is positive, there is a flow of electrons coming to it from the filament. Fig. 89 shows this current.
All this takes place during the first half-cycle of the incoming signal. During the next half-cycle electrons are sent into plate 1 of the condenser C and also into plate 1 of the grid condenser CG. As electrons are forced into plate 1 of the grid condenser those in plate 2 of that condenser have to leave and go back to the grid where they came from. That is all right, but while they were away the grid got some electrons from the filament to take their places. The result is that the grid has now too many electrons, that is, it is negatively charged.
All of this happens during the first half of the incoming signal cycle. In the next half-cycle, electrons are pushed into plate 1 of condenser C and also into plate 1 of the grid condenser CG. As electrons are forced into plate 1 of the grid condenser, those in plate 2 of that condenser have to leave and return to the grid where they originated. That's fine, but while they were gone, the grid took in some electrons from the filament to fill their spots. The result is that the grid now has too many electrons, meaning it is negatively charged.

An instant later the signal e. m. f. reverses and calls electrons away from plate 1 of the grid condenser. Again electrons from the grid rush into plate 2 and again the grid is left without its proper number and so is positive. Again it receives electrons from the filament. The result is still more electrons in the part of the grid circuit which is formed by the grid, the plate 2 of the grid condenser and the connecting wire. These electrons can’t get across the gap of the condenser CG and they can’t go back to the filament any other way. So there they are, trapped. Finally there are so many of these trapped electrons that the grid is so negative all the time as almost entirely to oppose the efforts of the plate to draw electrons away from the filament.
An instant later, the e.m.f. signal reverses and pulls electrons away from plate 1 of the grid capacitor. Again, electrons from the grid rush into plate 2, leaving the grid with too few electrons, making it positive. Once more, it receives electrons from the filament. As a result, there are even more electrons in the part of the grid circuit made up of the grid, plate 2 of the grid capacitor, and the connecting wire. These electrons can’t cross the gap of the capacitor CG and can’t return to the filament any other way. So they end up trapped. Eventually, there are so many of these trapped electrons that the grid becomes so negative that it nearly completely counteracts the plate's attempts to pull electrons from the filament.

Pl. VIII.–To Illustrate the Mechanism for the Production of the Human Voice.
Pl. VIII.–To Show How the Human Voice is Produced.
That’s the way to arrange an audion so that the incoming signal makes the largest possible change in plate current. We can tell if there is an incoming signal because it will “block” the tube, as we say. The plate-circuit current will be changed from its ordinary value to almost zero in the short time it takes for a few cycles of the incoming signal.
That’s how to set up an audio system so that the incoming signal causes the biggest change in plate current. We can tell if there’s an incoming signal because it will “block” the tube, as we say. The plate-circuit current will drop from its usual value to almost zero in the brief moment it takes for a few cycles of the incoming signal.
We can detect one signal that way, but only one because the first signal makes the grid permanently negative and blocks the tube so that there isn’t any current in the plate circuit and can’t be any. If we want to put the tube in condition to receive another signal we must allow these electrons, which originally came from the filament, to get out of their trapped position and go back to the filament.
We can pick up one signal that way, but only one, because the first signal makes the grid permanently negative and blocks the tube, so there isn’t any current in the plate circuit and there can’t be any. If we want to prepare the tube to receive another signal, we need to let these electrons, which originally came from the filament, escape their trapped position and return to the filament.

To do so we connect a very fine wire between plates 1 and 2 of the grid condenser. We call that wire a “grid-condenser leak” because it lets the electrons slip around past the gap. By using a very high resistance, we can make it so hard for the electrons to get around the gap that not many will do so while the signal is coming in. In that case we can leave the leak permanently across the condenser as shown in Fig. 90. Of course, the leak must offer so easy a path for the electrons that all the trapped 172electrons can get home between one incoming signal and the next.
To do this, we connect a very thin wire between plates 1 and 2 of the grid condenser. We call this wire a “grid-condenser leak” because it allows the electrons to flow around the gap. By using a very high resistance, we can make it difficult for the electrons to bypass the gap, so not many will do so while the signal is incoming. In that case, we can keep the leak permanently connected across the condenser as shown in Fig. 90. Of course, the leak must provide an easy enough pathway for the electrons so that all the trapped 172 electrons can return home between one signal and the next.
One way of making a high resistance like this is to draw a heavy pencil line on a piece of paper, or better a line with India ink, that is ink made of fine ground particles of carbon. The leak should have a very high resistance, usually one or two million ohms if the condenser is about 0.002 microfarad. If it has a million ohms we say it has a “megohm” of resistance.
One way to create a high resistance like this is to draw a thick pencil line on a piece of paper, or even better, a line with India ink, which is made from finely ground carbon particles. The leak should have a very high resistance, typically one or two million ohms if the capacitor is around 0.002 microfarads. If it has a million ohms, we say it has a “megohm” of resistance.
This method of detecting with a leaky grid-condenser and an audion is very efficient so far as telling the listener whether or not a signal is coming into his set. It is widely used in receiving radio-telephone signals although it is best adapted to receiving the telegraph signals from a spark set.
This method of detecting using a leaky grid-condenser and an audion is really effective for letting the listener know if a signal is coming into their equipment. It's commonly used for receiving radio-telephone signals, although it's best suited for receiving telegraph signals from a spark set.
I don’t propose to stop to tell you how a spark-set transmitter works. It is sufficient to say that when the key is depressed the set sends out radio signals at the rate usually of 1000 signals a second. Every time a signal reaches the receiving station the current in the telephone receiver is sudden reduced; and in the time between signals the leak across the grid condenser brings the tube back to a condition where it can receive the next signal. While the sending key is depressed the current in the receiver is decreasing and increasing once for every signal which is being transmitted. For each decrease and increase in current the diaphragm of the telephone receiver makes one vibration. What the listener then hears is a musical note with a frequency corresponding 173to that number of vibrations a second, that is, a note with a frequency of one thousand cycles per second. He hears a note of frequency about that of two octaves above middle C on the piano. There are usually other notes present at the same time and the sound is not like that of any musical instrument.
I won't take the time to explain how a spark-set transmitter works. It's enough to say that when you press the key, the set sends out radio signals at a rate of usually 1000 signals per second. Every time a signal reaches the receiving station, the current in the telephone receiver suddenly drops; and in the time between signals, the leak across the grid condenser brings the tube back to a state where it can receive the next signal. While the sending key is pressed, the current in the receiver decreases and increases once for each signal that’s transmitted. Each decrease and increase in current makes the diaphragm of the telephone receiver vibrate once. What the listener hears is a musical note with a frequency corresponding 173 to that number of vibrations per second, specifically a note with a frequency of one thousand cycles per second. He hears a note with a frequency about two octaves above middle C on the piano. There are usually other notes present at the same time, and the sound is different from that of any musical instrument.

In Fig. 91 I have drawn a sketch to show the e. m. f. which the signals from a spark set impress on the grid of a detector and to show how the plate current varies if there is a condenser and leak in the grid circuit. I have only shown three signals in succession. If the operator sends at the rate of about twenty words a minute a dot is formed by about sixty of these signals in succession.
In Fig. 91, I've created a sketch to illustrate the e.m.f. that signals from a spark set apply to the grid of a detector and to demonstrate how the plate current changes when there's a capacitor and a leak in the grid circuit. I've only shown three signals in a row. If the operator sends at a speed of about twenty words per minute, a dot is formed by around sixty of these signals in sequence.
The frequency of the alternations in one of the little signals will depend upon the wave length which the sending operator is using. If he uses the wave length of 600 meters, as ship stations do, he will send with a radio frequency of 500,000 cycles a second. Since the signals are at the rate of a thousand a second each one is made up of 500 complete cycles of the current in the antenna. It would be impracticable therefore to show you a complete picture of the signal from a spark set. I have, however, lettered the figure quite completely to cover what I have just told you.
The frequency of the changes in one of the little signals will depend on the wavelength that the sending operator is using. If he uses a wavelength of 600 meters, like ship stations do, he will transmit with a radio frequency of 500,000 cycles per second. Since the signals occur at a rate of a thousand per second, each one consists of 500 complete cycles of the current in the antenna. It would therefore be impractical to show you a complete picture of the signal from a spark set. However, I have labeled the figure thoroughly to explain what I've just described.
If the grid-condenser and its leak are so chosen as to work well for signals from a 500-cycle spark set they will also work well for the notes in human speech which are about 1000 cycles a second in frequency. The detecting circuit will not, however, work so well for the other notes which are in the human voice and are necessary to speech. For example, if notes of about 2000 cycles a second are involved in the speech which is being transmitted, 175the leak across the condenser will not work fast enough. On the other hand, for the very lowest notes in the voice the leak will work too fast and such variations in the signal current will not be detected as efficiently as are those of 1000 cycles a second.
If the grid condenser and its leak are selected to work well with signals from a 500-cycle spark set, they will also function effectively for the notes in human speech, which are around 1000 cycles per second in frequency. However, the detecting circuit won't perform as well for the other notes in the human voice that are essential for speech. For instance, if notes around 2000 cycles per second are part of the speech being transmitted, 175 the leak across the condenser won't respond quickly enough. Conversely, for the very low notes in the voice, the leak will respond too quickly, and such variations in the signal current won't be detected as efficiently as those at 1000 cycles per second.
You can see that there is always a little favoritism on the part of the grid-condenser detector. It doesn’t exactly reproduce the variations in intensity of the radio signal which were made at the sending station. It distorts a little. As amateurs we usually forgive it that distortion because it is so efficient. It makes so large a change in the current through the telephone when it receives a signal that we can use it to receive much weaker signals, that is, signals from smaller or more distant sending stations, than we can receive with the arrangement described in Letter 14.
You can see that there's always a bit of favoritism from the grid-condenser detector. It doesn’t perfectly replicate the changes in intensity of the radio signal that were made at the sending station. It has some distortion. As hobbyists, we usually overlook that distortion because it's so effective. It significantly changes the current through the phone when it picks up a signal, allowing us to receive much weaker signals, meaning signals from smaller or more distant sending stations, than we can receive with the setup described in Letter 14.
176LETTER 18
Amplifiers and regenerative circuit
My Dear Receiver:
My Dear Receiver:
There is one way of making an audion even more efficient as a detector than the method described in the last letter. And that is to make it talk to itself.
There’s one way to make an audion even more effective as a detector than the method described in the last letter. And that’s to have it communicate with itself.
Suppose we arrange a receiving circuit as in Fig. 92. It is exactly like that of Fig. 90 of the previous letter except for the fact that the current in the plate circuit passes through a little coil, LT, which is placed near the coil L and so can induce in it an e. m. f. which will correspond in intensity and wave form to the current in the plate circuit.
Suppose we set up a receiving circuit as shown in Fig. 92. It’s exactly like the one in Fig. 90 from the previous letter, except that the current in the plate circuit goes through a small coil, LT, which is positioned close to the coil L and can therefore induce an e.m.f. that matches the intensity and waveform of the current in the plate circuit.
If we should take out the grid condenser and its leak this circuit would be like that of Fig. 54 in Letter 13 which we used for a generator of high-frequency alternating currents. You remember how that circuit operates. A small effect in the grid circuit produces a large effect in the plate circuit. Because the plate circuit is coupled to the grid circuit the grid is again affected and so there is a still larger effect in the plate circuit. And so on, until the current in the plate circuit is swinging from zero to its maximum possible value.
If we were to remove the grid condenser and its leak, this circuit would be similar to the one shown in Fig. 54 in Letter 13, which we used for generating high-frequency alternating currents. You remember how that circuit works. A small change in the grid circuit causes a significant change in the plate circuit. Since the plate circuit is connected to the grid circuit, the grid is affected again, leading to an even greater change in the plate circuit. This continues until the current in the plate circuit fluctuates from zero to its maximum possible value.
What happens depends upon how closely the coils L and LT are coupled, that is, upon how much the 177 changing current in one can affect the other. If they are turned at right angles to each other, so that there is no possible mutual effect we say there is “zero coupling.”
What happens depends on how closely the coils L and LT are coupled, meaning how much the 177 changing current in one can influence the other. If they are positioned at right angles to each other, so that there’s no chance of mutual interaction, we say there is “zero coupling.”
Start with the coils at right angles to each other and turn LT so as to bring its windings more and more parallel to those of L. If we want LT to have a large effect on L its windings should be parallel and also in the same direction just as they were in Fig. 54 of Letter 13 to which we just referred. As we approach nearer to that position the current in LT induces more and more e. m. f. in coil L. For some position of the two coils, and the actual position depends on the tube we are using, there will be enough effect from the plate circuit upon the grid circuit so that there will be continuous oscillations.
Start with the coils at right angles to each other and turn LT to make its windings more and more parallel to those of L. If we want LT to have a significant effect on L, its windings should be parallel and also facing the same direction, just like they were in Fig. 54 of Letter 13 that we just mentioned. As we get closer to that position, the current in LT induces increasingly more e.m.f. in coil L. For a specific positioning of the two coils, which depends on the tube we are using, there will be enough influence from the plate circuit on the grid circuit to produce continuous oscillations.

We want to stop just short of this position. There will then be no continuous oscillations; but if any changes do take place in the plate current they will affect the grid. And these changes in the grid voltage will result in still larger changes in the plate current.
We want to halt just before reaching this point. This way, there won't be any continuous oscillations; however, if there are any changes in the plate current, they will impact the grid. And these changes in the grid voltage will lead to even bigger changes in the plate current.
Now suppose that there is coming into the detector circuit of Fig. 92 a radio signal with, speech significance. 178The current in the plate circuit varies accordingly. So does the current in coil LT which is in the plate circuit. But this current induces an e. m. f. in coil L and this adds to the e. m. f. of the incoming signal so as to make a greater variation in the plate current. This goes on as long as there is an incoming signal. Because the plate circuit is coupled to the grid circuit the result is a larger e. m. f. in the grid circuit than the incoming signal could set up all by itself.
Now, imagine that a radio signal with speech content is entering the detector circuit in Fig. 92. 178 The current in the plate circuit changes accordingly. The current in coil LT, which is in the plate circuit, also changes. This current generates an electromotive force (e.m.f.) in coil L, which combines with the e.m.f. of the incoming signal, resulting in a greater variation in the plate current. This continues as long as there's an incoming signal. Since the plate circuit is linked to the grid circuit, it leads to a larger e.m.f. in the grid circuit than the incoming signal could create on its own.
You see now why I said the tube talked to itself. It repeats to itself whatever it receives. It has a greater strength of signal to detect than if it didn’t repeat. Of course, it detects also just as I told you in the preceding letter.
You can see now why I said
In adjusting the coupling of the two coils of Fig. 92 we stopped short of allowing the tube circuit to oscillate and to generate a high frequency. If we had gone on increasing the coupling we should have reached a position where steady oscillations would begin. Usually this is marked by a little click in the receiver. The reason is that when the tube oscillates the average current in the plate circuit is not the same as the steady current which ordinarily flows between filament and plate. There is a sudden change, therefore, in the average current in the plate circuit when the tube starts to oscillate. You remember that what affects the receiver is the average current in the plate circuit. So the receiver diaphragm suddenly changes position as the tube starts to oscillate and a listener hears a little click.
In adjusting the coupling of the two coils in Fig. 92, we stopped before allowing the tube circuit to oscillate and generate a high frequency. If we had continued to increase the coupling, we would have reached a point where steady oscillations would start. This is usually marked by a brief click in the receiver. The reason is that when the tube oscillates, the average current in the plate circuit differs from the steady current that usually flows between the filament and the plate. So, when the tube begins to oscillate, there’s a sudden change in the average current in the plate circuit. As you know, it’s the average current in the plate circuit that affects the receiver. Thus, the receiver diaphragm suddenly shifts position when the tube starts to oscillate, causing a listener to hear a small click.
179The frequency of the alternating current which the tube produces depends upon the tuned circuit formed by L and C. Suppose that this frequency is not the same as that to which the receiving antenna is tuned. What will happen?
179The frequency of the alternating current produced by the tube depends on the tuned circuit made up of L and C. If this frequency is different from the one the receiving antenna is tuned to, what will happen?
There will be impressed on the grid of the tube two alternating e. m. f.’s, one due to the tube’s own oscillations and the other incoming from the distant transmitting station. The two e. m. f. ’s are both active at once so that at each instant the e. m. f. of the grid is really the sum of these two e. m. f.’s. Suppose at some instant both e. m. f.’s are acting to make the grid positive. A little later one of them will be trying to make the grid negative while the other is still trying to make it positive. And later still when the first e. m. f. is ready again to make the grid positive the second will be trying to make it negative.
There will be two alternating electromotive forces (emfs) impressed on the grid of the tube, one generated by the tube's own oscillations and the other coming from the distant transmitting station. Both emfs are active at the same time, so at any given moment, the emf of the grid is actually the sum of these two emfs. Imagine that at one moment, both emfs are pushing to make the grid positive. A little later, one of them will be trying to make the grid negative while the other continues to push it positive. Even later, when the first emf is ready to make the grid positive again, the second one will be trying to make it negative.
It’s like two men walking along together but with different lengths of step. Even if they start together with their left feet they are soon so completely out of step that one is putting down his right foot while the other is putting down his left. A little later, but just for an instant, they are in step again. And so it goes. They are in step for a moment and then completely out of step. Suppose one of them makes ten steps in the time that the other makes nine. In that time they will be once in step and once completely out of step. If one makes ten steps while the other does eight this will happen twice.
It’s like two guys walking together but with different strides. Even if they start off side by side with their left feet, they quickly get so out of sync that one is stepping down his right foot while the other is stepping down his left. A little later, just for a moment, they might be in sync again. And it keeps happening like that. They’re in sync for a moment and then totally out of sync. If one takes ten steps when the other takes nine, they’ll be in sync once and out of sync once during that time. If one takes ten steps while the other takes eight, that’ll happen twice.
The same thing happens in the audion detector 180circuit when two e. m. f.’s which differ slightly in frequency are simultaneously impressed on the grid. If one e. m. f. passes through ten complete cycles while the other is making eight cycles, then during that time they will twice be exactly in step, that is, “in phase” as we say. Twice in that time they will be exactly out of step, that is, exactly “opposite in phase.” Twice in that time the two e. m. f.’s will aid each other in their effects on the grid and twice they will exactly oppose. Unless they are equal in amplitude there will still be a net e. m. f. even when they are exactly opposed. The result of all this is that the average current in the plate circuit of the detector will alternately increase and decrease twice during this time.
The same thing happens in the audion detector 180 circuit when two e.m.f.s that differ slightly in frequency are applied to the grid at the same time. If one e.m.f. goes through ten complete cycles while the other completes eight cycles, then during that time they will be in sync, or “in phase,” twice. They will also be out of sync, or “opposite in phase,” twice during that period. Twice, the two e.m.f.s will work together on the grid, and twice they will completely cancel each other out. Unless they have the same amplitude, there will still be a net e.m.f. even when they are completely opposed. As a result, the average current in the plate circuit of the detector will alternately increase and decrease twice during this time.
The listener will then hear a note of a frequency equal to the difference between the frequencies of the two e. m. f.’s which are being simultaneously impressed on the grid of the detector. Suppose the incoming signal has a frequency of 100,000 cycles a second but that the detector tube is oscillating in its own circuit at the rate of 99,000 cycles per second, then the listener will hear a note of 1000 cycles per second. One thousand times each second the two e. m. f.’s will be exactly in phase and one thousand times each second they will be exactly opposite in phase. The voltage applied to the grid will be a maximum one thousand times a second and alternately a minimum. We can think of it, then, as if there were impressed on the grid of the detector a high-frequency signal which varied in intensity one thousand times a 181second. This we know will produce a corresponding variation in the current through the telephone receiver and thus give rise to a musical note of about two octaves above middle C on the piano.
The listener will then hear a tone at a frequency equal to the difference between the frequencies of the two e.m.f.s being simultaneously applied to the grid of the detector. If the incoming signal has a frequency of 100,000 cycles per second and the detector tube is oscillating in its own circuit at 99,000 cycles per second, the listener will hear a tone at 1,000 cycles per second. One thousand times each second, the two e.m.f.s will be perfectly in phase, and one thousand times each second, they will be perfectly out of phase. The voltage applied to the grid will peak 1,000 times a second and then alternate to a minimum. We can think of it as if a high-frequency signal is being applied to the grid of the detector that varies in intensity 1,000 times a 181second. This will produce a corresponding variation in the current through the telephone receiver, resulting in a musical note about two octaves above middle C on the piano.
This circuit of Fig. 92 will let us detect signals which are not varying in intensity. And consequently this is the method which we use to detect the telegraph signals which are sent out by such a “continuous wave transmitter” as I showed you at the end of Letter 13.
This circuit in Fig. 92 will allow us to detect signals that don’t change in intensity. Therefore, this is the method we use to pick up the telegraph signals sent out by a "continuous wave transmitter," like I mentioned at the end of Letter 13.
When the key of a C-W transmitter is depressed there is set up in the distant receiving-antenna an alternating current. This current doesn’t vary in strength. It is there as long as the sender has his key down. Because, however, of the effect which I described above there will be an audible note from the telephone receiver if the detector tube is oscillating at a frequency within two or three thousand cycles of that of the transmitting station.
When the key of a C-W transmitter is pressed, an alternating current is generated in the distant receiving antenna. This current remains constant in strength as long as the sender keeps the key pressed. However, due to the effect I mentioned earlier, there will be an audible tone in the telephone receiver if the detector tube is oscillating at a frequency within two or three thousand cycles of that of the transmitting station.
This method of receiving continuous wave signals is called the “heterodyne” method. The name comes from two Greek words, “dyne” meaning “force” and the other part meaning “different.” We receive by combining two different electron-moving-forces, one produced by the distant sending-station and the other produced locally at the receiving station. Neither by itself will produce any sound, except a click when it starts. Both together produce a musical sound in the telephone receiver; and the frequency of that note is the difference of the two frequencies.
This way of receiving continuous wave signals is called the “heterodyne” method. The name comes from two Greek words, “dyne” meaning “force” and the other part meaning “different.” We achieve this by combining two different electronic forces, one generated by the remote sending station and the other generated locally at the receiving station. Alone, neither will create any sound except a click when it starts. Together, they produce a musical sound in the phone receiver, and the frequency of that note is the difference between the two frequencies.
182There are a number of words used to describe this circuit with some of which you should be familiar. It is sometimes called a “feed-back” circuit because part of the output of the audion is fed back into its input side. More generally it is known as the “regenerative circuit” because the tube keeps on generating an alternating current. The little coil which is used to feed back into the grid circuit some of the effects from the plate circuit is sometimes called a “tickler” coil.
182There are several terms used to describe this circuit, some of which you might already know. It's sometimes referred to as a “feedback” circuit because part of the output from the audion is sent back into its input. More broadly, it’s known as the “regenerative circuit” because the tube continues to generate alternating current. The small coil used to feedback some of the effects from the plate circuit into the grid circuit is sometimes called a “tickler” coil.
It is not necessary to use a grid condenser in a feed-back circuit but it is perhaps the usual method of detecting where the regenerative circuit is used. The whole value of the regenerative circuit so far as receiving is concerned is in the high efficiency which it permits. One tube can do the work of two.
It’s not mandatory to use a grid condenser in a feedback circuit, but it’s probably the common way to detect when the regenerative circuit is in use. The main benefit of the regenerative circuit for receiving signals is the high efficiency it allows. One tube can perform the job of two.
We can get just as loud signals by using another tube instead of making one do all the work. In the regenerative circuit the tube is performing two jobs at once. It is detecting but it is also amplifying.[9] By “amplifying” we mean making an e. m. f. larger than it is without changing the shape of its picture, that is without changing its “wave form.”
We can get just as strong signals by using a different tube instead of making one handle everything. In the regenerative circuit, the tube is doing two things at once. It's both detecting and amplifying.[9] By “amplifying,” we mean increasing an emf without altering its shape, meaning without changing its “waveform.”
To show just what we mean by amplifying we must look again at the audion and see how it acts. You know that a change in the grid potential makes a change in the plate current. Let us arrange an audion in a circuit which will tell us a little more of what happens. Fig. 93 shows the circuit.
To clarify what we mean by amplifying, we need to take another look at the audion and see how it works. You know that altering the grid potential changes the plate current. Let’s set up an audion in a circuit that will provide more insight into what happens. Fig. 93 shows the circuit.
183This circuit is the same as we used to find the audion characteristic except that there is a clip for varying the number of batteries in the plate circuit and a voltmeter for measuring their e. m. f. We start with the grid at zero potential and the usual number of batteries in the plate circuit. The voltmeter tells us the e. m. f. We read the ammeter in the plate circuit and note what that current is. Then we shift the slider in the grid circuit so as to give the grid a small potential. The current in the plate circuit changes. We can now move the clip on the B-batteries so as to bring the current in this circuit back to its original value. Of course, if we make the grid positive we move the clip so as to use fewer cells of the B-battery. On the other hand if we make the grid negative we shall need more e. m. f. in the plate circuit. In either case we shall find that we need to make a very much larger change in the voltage of the plate circuit than we have made in the voltage of the grid circuit.
183This circuit is the same one we used to find the audion characteristic, except now there’s a clip for adjusting the number of batteries in the plate circuit and a voltmeter to measure their e.m.f. We start with the grid at zero potential and the usual number of batteries in the plate circuit. The voltmeter shows us the e.m.f. We read the ammeter in the plate circuit and note the current. Then we adjust the slider in the grid circuit to give the grid a small potential. The current in the plate circuit changes. We can now move the clip on the B-batteries to bring the current in this circuit back to its original value. If we make the grid positive, we adjust the clip to use fewer cells of the B-battery. Conversely, if we make the grid negative, we’ll need more e.m.f. in the plate circuit. In either case, we will find that we need to change the voltage of the plate circuit by a much larger amount than we did with the voltage of the grid circuit.

Usually we perform the experiment a little differently so as to get more accurate results. We read the voltmeter in the plate circuit and the ammeter in that circuit. Then we change the number of batteries which we are using in the plate circuit. That changes 184the plate current. The next step is to shift the slider in the grid circuit until we have again the original value of current in the plate circuit. Suppose that the tube is ordinarily run with a plate voltage of 40 volts and we start with that e. m. f. on the plate. Suppose that we now make it 50 volts and then vary the position of the slider in the grid circuit until the ammeter reads as it did at the start. Next we read the voltage impressed on the grid by reading the voltmeter in the grid circuit. Suppose it reads 2 volts. What does that mean?
Usually, we conduct the experiment a bit differently to achieve more accurate results. We check the voltmeter in the plate circuit and the ammeter in that circuit. Then, we adjust the number of batteries we're using in the plate circuit, which changes 184 the plate current. The next step is to move the slider in the grid circuit until we get back to the original current value in the plate circuit. Let's say the tube typically operates with a plate voltage of 40 volts and we start with that e.m.f. on the plate. Now, suppose we change it to 50 volts and then adjust the slider in the grid circuit until the ammeter shows the same reading as it did initially. After that, we check the voltage applied to the grid by looking at the voltmeter in the grid circuit. If it reads 2 volts, what does that indicate?

It means that two volts in the grid circuit have the same effect on the plate current as ten volts in the plate circuit. If we apply a volt to the grid circuit we get five times as large an effect in the plate circuit as we would if the volt were applied there. We get a greater effect, the effect of more volts, by applying our voltage to the grid. We say that the tube acts as an “amplifier of voltage” because we can get a larger effect than the number of volts which we apply would ordinarily entitle us to.
It means that two volts in the grid circuit create the same impact on the plate current as ten volts in the plate circuit. If we apply one volt to the grid circuit, we see five times the effect in the plate circuit compared to applying that volt directly there. We achieve a greater effect, similar to having more volts, by directing our voltage to the grid. We refer to the tube as a “voltage amplifier” because it allows us to generate a larger effect than what the number of volts we apply would typically result in.
Now let’s take a simple case of the use of an audion as an amplifier. Suppose we have a receiving circuit with which we find that the signals are 185not easily understood because they are too weak. Let this be the receiving circuit of Fig. 88 which I am reproducing here as part of Fig. 94.
Now, let’s look at a straightforward example of using an audion as an amplifier. Imagine we have a receiving circuit where the signals are hard to understand because they're too weak. Let’s refer to this receiving circuit shown in Fig. 88, which I’m including here as part of Fig. 94.
We have replaced the telephone receiver by a “transformer.” A transformer is two coils, or windings, coupled together. An alternating current in one will give rise to an alternating current in the other. You are already familiar with the idea but this is our first use of the word. Usually we call the first coil, that is the one through which the alternating current flows, the “primary” and the second coil, in which a current is induced, the “secondary.”
We have swapped out the telephone receiver for a “transformer.” A transformer consists of two coils, or windings, that are connected together. An alternating current in one coil produces an alternating current in the other. You’re already familiar with this concept, but this is our first time using the term. Typically, we refer to the first coil, through which the alternating current flows, as the “primary,” and the second coil, where a current is induced, as the “secondary.”
The secondary of this transformer is connected to the grid circuit of another vacuum tube, to the plate circuit of which is connected another transformer and the telephone receiver. The result is a detector and “one stage of amplification.”
The secondary of this transformer is connected to the grid circuit of another vacuum tube, with another transformer connected to its plate circuit, along with the telephone receiver. The result is a detector and “one stage of amplification.”
The primary of the first transformer, so we shall suppose, has in it the same current as would have been in the telephone. This alternating current induces in the secondary an e. m. f. which has the same variations as this current. This e. m. f. acts on the grid of the second tube, that is on the amplifier. Because the audion amplifies, the e. m. f. acting on the telephone receiver is larger than it would have been without the use of this audion. And hence there is a greater response on the part of its diaphragm and a louder sound.
The primary of the first transformer, as we will assume, carries the same current that would have been in the telephone. This alternating current generates an e.m.f. in the secondary that follows the same fluctuations as this current. This e.m.f. influences the grid of the second tube, which is the amplifier. Since the audion amplifies, the e.m.f. affecting the telephone receiver is stronger than it would have been without this audion. As a result, there's a greater movement in its diaphragm, producing a louder sound.
In setting up such a circuit as this there are several things to watch. For some of these you will 186have to rely on the dealer from whom you buy your supplies and for the others upon yourself. But it will take another letter to tell you of the proper precautions in using an audion as an amplifier.
In setting up a circuit like this, there are several things to pay attention to. For some of these, you will 186need to depend on the dealer from whom you buy your supplies, and for others, you’ll need to rely on yourself. But it will take another letter to inform you about the proper precautions when using an audion as an amplifier.

In the circuit which I have just described an audion is used to amplify the current which comes from the detector before it reaches the telephone receiver. Sometimes we use an audion to amplify the e. m. f. of the signal before impressing it upon the grid of the detector. Fig. 95 shows a circuit for doing that. In the case of Fig. 94 we are amplifying the audio-frequency current. In that of Fig. 95 it is the radio-frequency effect which is amplified. The feed-back or regenerative circuit of Fig. 92 is a one-tube circuit for doing the same thing as is done with two tubes in Fig 95.
In the circuit I just described, an audion is used to boost the current coming from the detector before it reaches the telephone receiver. Sometimes, we use an audion to amplify the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the signal before sending it to the grid of the detector. Fig. 95 shows a circuit designed for that purpose. In the case of Fig. 94, we’re amplifying the audio frequency current. In Fig. 95, it’s the radio frequency effect that gets amplified. The feedback or regenerative circuit in Fig. 92 is a single-tube circuit that accomplishes the same task as the two-tube setup in Fig. 95.
There is always some amplification taking place in an audion detector but the regenerative circuit amplifies over and over again until the signal is as large as the tube can detect.
There’s always some amplification happening in an audion detector, but the regenerative circuit keeps amplifying the signal repeatedly until it’s as strong as the tube can detect.
187LETTER 19
THE AUDION AMPLIFIER AND ITS CONNECTIONS
Dear Son:
Dear Son:
In our use of the audion we form three circuits. The first or A-circuit includes the filament. The B-circuit includes the part of the tube between filament and plate. The C-circuit includes the part between filament and grid. We sometimes speak of the C-circuit as the “input” circuit and the B-circuit as the “output” circuit of the tube. This is because we can put into the grid-filament terminals an e. m. f. and obtain from the plate-filament circuit an effect in the form of a change of current.
In using the audion, we create three circuits. The first, or A-circuit, includes the filament. The B-circuit covers the section of the tube between the filament and the plate. The C-circuit refers to the part between the filament and the grid. We often refer to the C-circuit as the "input" circuit and the B-circuit as the "output" circuit of the tube. This is because we can apply an electromotive force (e.m.f.) to the grid-filament terminals and get a change in current from the plate-filament circuit.

Suppose we had concealed in a box the audion and circuit of Fig. 96 and that only the terminals which are shown came through the box. We are given a battery and an ammeter and asked to find out all we can as to what is between the terminals F and G. We connect the battery and ammeter in series with these terminals. No current flows through the circuit. We reverse the battery but no current flows in the opposite direction. Then we reason that there is an open-circuit between F and G.
Suppose we had hidden in a box the audio device and circuit from Fig. 96, and only the terminals shown were accessible from outside the box. We have a battery and an ammeter and need to determine everything we can about what’s between the terminals F and G. We connect the battery and ammeter in series with these terminals. No current moves through the circuit. We reverse the battery, but still, no current flows in the opposite direction. Then we conclude that there is an open circuit between F and G.
As long as we do not use a higher voltage than 188that of the C-battery which is in the box no current can flow. Even if we do use a higher voltage than the “negative C-battery” of the hidden grid-circuit there will be a current only when the external battery is connected so as to make the grid positive with respect to the filament.
As long as we don’t use a higher voltage than 188 that of the C-battery in the box, no current can flow. Even if we do use a higher voltage than the “negative C-battery” of the hidden grid circuit, there will only be a current when the external battery is connected to make the grid positive in relation to the filament.
Now suppose we take several cells of battery and try in the same way to find what is hidden between the terminals P and F. We start with one battery and the ammeter as before and find that if this battery is connected so as to make P positive with respect to F, there is a feeble current. We increase the battery and find that the current is increased. Two cells, however, do not give exactly twice the current that one cell does, nor do three give three times as much. The current does not increase proportionately to the applied voltage. Therefore we reason that whatever is between P and F acts like a resistance but not like a wire resistance.
Now let’s take several battery cells and try to figure out what’s between terminals P and F. We start with one battery and the ammeter like before, and we see that if this battery is connected to make P positive compared to F, there is a weak current. We add more batteries and notice that the current increases. However, two cells don’t provide exactly double the current of one cell, and three cells don’t give three times as much. The current doesn’t increase in direct proportion to the voltage applied. This leads us to conclude that whatever is between P and F behaves like a resistance but not like a standard wire resistance.
Then, we try another experiment with this hidden audion. We connect a battery to G and F, and note what effect it has on the current which our other battery is sending through the box between P and F. There is a change of current in this circuit, just as if our act of connecting a battery to G-F had resulted in connecting a battery in series with the P-F circuit. The effect is exactly as if there is inside the box a battery which is connected into the hidden part of the circuit P-F. This concealed battery, which now starts to act, appears to be several times stronger than the battery which is connected to G-F.
Then, we conduct another experiment with this hidden audion. We connect a battery to G and F, and observe what effect it has on the current that our other battery is sending through the box between P and F. There is a change in current in this circuit, just as if connecting a battery to G-F had resulted in adding a battery in series with the P-F circuit. The effect is exactly as if there is a battery inside the box that is connected to the hidden part of the circuit P-F. This concealed battery, which now starts to operate, seems to be several times stronger than the battery connected to G-F.
189Sometimes this hidden battery helps the B-battery which is on the outside; and sometimes it seems to oppose, for the current in the P-F circuit either increases or decreases, depending upon how we connect the battery to G and F. The hidden battery is always larger than our battery connected to G and F. If we arrange rapidly to reverse the battery connected to G-F it appears as if there is inside the box in the P-F circuit an alternator, that is, something which can produce an alternating e. m. f.
189Sometimes this hidden battery supports the external B-battery; other times, it seems to resist it, as the current in the P-F circuit either increases or decreases based on how we connect the battery to G and F. The hidden battery is always larger than the one connected to G and F. If we quickly reverse the battery connected to G-F, it appears as if there is an alternator inside the box in the P-F circuit, meaning something capable of generating an alternating e. m. f.
All this, of course, is merely a review statement of what we already know. These experiments are interesting, however, because they follow somewhat those which were performed in studying the audion and finding out how to make it do all the wonderful things which it now can.
All of this, of course, is just a recap of what we already know. These experiments are intriguing, though, because they somewhat mirror those conducted while studying the audion and figuring out how to make it do all the amazing things it can do now.
As far as we have carried our series of experiments the box might contain two separate circuits. One between G and F appears to be an open circuit. The other appears to have in it a resistance and a battery (or else an alternator). The e. m. f. of the battery, or alternator, as the case may be, depends on what source of e. m. f. is connected to G-F. Whatever that e. m. f. is, there is a corresponding kind of e. m. f. inside the box but one several times larger.
As far as we've gone with our series of experiments, the box could have two separate circuits. One between G and F seems to be an open circuit. The other appears to have a resistance and either a battery or an alternator. The voltage of the battery or alternator, depending on which one is connected to G-F, determines the source of voltage. Whatever that voltage is, there's a similar type of voltage inside the box, but it's several times larger.

We might, therefore, pay no further attention to what is actually inside the box or how all these effects are brought about. We might treat the entire box 190as if it was formed by two separate circuits as shown in Fig. 97. If we do so, we are replacing the box by something which is equivalent so far as effects are concerned, that is we are replacing an actual audion by two circuits which together are equivalent to it.
We might, therefore, ignore what’s actually inside the box or how all these effects happen. We could consider the whole box 190as if it were made up of two separate circuits, as shown in Fig. 97. By doing this, we’re substituting the box with something that works the same way in terms of effects; that is, we’re replacing a real audion with two circuits that together are equivalent to it.
The men who first performed such experiments wanted some convenient way of saying that if an alternator, which has an e. m. f. of V volts, is connected to F and G, the effect is the same as if a much stronger alternator is connected between F and P. How much stronger this imaginary alternator is depends upon the design of the audion. For some audions it might be five times as strong, for other designs 6.5 or almost any other number, although usually a number of times less than 40. They used a little Greek letter called “mu” to stand for this number which depends on the design of the tube. Then they said that the hidden alternator in the output circuit was mu times as strong as the actual alternator which was applied between the grid and the filament. Of course, instead of writing the sound and name of the letter they used the letter μ itself. And that is what I have done in the sketch of Fig. 97.
The men who first conducted these experiments wanted an easy way to explain that if an alternator with an e.m.f. of V volts is connected to F and G, the effect is the same as connecting a much stronger alternator between F and P. How much stronger this imaginary alternator is depends on the design of the audion. For some audions, it might be five times as strong, while for others it could be 6.5 or nearly any other number, although it's usually less than 40. They used a small Greek letter called "mu" to represent this number that varies with the tube's design. Then they stated that the hidden alternator in the output circuit was mu times stronger than the actual alternator connected between the grid and the filament. Instead of writing out the sound and name of the letter, they used the letter μ itself. And that’s what I have done in the illustration of Fig. 97.
Now we are ready to talk about the audion as an amplifier. The first thing to notice is the fact that we have an open circuit between F and G. This is true as long as we don’t apply an e. m. f. large enough to overcome the C-battery of Fig. 96 and thus let the grid become positive and attract electrons from the filament. We need then spend no further time thinking 191 about what will happen in the circuit G-F, for there will be no current.
Now we can discuss the audion as an amplifier. The first thing to note is that there is an open circuit between F and G. This remains the case as long as we don't apply an em. f. that is strong enough to overcome the C-battery shown in Fig. 96, which would make the grid positive and attract electrons from the filament. Therefore, we don't need to spend any more time considering what will occur in the circuit G-F, since there won't be any current.
As to the circuit F-P, we can treat it as a resistance in series with which there is a generator μ times as strong as that which is connected to F and G. The next problem is how to get the most out of this hidden generator. We call the resistance which the tube offers to the passage of electrons between P and F the “internal resistance” of the plate circuit of the tube. How large it is depends upon the design of tube. In some tubes it may be five or six thousand ohms, and in others several times as high. In the large tubes used in high-powered transmitting sets it is much less. Since it will be different in different cases we shall use a symbol for it and say that it is RP ohms.
As for the circuit F-P, we can consider it as a resistor in series with a generator that is μ times stronger than the one connected to F and G. The next challenge is figuring out how to maximize the potential of this hidden generator. We refer to the resistance that the tube presents to the flow of electrons between P and F as the "internal resistance" of the tube's plate circuit. Its size varies based on the tube's design. In some tubes, it can be five or six thousand ohms, while in others, it can be several times higher. In large tubes used in high-powered transmitting sets, it is much lower. Since it varies from case to case, we will use a symbol for it and say it is RP ohms.
Then one rule for using an audion as an amplifier is this: To get the most out of an audion see that the telephone, or whatever circuit or piece of apparatus is connected to the output terminals, shall have a resistance of RP ohms. When the resistance of the circuit, which an audion is supplying with current, is the same as the internal resistance of the output side of the tube, then the audion gives its greatest output. That is the condition for the greatest “amount of energy each second,” or the “greatest power” as we say.
Then one rule for using an audion as an amplifier is this: To get the most out of an audion, make sure that the telephone, or whatever circuit or device is connected to the output terminals, has a resistance of RP ohms. When the resistance of the circuit that the audion is powering matches the internal resistance of the output side of the tube, the audion delivers its maximum output. That is the requirement for the greatest “amount of energy each second,” or the “greatest power,” as we refer to it.
That rule is why we always select the telephone receivers which we use with an audion and always ask carefully as to their resistance when we buy. Sometimes, however, it is not practicable to use receivers 192of just the right resistance. Where we connect the output side of an audion to some other circuit, as where we let one audion supply another, it is usually impossible to follow this rule without adding some special apparatus.
That rule is why we always choose the phone receivers we use with an audion and always check their resistance carefully when we buy them. Sometimes, though, it’s not practical to use receivers 192 that have exactly the right resistance. When we connect the output side of an audion to another circuit, like when one audion powers another, it’s usually impossible to follow this rule without adding some special equipment.
This leads to the next rule: If the telephone receiver, or the circuit, which we wish to connect to the output of an audion, does not have quite nearly a resistance of RP ohms we use a properly designed transformer as we have already done in Figs. 94 and 95.
This brings us to the next rule: If the telephone receiver or the circuit we want to connect to the output of an audion doesn't have a resistance close to RP ohms, we use a well-designed transformer, as we've already shown in Figs. 94 and 95.
A transformer is two separate coils coupled together so that an alternating current in the primary will induce an alternating current in the secondary. Of course, if the secondary is open-circuited then no current can flow but there will be induced in it an e. m. f. which is ready to act if the circuit is closed. Transformers have an interesting ability to make a large resistance look small or vice versa. To show you why, I shall have to develop some rules for transformers.
A transformer consists of two separate coils connected in a way that an alternating current in the primary coil generates an alternating current in the secondary coil. Naturally, if the secondary coil is open-circuited, no current can flow, but an electromotive force (e.m.f.) will be induced that is ready to activate if the circuit is closed. Transformers have a fascinating ability to make a large resistance appear small, or the other way around. To explain this, I'll need to establish some rules for transformers.
Suppose you have an alternating e. m. f. of ten volts applied to the primary of an iron-cored transformer which has ten turns. There is one volt applied to each turn. Now, suppose the secondary has only one turn. That one turn has induced in it an alternating e. m. f. of one volt. If there are more turns of wire forming the secondary, then each turn has induced in it just one volt. But the e. m. f.’s of all these turns add together. If the secondary has twenty turns, there is induced in it a total of twenty 193volts. So the first rule is this: In a transformer the number of volts in each turn of wire is just the same in the secondary as in the primary.
Suppose you have an alternating voltage of ten volts applied to the primary of an iron-cored transformer with ten turns. That's one volt for each turn. Now, imagine the secondary has just one turn. That single turn gets an alternating voltage of one volt induced in it. If the secondary has more turns of wire, then each turn gets induced with one volt as well. But the voltages of all these turns add together. If the secondary has twenty turns, then it has a total of twenty 193 volts induced. So, the first rule is this: In a transformer, the voltage in each turn of wire is the same in the secondary as it is in the primary.
If we want a high-voltage alternating e. m. f. all we have to do is to send an alternating current through the primary of a transformer which has in the secondary, many times more turns of wire than it has in the primary. From the secondary we obtain a higher voltage than we impress on the primary.
If we want a high-voltage alternating e.m.f., all we have to do is send an alternating current through the primary of a transformer that has a lot more turns of wire in the secondary than in the primary. From the secondary, we get a higher voltage than what we apply to the primary.
You can see one application of this rule at once. When we use an audion as an amplifier of an alternating current we send the current which is to be amplified through the primary of a transformer, as in Fig. 94. We use a transformer with many times more turns on the secondary than on the primary so as to apply a large e. m. f. to the grid of the amplifying tube. That will mean a large effect in the plate circuit of the amplifier.
You can see one application of this rule immediately. When we use an audion as an amplifier for an alternating current, we pass the current we want to amplify through the primary of a transformer, as shown in Fig. 94. We use a transformer with many more turns on the secondary than on the primary to apply a high voltage to the grid of the amplifying tube. This will result in a significant effect in the plate circuit of the amplifier.
You remember that the grid circuit of an audion with a proper value of negative C-battery is really open-circuited and no current will flow in it. For that case we get a real gain by using a “step-up” transformer, that is, one with more turns in the secondary than in the primary.
You remember that the grid circuit of an audion with the right value of negative C-battery is actually open-circuited, and no current will flow through it. In that case, we achieve a real gain by using a "step-up" transformer, which has more turns in the secondary than in the primary.
It looks at first as if a transformer would always give a gain. If we mean a gain in energy it will not although we may use it, as we shall see in a minute, to permit a vacuum tube to work into an output circuit more efficiently than it could without the transformer. We cannot have any more energy 194 in the secondary circuit of a transformer than we give to the primary.
It seems initially that a transformer would always provide an increase in power. However, if we're talking about an increase in energy, that won’t be the case, although, as we will demonstrate shortly, it can help a vacuum tube operate more effectively in an output circuit than it could without the transformer. We can't get any more energy 194 in the secondary circuit of a transformer than what we supply to the primary.
Suppose we have a transformer with twice as many turns on the secondary as on the primary. To the primary we apply an alternating e. m. f. of a certain number of volts. In the secondary there will be twice as many volts because it has twice as many turns. The current in the secondary, however, will be only half as large as is the current in the primary. We have twice the force in the secondary but only half the electron stream.
Suppose we have a transformer with twice as many turns on the secondary as on the primary. We apply an alternating voltage to the primary. In the secondary, there will be twice as many volts because it has twice as many turns. However, the current in the secondary will be only half as large as the current in the primary. We have twice the voltage in the secondary but only half the flow of electrons.
It is something like this: You are out coasting and two youngsters ask you to pull them and their sleds up hill. You pull one of them all the way and do a certain amount of work. On the other hand suppose you pull them both at once but only half way up. You pull twice as hard but only half as far and you do the same amount of work as before.
It’s like this: You’re out skating and two kids ask you to pull them and their sleds up the hill. You pull one of them all the way, and that takes a certain amount of effort. Now, if you pull both of them at once but only halfway up, you’re pulling twice as hard but only halfway, so you end up doing the same amount of work as before.

We can’t get more work out of the secondary of a transformer than we do in the primary. If we design the transformer so that there is a greater pull (e. m. f.) in the secondary the electron stream in the secondary will be correspondingly smaller.
We can’t get more work out of the secondary of a transformer than we do in the primary. If we design the transformer to create a stronger pull (e.m.f.) in the secondary, the flow of electrons in the secondary will be correspondingly smaller.
You remember how we measure resistance. We divide the e. m. f. (number of volts) by the current (number of amperes) to find the resistance (number of ohms). Suppose we do that for the primary and for the 195secondary of the transformer of Fig. 98 which we are discussing. See what happens in the secondary. There is only half as much voltage but twice as much current. It looks as though the secondary had one-fourth as much resistance as the primary. And so it has, but we usually call it “impedance” instead of resistance because straight wires resist but coils or condensers impede alternating e. m. f.’s.
You remember how we measure resistance. We divide the voltage (in volts) by the current (in amperes) to find the resistance (in ohms). Suppose we do that for the primary and for the 195secondary of the transformer in Fig. 98 that we’re discussing. Look at what happens in the secondary. There's only half as much voltage but twice as much current. It seems like the secondary has one-fourth the resistance of the primary. And it does, but we usually refer to it as “impedance” instead of resistance because straight wires resist, while coils or capacitors impede alternating voltage.

Before we return to the question of using a transformer in an audion circuit let us turn this transformer around as in Fig. 99 and send the current through the side with the larger number of windings. Let’s talk of “primary” and “secondary” just as before but, of course, remember that now the primary has twice the turns of the secondary. On the secondary side we shall have only half the current, but there will be twice the e. m. f. The resistance of the secondary then is four times that of the primary.
Before we go back to the question of using a transformer in an audion circuit, let's flip this transformer around as shown in Fig. 99 and send the current through the side with more windings. We'll refer to the “primary” and “secondary” like before, but keep in mind that now the primary has twice the number of turns as the secondary. On the secondary side, we'll have only half the current, but the e.m.f. will be double. Therefore, the resistance of the secondary is four times that of the primary.
Now return to the amplifier of Fig. 94 and see what sort of a transformer should be between the plate circuit of the tube and the telephone receivers. Suppose the internal resistance of the tube is 12,000 ohms and the resistance of the telephones is 3,000 ohms. Suppose also that the resistance (really impedance) of the primary side of the transformer which we just considered is 12,000 ohms. The impedance of its secondary will be a quarter of this or 3,000 ohms. 196If we connect such a transformer in the circuit, as shown, we shall obtain the greatest output from the tube.
Now go back to the amplifier in Fig. 94 and check what kind of transformer should be placed between the tube's plate circuit and the telephone receivers. Let's say the tube’s internal resistance is 12,000 ohms and the resistance of the telephones is 3,000 ohms. Also assume that the resistance (actually impedance) of the primary side of the transformer we just discussed is 12,000 ohms. The impedance of its secondary will be a quarter of that, or 3,000 ohms. 196 If we connect a transformer like this in the circuit, as shown, we will achieve the maximum output from the tube.
In the first place the primary of the transformer has a number of ohms just equal to the internal resistance of the tube. The tube, therefore, will give its best to that transformer. In the second place the secondary of the transformer has a resistance just equal to the telephone receivers so it can give its best to them. The effect of the transformer is to make the telephones act as if they had four times as much resistance and so were exactly suited to be connected to the audion.
In the first place, the primary of the transformer has a resistance that is exactly equal to the internal resistance of the tube. Therefore, the tube will perform optimally with that transformer. Secondly, the secondary of the transformer has a resistance that matches the telephone receivers, allowing it to perform optimally with them as well. The effect of the transformer is to make the telephones behave as if they had four times the resistance, making them perfectly suited for connection to the audion.
This whole matter of the proper use of transformers is quite simple but very important in setting up vacuum-tube circuits. To overlook it in building or buying your radio set will mean poor efficiency. Whenever you have two parts of a vacuum-tube circuit to connect together be sure and buy only a transformer which is designed to work between the two impedances (or resistances) which you wish to connect together.
This whole issue of using transformers correctly is pretty straightforward but very important for setting up vacuum-tube circuits. Ignoring it when building or buying your radio will result in poor efficiency. Whenever you need to connect two parts of a vacuum-tube circuit, make sure to buy a transformer that's made to work between the two impedances (or resistances) you want to connect.
There is one more precaution in connection with the purchase of transformers. They should do the same thing for all the important frequencies which they are to transmit. If they do not, the speech or signals will be distorted and may be unintelligible.
There is one more precaution regarding the purchase of transformers. They should function the same way for all the important frequencies they are meant to transmit. If they don’t, the speech or signals will be distorted and could become unintelligible.
If you take the precautions which I have mentioned your radio receiving set formed by a detector and one amplifier will look like that of Fig. 94. That is only one possible scheme of connections. You can use 197any detector circuit which you wish,[10] one with a grid condenser and leak, or one arranged for feed-back In either case your amplifier may well be as shown in the figure.
If you follow the precautions I mentioned, your radio receiver, which consists of a detector and one amplifier, will look like the one in Fig. 94. That’s just one way to set it up. You can use any detector circuit you want, whether it has a grid condenser and leak or one designed for feedback. In either case, your amplifier can be similar to what’s shown in the figure.

198The circuit I have described uses an audion to amplify the audio-frequency currents which come from the detector and are capable of operating the telephones. In some cases it is desirable to amplify the radio signals before applying them to the detector. This is especially true where a “loop antenna” is being used. Loop antennas are smaller and more convenient than aërials and they also have certain abilities to select the signals which they are to receive because they receive best from stations which lie along a line drawn parallel to their turns. Unfortunately, however, they are much less efficient and so require the use of amplifiers.
198The circuit I've described uses an audion to boost the audio-frequency currents coming from the detector that can operate the telephones. In some situations, it's better to amplify the radio signals before sending them to the detector. This is especially true when using a “loop antenna.” Loop antennas are smaller and more practical than traditional antennas, and they also have unique capabilities to select the signals they receive, as they work best with stations that are aligned parallel to their loops. Unfortunately, they are much less efficient, which means amplifiers are necessary.
With a small loop made by ten turns of wire separated by about a quarter of an inch and wound on a square mounting, about three feet on a side, you will usually require two amplifiers. One of these might be used to amplify the radio signals before detection and the other to amplify after detection. To tune the loop for broadcasts a condenser of about 0.0005 mf. will be needed. The diagram of Fig. 100 shows the complete circuit of a set with three stages of radio-amplification and none of audio.
With a small loop created by ten turns of wire spaced about a quarter of an inch apart and wrapped around a square mount that's about three feet on each side, you typically need two amplifiers. One can be used to boost the radio signals before detection, and the other to amplify them after detection. To tune the loop for broadcasts, you'll need a capacitor of approximately 0.0005 microfarads. The diagram in Fig. 100 shows the complete circuit of a setup with three stages of radio amplification and no audio amplification.
199LETTER 20
TELEPHONE HANDSETS AND OTHER ELECTROMAGNETIC DEVICES
Dear Son:
Dear Son:
In an earlier letter when we first introduced a telephone receiver into a circuit I told you something of how it operates. I want now to tell why and also of some other important devices which operate for the same reason.
In a previous letter when we first connected a telephone receiver to a circuit, I explained a bit about how it works. Now, I want to share the reasons behind it and also discuss some other important devices that function for the same reason.
You remember that a stream of electrons which is starting or stopping can induce the electrons of a neighboring parallel circuit to start off in parallel paths. We do not know the explanation of this. Nor do we know the explanation of another fact which seems to be related to this fact of induction and is the basis for our explanations of magnetism.
You remember that a flow of electrons that starts or stops can cause the electrons in a nearby parallel circuit to begin moving in parallel paths. We don’t know why this happens. We also don’t understand another related fact that seems to be connected to this induction and is the foundation for our explanations of magnetism.

If two parallel wires are carrying steady electron streams in the same general direction the wires attract each other. If the streams are oppositely directed the wires repel each other. Fig. 101 illustrates 200this fact. If the streams are not at all in the same direction, that is, if they are at right angles, they have no effect on each other.
If two parallel wires are carrying steady streams of electrons in the same general direction, the wires attract each other. If the streams are going in opposite directions, the wires repel each other. Fig. 101 illustrates 200 this fact. If the streams are not aligned at all, meaning they are at right angles to each other, they don’t affect each other.

These facts, of the attraction of electron streams which are in the same direction and repulsion of streams in opposite directions, are all that one need remember to figure out for himself what will happen under various conditions. For example, if two coils of wire are carrying currents what will happen is easily seen. Fig. 102 shows the two coils and a section through them.
These facts—about the attraction of electron streams moving in the same direction and the repulsion of streams moving in opposite directions—are all you need to remember to figure out what will happen in different situations. For instance, if two coils of wire are carrying currents, the outcome is easy to see. Fig. 102 shows the two coils and a section through them.

Looking at this cross section we seem to have four wires, 1 and 2 of coil A and 3 and 4 of coil B. You see at once that if the coils are free to move they will move into the dotted positions shown in Fig 102, because wire 1 attracts wire 3 and repels wire 4, while wire 2 attracts wire 4 and repels wire 3. If necessary, and if they are free to move, the coils will turn completely around to get to this position. I have shown such a case in Fig. 103.
Looking at this cross-section, we have four wires: 1 and 2 from coil A, and 3 and 4 from coil B. It's clear that if the coils can move, they will shift into the dotted positions shown in Fig 102 because wire 1 attracts wire 3 and repels wire 4, while wire 2 attracts wire 4 and repels wire 3. If needed, and if they are free to move, the coils will completely rotate to reach this position. I've illustrated such a scenario in Fig. 103.
201Wires which are not carrying currents do not behave in this way. The action is due, but how we don’t yet know, to the motions of the electrons. As far as we can explain it to-day, the attraction of two wires which are carrying currents is due to the attraction of the two streams of electrons. Of course these electrons are part of the wires. They can’t get far away from the stay-at-home electrons and the nuclei of the atoms which form the wires. In fact it is these nuclei which keep the wandering electrons within the wires. The result is that if the streams of electrons are to move toward each other the wires must go along with them.
201Wires that aren’t carrying currents don't act this way. The effect is caused, but we don’t know how yet, by the movement of electrons. As far as we can explain it today, the attraction between two wires carrying currents comes from the interaction of the two streams of electrons. These electrons are part of the wires and can’t stray too far from the stationary electrons and the atomic nuclei that make up the wires. In fact, it’s these nuclei that keep the roaming electrons contained within the wires. So, if the streams of electrons are moving toward each other, the wires have to move along with them.
If the wires are held firmly the electron streams cannot approach one another for they must stay in the wires. Wires, therefore, perform the important service of acting as paths for electrons which are traveling as electric currents. There are other ways in which electrons can be kept in a path, and other means beside batteries for keeping them going. It doesn’t make any difference so far as the attraction or the repulsion is concerned why they are following a certain path or why they stay in it. So far as we know two streams of electrons, following parallel paths, will always, behave just like the two streams of Fig. 101.
If the wires are held tightly, the streams of electrons can't get close to each other because they need to stay within the wires. Wires, therefore, play a crucial role by providing pathways for electrons moving as electric currents. There are other methods to guide electrons along a path, and other ways besides batteries to keep them moving. It doesn't matter, in terms of attraction or repulsion, why they follow a specific path or why they remain in it. As far as we know, two streams of electrons traveling along parallel paths will always behave like the two streams in Fig. 101.

Suppose, for example, there were two atoms which were each formed by a nucleus and a number of electrons swinging around about the nucleus as pictured in 202Fig. 104. The electrons are going of their own accord and the nucleus keeps them from flying off at a tangent, the way mud flies from the wheel of an automobile. Suppose these two atoms are free to turn but not to move far from their present positions. They will turn so as to make their electron paths parallel just as did the loops of Fig. 102.
Suppose, for example, there are two atoms, each consisting of a nucleus and several electrons revolving around it, as shown in 202Fig. 104. The electrons move freely, while the nucleus keeps them from flying off in a straight line, similar to how mud splatters from a car tire. Let’s say these two atoms can rotate but can’t move far from where they are. They will align their electron paths to be parallel, just like the loops in Fig. 102.

Now, I don’t say that there are any atoms at all like the ones I have pictured. There is still a great deal to be learned about how electrons act inside different kinds of atoms. We do know, however, that the atoms of iron act just as if they were tiny loops with electron streams.
Now, I’m not saying that there are any atoms exactly like the ones I’ve imagined. There's still a lot to learn about how electrons behave in different types of atoms. However, we do know that iron atoms behave as if they are tiny loops with streams of electrons.

203Suppose we had several loops and that they were lined up like the three loops in Fig. 105. You can see that they would all attract the other loop, on the right in the figure. On the other hand if they were grouped in the triangle of Fig. 106 they would barely affect the loop because they would be pulling at cross purposes. If a lot of the tiny loops of the iron atoms are lined up so as to act together and attract other loops, as in the first figure, we say the iron is magnetized and is a magnet. In an ordinary piece of iron, however, the atoms are so grouped that they don’t pull together but like the loops of our second figure pull in different directions and neutralize each other’s efforts so that there is no net effect.
203Imagine we have several loops arranged like the three loops in Fig. 105. You can see that they would all attract the other loop on the right in the figure. However, if they were grouped in the triangle shown in Fig. 106, they would barely have any effect on the loop because their pulls would be conflicting. If many tiny loops of iron atoms are aligned to work together and attract other loops, like in the first figure, we say the iron is magnetized and acts as a magnet. In a regular piece of iron, though, the atoms are arranged in a way that they don’t pull in unison; instead, like the loops in the second figure, they pull in different directions and cancel each other out, resulting in no net effect.

Pl. IX.–Western Electric Loud Speaking Receiver. Crystal Detector Set of the General Electric Co. Audibility Meter of General Radio Co.
Pl. IX.–Western Electric Loud Speaking Receiver. Crystal Detector Set from General Electric Co. Audibility Meter from General Radio Co.
204And like the loops of Fig. 106 the atoms in an unmagnetized piece of iron are pretty well satisfied to stay as they are without all lining up to pull together. To magnetize the iron we must force some of these atomic loops to turn part way around. That can be done by bringing near them a strong magnet or a coil of wire which is carrying a current. Then the atoms are forced to turn and if enough turn so that there is an appreciable effect then the iron is magnetized. The more that are properly turned the stronger is the magnet. One end or “pole” we call north-seeking and the other south-seeking, because a magnetized bar of iron acts like a compass needle.
204Just like the loops in Fig. 106, the atoms in an unmagnetized piece of iron are generally content to remain in their current state without all aligning to pull together. To magnetize the iron, we need to make some of these atomic loops turn partially. This can be achieved by bringing a strong magnet or a current-carrying wire coil close to them. As a result, the atoms are compelled to turn, and if enough of them turn enough to create a noticeable effect, the iron becomes magnetized. The more atoms that properly align, the stronger the magnet becomes. One end, or “pole,” is referred to as north-seeking, while the other is south-seeking, because a magnetized bar of iron behaves like a compass needle.

A coil of wire, carrying a current, acts just like a magnet because its larger loops are all ready to pull together. I have marked the coil of Fig. 107 with N and S for north and south. If the electron stream in it is reversed the “polarity” is reversed. There is a simple rule for this. Partially close your left hand so that the fingers form loops. Let the thumb stick out at right angles to these loops. If the 205 electron streams are flowing around the loops of a coil in the same direction as your fingers point then your thumb is the N pole and the coil will repel the north poles of other loops or magnets in the direction in which your thumb points. If you know the polarity already there is a simple rule for the repulsion or attraction. Like poles repel, unlike poles attract.
A coil of wire carrying a current acts just like a magnet because its larger loops are ready to pull together. I’ve marked the coil in Fig. 107 with N and S for north and south. If the flow of electrons in it is reversed, the “polarity” changes. There’s a simple rule for this. Partially close your left hand so your fingers form loops. Let your thumb stick out at a right angle to those loops. If the 205 electron streams flow around the loops of a coil in the same direction as your fingers point, then your thumb represents the N pole, and the coil will repel the north poles of other loops or magnets in the direction your thumb is pointing. If you already know the polarity, there’s a straightforward rule for repulsion or attraction: like poles repel, and unlike poles attract.
From what has been said about magnetism you can now understand why in a telephone receiver the current in the winding can make the magnet stronger. It does so because it makes more of the atomic loops of the iron turn around and help pull. On the other hand if the current in the winding is reversed it will turn some of the loops which are already helping into other positions where they don’t help and may hinder. If the current in the coil is to help, the electron stream in it must be so directed that the north pole of the coil is at the same end as the north pole of the magnet.
From what we've discussed about magnetism, you can now see why the current in the winding of a telephone receiver can strengthen the magnet. It does this by getting more atomic loops of the iron to align and assist. Conversely, if the current in the winding is reversed, it will reposition some of the loops that are currently helpful into positions where they no longer assist and might even obstruct. For the current in the coil to be beneficial, the electron flow must be directed so that the north pole of the coil aligns with the north pole of the magnet.
This idea of the attraction or repulsion of electron streams, whether in coils of wire or in atoms of iron and other magnetizable substances, is the fundamental idea of most forms of telephone receivers, of electric motors, and of a lot of other devices which we call “electromagnetic.”
This concept of attracting or repelling streams of electrons, whether in wire coils or in iron atoms and other materials that can be magnetized, is the core principle behind most types of telephone receivers, electric motors, and many other gadgets we refer to as "electromagnetic."
The ammeters and voltmeters which we use for the measurement of audion characteristics and the like are usually electromagnetic instruments. Ammeters and voltmeters are alike in their design. Both are sensitive current-measuring instruments. In the case of the voltmeter, as you know, we have 206a large resistance in series with the current-measuring part for the reason of which I told in Letter 8. In the case of ammeters we sometimes let all the current go through the current-measuring part but generally we let only a certain fraction of it do so. To pass the rest of the current we connect a small resistance in parallel with the measuring part. In both types of instruments the resistances are sometimes hidden away under the cover. Both instruments must, of course, be calibrated as I have explained before.
The ammeters and voltmeters we use to measure audion characteristics and similar metrics are typically electromagnetic instruments. Ammeters and voltmeters share a similar design. Both are sensitive instruments for measuring current. In the case of the voltmeter, as you know, we have 206a large resistance in series with the current-measuring component, for the reason I explained in Letter 8. For ammeters, we sometimes allow all the current to flow through the measuring part, but usually, we only let a portion of it pass through. To accommodate the rest of the current, we connect a small resistance in parallel with the measuring part. In both types of instruments, the resistances are sometimes concealed beneath the cover. Both instruments must be calibrated, as I have explained before.
In the electromagnetic instruments there are several ways of making the current-measuring part. The simplest is to let the current, or part of it, flow through a coil which is pivoted between the N and S poles of a strong permanent magnet. A spring keeps the coil in its zero position and if the current makes the coil turn it must do so against this spring. The stronger the current in the coil the greater the interaction of the loops of the coil and those of the iron atoms and hence the further the coil will turn. A pointer attached to the coil indicates how far; and the number of volts or amperes is read off from the calibrated scale.
In electromagnetic instruments, there are several ways to create the current-measuring component. The simplest method is to allow the current, or part of it, to flow through a coil that is pivoted between the N and S poles of a strong permanent magnet. A spring keeps the coil at its zero position, and when the current causes the coil to turn, it has to do so against this spring. The stronger the current in the coil, the greater the interaction between the coils and the iron atoms, leading to a further turn of the coil. A pointer attached to the coil shows how far it has turned, and the number of volts or amperes is read from the calibrated scale.
Such instruments measure direct-currents, that is, steady streams of electrons in one direction. To measure an alternating current or voltage we can use a hot-wire instrument or one of several different types of electromagnetic instruments. Perhaps the simplest of these is the so-called “plunger type.” The alternating current flows in a coil; and a piece of 207soft iron is so pivoted that it can be attracted and moved into the coil. Soft iron does not make a good permanent magnet. If you put a piece of it inside a coil which is carrying a steady current it becomes a magnet but about as soon as you interrupt the current the atomic loops of the iron stop pulling together. Almost immediately they turn into all sorts of positions and form little self-satisfied groups which don’t take any interest in the outside world. (That isn’t true of steel, where the atomic loops are harder to turn and to line up, but are much more likely to stay in their new positions.)
Such instruments measure direct currents, which are consistent streams of electrons flowing in one direction. To measure an alternating current or voltage, we can use a hot-wire instrument or various types of electromagnetic instruments. One of the simplest is the so-called "plunger type." The alternating current flows through a coil, and a piece of 207soft iron is pivoted so it can be attracted and moved into the coil. Soft iron doesn't make a good permanent magnet. When you place a piece inside a coil carrying a steady current, it becomes a magnet, but as soon as you interrupt the current, the atomic loops in the iron stop aligning. Almost immediately, they shift into all sorts of positions and form little self-satisfied groups that don’t care about the outside world. (This isn't the case with steel, where the atomic loops are more challenging to turn and align but are much more likely to stay in their new positions.)
Because the plunger in an alternating-current ammeter is soft iron its loops line up with those of the coil no matter which way the electron stream happens to be going in the coil. The atomic magnets in the iron turn around each time the current reverses and they are always, therefore, lined up so that the plunger is attracted. If the plunger has much inertia or if the oscillations of the current are reasonably frequent the plunger will not move back and forth with each reversal of the current but will take an average position. The stronger the a-c (alternating current) the farther inside the coil will be this position of the plunger. The position of the plunger becomes then a measure of the strength of the alternating current.
Because the plunger in an alternating-current ammeter is made of soft iron, its loops align with those of the coil no matter which direction the electron stream flows in the coil. The atomic magnets in the iron rotate each time the current reverses, so they're always oriented in a way that keeps the plunger attracted. If the plunger has a lot of inertia or if the current oscillates frequently, it won't move back and forth with every current reversal but will settle into an average position. The stronger the alternating current (a-c), the further inside the coil the plunger will be positioned. Thus, the position of the plunger becomes a measure of the strength of the alternating current.
Instruments for measuring alternating e. m. f.’s and currents, read in volts and in amperes. So far I haven’t stopped to tell what we mean by one ampere of alternating current. You know from Letter 7 208what we mean by an ampere of d-c (direct current). It wasn’t necessary to explain before because I told you only of hot-wire instruments and they will read the same for either d-c or a-c.
Instruments for measuring alternating electromotive forces and currents are read in volts and amperes. So far, I haven't taken the time to explain what we mean by one ampere of alternating current. You learned from Letter 7 208 what we mean by an ampere of direct current. I didn't need to explain it earlier because I only discussed hot-wire instruments, and they will give the same reading for both direct current and alternating current.
When there is an alternating current in a wire the electrons start, rush ahead, stop, rush back, stop, and do it all over again and again. That heats the wire in which it happens. If an alternating stream of electrons, which are doing this sort of thing, heats a wire just exactly as much as would a d-c of one ampere, then we say that the a-c has an “effective value” of one ampere. Of course part of the time of each cycle the stream is larger than an ampere but for part it is less. If the average heating effect is the same the a-c is said to be one ampere.
When there's alternating current in a wire, the electrons start, rush ahead, stop, rush back, stop, and repeat this over and over. This movement heats up the wire. If an alternating flow of electrons heats a wire exactly as much as a direct current (d-c) of one ampere would, we say that the alternating current has an "effective value" of one ampere. Of course, during part of each cycle, the flow is greater than one ampere, but at other times, it's less. If the average heating effect is the same, the alternating current is considered to be one ampere.
In the same way, if a steady e. m. f. (a d-c e. m. f.) of one volt will heat a wire to which it is applied a certain amount and if an alternating e. m. f. will have the same heating effect in the same time, then the a-c e. m. f. is said to be one volt.
In the same way, if a constant voltage (a direct current voltage) of one volt heats a wire to a specific degree when applied, and if an alternating voltage will produce the same heating effect in the same amount of time, then the alternating voltage is considered to be one volt.
Another electromagnetic instrument which we have discussed but of which more should be said is the iron-cored transformer. We consider first what happens in one of the coils of the transformer.
Another electromagnetic device we've talked about but should discuss further is the iron-cored transformer. Let's first look at what happens in one of the coils of the transformer.
The inductance of a coil is very much higher if it has an iron core. The reason is that then the coil acts as if it had an enormously larger number of turns. All the atomic loops of the core add their effects to the loops of the coil. When the current starts it must line up a lot of these atomic loops. When the current stops and these loops turn back 209into some of their old self-satisfied groupings, they affect the electrons in the coil. Where first they opposed the motion of these electrons, now they insist on its being continued for a moment longer. I’ll prove that by describing two simple experiments; and then we’ll have the basis for understanding the effect of an iron core in a transformer.
The inductance of a coil is much higher when it has an iron core. This is because the coil behaves as if it has a significantly larger number of turns. All the atomic loops in the core contribute to the loops of the coil. When the current starts, it needs to align many of these atomic loops. When the current stops and these loops return to some of their previous, satisfied groupings, they influence the electrons in the coil. Initially, they resist the movement of these electrons, but now they encourage it to continue for a bit longer. I’ll demonstrate this with two simple experiments, and then we’ll have a solid understanding of how an iron core affects a transformer.

Look again at Fig. 33 of Letter 9 which I am reproducing for convenience. We considered only what would happen in coil cd if a current was started in coil ab. Suppose instead of placing the coils as shown in that figure they are placed as in Fig. 108. Because they are at right angles there will be no effect in cd when the current is started in ab. Let the current flow steadily through ab and then suddenly turn the coils so that they are again parallel as shown by the dotted positions. We get the same temporary current in cd as we would if we should place the coils parallel and then start the current in ab.
Look again at Fig. 33 of Letter 9, which I'm reproducing for convenience. We only considered what would happen in coil cd if a current was started in coil ab. Now, imagine instead of placing the coils as shown in that figure, they are positioned like in Fig. 108. Since they are at right angles, there won't be any effect in cd when the current starts in ab. Let the current flow steadily through ab and then suddenly rotate the coils so they are parallel again, as indicated by the dotted positions. We get the same temporary current in cd as we would if we had placed the coils parallel and then started the current in ab.

The other experiment is this: Starting with the coils lined up as in the dotted position of Fig. 108 and the current steadily flowing in ab, we suddenly turn them into positions at right angles to each other. There is the same momentary current in cd as if we had 210 left them lined up and had opened the switch in the circuit of ab.
The other experiment is this: Starting with the coils aligned as shown in the dotted position of Fig. 108 and the current steadily flowing in ab, we suddenly rotate them to be at right angles to each other. There is the same momentary current in cd as if we had 210 left them aligned and had opened the switch in the circuit of ab.

Now we know that the atomic loops of iron behave in the same general way as do loops of wire which are carrying currents. Let us replace the coil ab by a magnet as shown in Fig. 109. First we start with the magnet at right angles to the coil cd. Suddenly we turn it into the dotted position of that figure. There is the same momentary current in cd as if we were still using the coil ab instead of a magnet. If now we turn the magnet back to a position at right angles to cd, we observe the opposite direction of current in cd. These effects are more noticeable the more rapidly we turn the magnet. The same is true of turning the coil.
Now we know that the atomic loops of iron act similarly to loops of wire carrying currents. Let’s replace the coil ab with a magnet, as shown in Fig. 109. First, we start with the magnet at a right angle to the coil cd. Suddenly, we turn it to the dotted position in that figure. There is the same brief current in cd as if we were still using the coil ab instead of a magnet. If we then turn the magnet back to a position at a right angle to cd, we observe the current in cd flowing in the opposite direction. These effects become more noticeable the faster we turn the magnet. The same is true when we turn the coil.
The experiment of turning the magnet illustrates just what happens in the case of a transformer with, an iron core except that instead of turning the entire magnet the little atomic loops do the turning inside the core. In the secondary of an iron-cored transformer the induced current is the sum of two currents both in the same direction at each instant. One current is caused by the starting or stopping of the current in the primary. The other current is due to the turning of the atomic loops of the iron atoms so that more of them line up with the turns of the primary. These atomic loops, of course, are turned by the current in the primary. There are so 211many of them, however, that the current due to their turning is usually the more important part of the total current.
The experiment of turning the magnet shows exactly what happens in a transformer with an iron core, except instead of turning the whole magnet, the tiny atomic loops rotate inside the core. In the secondary of an iron-cored transformer, the induced current is the combination of two currents flowing in the same direction at any moment. One current is generated by the starting or stopping of the current in the primary. The other current comes from the rotation of the atomic loops of the iron atoms, allowing more of them to align with the turns of the primary. These atomic loops are turned by the current in the primary. There are so 211 many of them, though, that the current generated by their rotation is typically the more significant portion of the total current.
In all transformers the effect is greater the more rapidly the current changes direction and the atomic loops turn around. For the same size of electron stream in the primary, therefore, there is induced in the secondary a greater e. m. f. the greater is the frequency with which the primary current alternates.
In all transformers, the effect is stronger the faster the current changes direction and the atomic loops rotate. So, for the same size of electron flow in the primary, a higher frequency of alternating current causes a greater induced e.m.f. in the secondary.
Where high frequencies are dealt with it isn’t necessary to have iron cores because the effect is large enough without the help of the atomic loops. And even if we wanted their help it wouldn’t be easy to obtain, for they dislike to turn so fast and it takes a lot of power to make them do so. We know that fact because we know that an iron core increases the inductance and so chokes the current. For low frequencies, however, that is those frequencies in the audio range, it is usually necessary to have iron cores so as to get enough effect without too many turns of wire.
Where high frequencies are involved, there's no need for iron cores because the effect is significant enough on its own without the atomic loops. Even if we wanted their assistance, it wouldn't be easy to achieve, as they don't like to rotate quickly and require a lot of power to make them do so. We know this because we understand that an iron core boosts the inductance, which in turn limits the current. However, for lower frequencies—specifically those in the audio range—it's typically necessary to use iron cores to achieve enough effect without needing too many wire turns.
The fact that iron decreases the inductance and so seriously impedes alternating currents leads us to use iron-core coils where we want high inductance. Such coils are usually called “choke coils” or “retard coils.” Of their use we shall see more in a later letter where we study radio-telephone transmitters.
The fact that iron lowers inductance and significantly restricts alternating currents prompts us to use iron-core coils when we need high inductance. These coils are typically referred to as “choke coils” or “retard coils.” We will explore their use further in a later letter when we examine radio-telephone transmitters.
212LETTER 21
YOUR RECEIVING SET AND HOW TO EXPERIMENT
My Dear Student:
My Dear Student:
In this letter I want to tell you how to experiment with radio apparatus. The first rule is this: Start with a simple circuit, never add anything to it until you know just why you are doing so, and do not box it up in a cabinet until you know how it is working and why.
In this letter, I want to explain how to experiment with radio equipment. The first rule is this: Start with a simple circuit, don’t add anything to it until you understand exactly why you’re doing that, and don’t put it in a cabinet until you know how it’s working and why.
Your antenna at the start had better be a single wire about 25 feet high and about 75 feet long. This antenna will have capacity of about 0.0001 m. f. If you want an antenna of two wires spaced about three feet apart I would make it about 75 feet long. Bring down a lead from each wire, twisting them into a pigtail to act like one wire except near the horizontal part of the antenna.
Your antenna at the beginning should be a single wire that's around 25 feet high and about 75 feet long. This antenna will have a capacity of about 0.0001 microfarads. If you prefer an antenna made of two wires spaced about three feet apart, I’d suggest making it about 75 feet long. Bring down a lead from each wire, twisting them together into a pigtail to function like a single wire, except near the horizontal part of the antenna.

Your ground connection can go to a water pipe. To protect the house and your apparatus from lightning insert a fuse and a little carbon block lightning arrester such as are used by the telephone company in their installations of house phones. You can also use a so-called “vacuum lightning arrester.” In either 213case the connections will be as shown in Fig. 111. If you use a loop antenna, of course, no arrester is needed.
Your ground connection can be attached to a water pipe. To protect your home and equipment from lightning, install a fuse and a small carbon block lightning arrester, similar to what the telephone company uses in their home phone setups. You can also use a “vacuum lightning arrester.” In either 213 case, the connections will be as shown in Fig. 111. If you're using a loop antenna, no arrester is required.
At first I would plan to receive signals between 150 meters and 360 meters. This will include the amateurs who work between 160 and 200 m., the special amateurs who send C-W telegraph at 275 m., and the broadcasting stations which operate at 360 m. This range will give you plenty to listen to while you are experimenting. In addition you will get some ship signals at 300 m.
At first, I planned to receive signals between 150 meters and 360 meters. This will include the hobbyists who operate between 160 and 200 m, the specialized amateur operators who send C-W telegraph at 275 m, and the broadcast stations that run at 360 m. This range will provide you with plenty to listen to while you experiment. Plus, you'll also pick up some ship signals at 300 m.

To tune the antenna to any of the wave lengths in this range you can use a coil of 75 turns wound on a cardboard tube of three and a half inches in diameter. You can wind this coil of bare wire if you are careful, winding a thread along with the wire so as to keep the successive turns separated. In that case you will need to construct a sliding contact for it. That is the simplest form of tuner.
To adjust the antenna to any of the wavelengths in this range, you can use a coil of 75 turns wound on a cardboard tube that’s three and a half inches in diameter. You can wind this coil with bare wire if you’re careful, adding a thread alongside the wire to keep the turns from touching each other. In that case, you’ll need to build a sliding contact for it. That’s the simplest type of tuner.
On the other hand you can wind with single silk covered wire and bring out taps at the 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 21410, 14, 20, 28, 36, 44, 56, 66, and 75th turns. To make a tap drill a small hole through the tube, bend the wire into a loop about a foot long and pull this loop through the hole as shown in Fig. 110. Then give the wire a twist, as shown, so that it can’t pull out, and proceed with your winding.
On the other hand, you can wind with a single silk-covered wire and create taps at the 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 21410, 14, 20, 28, 36, 44, 56, 66, and 75 turns. To create a tap, drill a small hole through the tube, bend the wire into a loop about a foot long, and pull this loop through the hole as shown in Fig. 110. Then give the wire a twist, as demonstrated, so that it can't pull out, and continue with your winding.
Use 26 s. s. c. wire. You will need about 80 feet and might buy 200 to have enough for the secondary coil. Make contacts to the taps by two rotary switches as shown in Fig. 112. You can buy switch arms and contacts studs or a complete switch mounted on a small panel of some insulating compound. Let switch S1 make the contacts for taps between 14 and 75 turns, and let switch S2 make the other contacts.
Use 26 s.s.c. wire. You'll need about 80 feet, but you might want to buy 200 to have enough for the secondary coil. Connect the taps using two rotary switches as shown in Fig. 112. You can purchase switch arms and contact studs or a complete switch mounted on a small panel made of some insulating material. Let switch S1 connect the taps between 14 and 75 turns, and let switch S2 handle the other connections.
For the secondary coil use the same size of wire and of core. Wind 60 turns, bringing out a tap at the middle. To tune the secondary circuit you will need a variable condenser. You can buy one of the small ones with a maximum capacity of about 0.0003 mf., one of the larger ones with a maximum capacity of 0.0005 mf., or even the larger size which has a maximum capacity of 0.001 mf. I should prefer the one of 0.0005 mf.
For the secondary coil, use the same size wire and core. Wind 60 turns, and take a tap from the middle. To tune the secondary circuit, you will need a variable capacitor. You can buy one of the small ones with a maximum capacity of about 0.0003 µF, one of the larger ones with a maximum capacity of 0.0005 µF, or even the biggest one which has a maximum capacity of 0.001 µF. I would recommend the one with 0.0005 µF.
You will need a crystal detector–I should try galena first–and a so-called “cat’s whisker” with which to make contact with the galena. For these parts and for the switch mentioned above you can shop around to advantage. For telephone receivers I would buy a really good pair with a resistance of about 2500 ohms. Buy also a small mica condenser 215of 0.002 mf. for a blocking condenser. Your entire outfit will then look as in Fig. 112. The switch S is a small knife switch.
You’ll need a crystal detector—I’d recommend starting with galena—and a “cat’s whisker” to make contact with the galena. You can shop around to find the best deals for these parts and the switch mentioned earlier. For telephone receivers, I suggest getting a really good pair with a resistance of about 2500 ohms. Also, buy a small mica condenser 215 with a capacity of 0.002 mf for use as a blocking condenser. Your whole setup will then look like in Fig. 112. The switch S is a small knife switch.
To operate, leave the switch S open, place the primary and secondary coils near together as in the figure and listen. The tuning is varied, while you listen, by moving the slider of the slide-wire tuner or by moving the switches if you have connected your coil for that method. Make large changes in the tuning by varying the switch S1 and then turn slowly through all positions of S2, listening at each position.
To operate, keep the switch S open, place the primary and secondary coils close together as shown in the figure, and listen. Adjust the tuning while you listen by sliding the slider on the slide-wire tuner or by changing the switches if you've set up your coil for that method. Make significant adjustments in the tuning by changing the switch S1 and then slowly turn through all the positions of S2, listening at each position.

When a signal is heard adjust to the position of S1 and S2 which gives the loudest signal and then closing S start to tune the secondary circuit. To do this, vary the capacity of the condenser in the secondary circuit. Don’t change the primary tuning until you have tuned the secondary and can get the signal with good volume, that is loud. You will want to vary the position of the primary and secondary coils, that is, vary their coupling, for you will get sharper tuning as they are drawn farther apart. Sharper tuning means less interference from other stations which are sending on wave lengths near that which you wish to receive. Reduce the coupling, therefore, and then readjust the tuning. It will usually be necessary to make a slight change in both circuits, in one 216 case with switch S1 and in the other with the variable condenser.
When you hear a signal, adjust the position of S1 and S2 to get the loudest signal, then close S and start tuning the secondary circuit. To do this, change the capacity of the condenser in the secondary circuit. Don’t adjust the primary tuning until you've tuned the secondary and can receive a strong signal. You’ll also want to vary the position of the primary and secondary coils, meaning adjust their coupling, as pulling them farther apart will give you sharper tuning. Sharper tuning results in less interference from other stations transmitting on wavelengths close to the one you’re trying to receive. So, reduce the coupling and then readjust the tuning. Usually, you’ll need to make slight changes in both circuits, once with switch S1 and the other with the variable condenser.
As soon as you can identify any station which you hear sending make a note of the position of the switches S1 and S2, and of the setting of the condenser in the secondary circuit. In that way you will acquire information as to the proper adjustments to receive certain wave-lengths. This is calibrating your set by the known wave-lengths of distant stations.
As soon as you can identify any station that you hear broadcasting, note the positions of the switches S1 and S2, as well as the setting of the capacitor in the secondary circuit. This way, you'll gather information on the right adjustments needed to receive specific wavelengths. This process is calibrating your set using the known wavelengths of distant stations.
After learning to receive with this simple set I should recommend buying a good audion tube. Ask the seller to supply you with a blue print of the characteristic[11] of the tube taken under the conditions of filament current and plate voltage which he recommends for its use. Buy a storage battery and a small slide-wire rheostat, that is variable resistance, to use in the filament circuit. Buy also a bank of dry batteries of the proper voltage for the plate circuit of the tube. At the same time you should buy the proper design of transformer to go between the plate circuit of your tube and the pair of receivers which you have. It will usually be advisable to ask the dealer to show you a characteristic curve for the transformer, which will indicate how well the transformer operates at the different frequencies in the audio range. It should operate very nearly the same for all frequencies between 200 and 2500 cycles.
After getting comfortable with this basic setup, I recommend buying a good audio tube. Ask the seller for a blueprint of the tube's characteristics[11] under the recommended filament current and plate voltage conditions. Purchase a storage battery and a small variable resistor, also known as a slide-wire rheostat, for the filament circuit. Also, buy a bank of dry batteries with the right voltage for the tube's plate circuit. Additionally, you should get the appropriate transformer to connect between your tube's plate circuit and the pair of receivers you have. It's a good idea to ask the dealer for a characteristic curve for the transformer, which will show how well it performs at different frequencies within the audio range. It should work almost the same for all frequencies between 200 and 2500 cycles.
The next step is to learn to use the tube as a217 detector. Connect it into your secondary circuit instead of the crystal detector. Use the proper value of C-battery as determined from your study of the characteristic of the tube. One or two small dry cells, which have binding-post terminals are convenient C-batteries. If you think you will need a voltage much different from that obtained with a whole number of batteries you can arrange to supply the grid as we did in Fig. 86 of Letter 18. In that case you can use a few feet of 30 German-silver wire and make connections to it with a suspender clip. Learn to receive with the tube and be particularly careful not to let the filament have too much current and burn out.
The next step is to learn to use the tube as a 217 detector. Connect it to your secondary circuit instead of the crystal detector. Use the appropriate value of C-battery as determined from your study of the tube's characteristics. One or two small dry cells with binding-post terminals are convenient C-batteries. If you think you’ll need a voltage that's significantly different from what you get with a whole number of batteries, you can set up the grid supply like we did in Fig. 86 of Letter 18. In that case, use a few feet of 30 gauge German-silver wire and connect to it with a suspender clip. Learn to receive with the tube, and be especially careful not to let the filament draw too much current and burn out.
Now buy some more apparatus. You will need a grid condenser of about 0.0002 mf. The grid leaks to go with it you can make for yourself. I would use a piece of brown wrapping paper and two little metal eyelets. The eyelets can be punched into the paper. Between them coat the paper with carbon ink, or with lead pencil marks. A line about an inch long ought to serve nicely. You will probably wish to make several grid leaks to try. When you get satisfactory operation in receiving by the grid-condenser method the leak will probably be somewhere between a megohm and two megohms.
Now buy some more equipment. You'll need a grid condenser that's about 0.0002 mf. You can make the grid leaks yourself. I would use a piece of brown wrapping paper and two small metal eyelets. You can punch the eyelets into the paper. Between them, coat the paper with carbon ink or use lead pencil marks. A line about an inch long should work well. You'll probably want to make several grid leaks to experiment with. Once you achieve satisfactory reception with the grid-condenser method, the leak will likely be somewhere between one megohm and two megohms.
For this method you will not want a C-battery, but you will wish to operate the detector with about as high a voltage as the manufacturers will recommend for the plate circuit. In this way the incoming signal, which decreases the plate current, can 218produce the largest decrease. It is also possible to start with the grid slightly positive instead of being as negative as it is when connected to the negative terminal of the A-battery. There will then be possible a greater change in grid voltage. To do so connect the grid as in Fig. 115 to the positive terminal of the A-battery.
For this method, you won't need a C-battery, but you should run the detector at nearly the highest voltage that the manufacturers recommend for the plate circuit. This way, the incoming signal, which reduces the plate current, can 218create the largest reduction. You can also start with the grid slightly positive instead of making it as negative as it is when connected to the negative terminal of the A-battery. This will allow for a greater change in grid voltage. To do this, connect the grid as shown in Fig. 115 to the positive terminal of the A-battery.

About this time I would shop around for two or three small double-pole double-throw switches. Those of the 5-ampere size will do. With these you can arrange to make comparisons between different methods of receiving. Suppose, for example, you connect the switches as shown in Fig. 113 so that by throwing them to the left you are using the audion and to the right the crystal as a detector. You can listen for a minute in one position and then switch and listen for a minute in the other position, and so on back and forth. That way you can tell whether or not you really are getting better results.
About this time, I would look for two or three small double-pole double-throw switches. The 5-amp size will work. With these, you can set up a way to compare different methods of receiving. For example, if you connect the switches as shown in Fig. 113, by flipping them to the left, you're using the audion as the detector, and to the right, you're using the crystal. You can listen for a minute in one position, then switch and listen for a minute in the other position, and keep alternating. That way, you can see if you're really getting better results.
If you want a rough measure of how much better the audion is than the crystal you might see, while you are listening to the audion, how much you can rob the telephone receiver of its current and still hear as well as you do when you switch back to the crystal. The easiest way to do this is to put a variable resistance across the receiver as shown in Fig. 113. Adjust this resistance until the intensity of the signal when detected by the audion is the same as for the crystal. You adjust this variable resistance until it by-passes so much of the current, which formerly went through the receiver, that the “audibility” of the signal is reduced until it is the same as for the crystal detector. Carefully made resistances for such a purpose are sold under the name of “audibility meters.” You can assemble a resistance which will do fairly well if you will buy a small rheostat which will give a resistance varying by steps of ten ohms from zero to one hundred ohms. At the same time you can buy four resistance spools of one hundred ohms each and perhaps one of 500 ohms. The spools need not be very expensive for you do not need carefully adjusted resistances. Assemble them so as to make a rheostat with a range of 0-1000 ohms by steps of 10 ohms. The cheapest way to mount is with Fahnestock clips as illustrated in Fig. 114. After a while, however, you will probably wish to mount them in a box with a rotary switch on top.
If you want a rough idea of how much better the audion is compared to the crystal, listen to the audion and see how much you can reduce the current to the telephone receiver while still hearing clearly, then switch back to the crystal. The easiest way to do this is by connecting a variable resistance across the receiver, as shown in Fig. 113. Adjust this resistance until the signal strength detected by the audion matches that of the crystal. You adjust the variable resistance until it diverts enough current away from the receiver so that the "audibility" of the signal is reduced to the same level as with the crystal detector. Well-made resistances for this purpose are sold as "audibility meters." You can create a functional setup if you buy a small rheostat that gives you resistance levels in increments of ten ohms from zero to one hundred ohms. Additionally, you can get four resistance spools of one hundred ohms each, and maybe one of 500 ohms. The spools don't need to be very expensive because you don't require precision resistances. Set them up to form a rheostat with a range of 0-1000 ohms in increments of 10 ohms. The most economical way to mount them is with Fahnestock clips, as shown in Fig. 114. After some time, though, you might want to put them in a box with a rotary switch on top.

To study the effect of the grid condenser you can arrange switches so as to insert this condenser and its leak and at the same time to cut out the C-battery. Fig. 115 shows how. You can measure the gain in audibility at the same time.
To study the effect of the grid condenser, you can set up switches to connect this condenser and its leak while also disconnecting the C-battery. Fig. 115 illustrates how to do this. You can measure the increase in audibility at the same time.

Pl. X.–Audio-frequency Transformer and Banked-wound Coil. (Courtesy of Pacent Electric Co.)
Pl. X.–Audio-frequency Transformer and Banked-wound Coil. (Thanks to Pacent Electric Co.)

219After learning to use the audion as a detector, both by virtue of its curved characteristic and by the grid-condenser method, I would suggest studying the same tube as an amplifier. First I would learn to use it as an audio-frequency amplifier. Set up the crystal detector circuit. Use your audio-frequency transformer the other way around so as to step up to the grid. Put the telephone in the plate circuit. Choose your C-battery for amplification and not detection and try to receive.
219After learning to use the audion as a detector, both because of its curved characteristic and the grid-condenser method, I recommend studying the same tube as an amplifier. First, I would learn to use it as an audio-frequency amplifier. Set up the crystal detector circuit. Use your audio-frequency transformer in reverse to boost to the grid. Connect the telephone in the plate circuit. Choose your C-battery for amplification and not detection and try to receive.
You will get better results if you can afford another iron-core transformer. If you can, buy one which will work between the plate circuit of one vacuum tube and the grid circuit of another similar tube. Then you will have the right equipment when you come to make a two-stage audio-frequency amplifier. If you buy such a transformer use the other transformer between plate and telephones as you did before and insert the new one as shown in Fig. 116. 220This circuit also shows how you can connect the switches so as to see how much the audion is amplifying.
You’ll get better results if you can get another iron-core transformer. If you can, buy one that will work between the plate circuit of one vacuum tube and the grid circuit of another similar tube. This will give you the right setup when you’re making a two-stage audio-frequency amplifier. If you get such a transformer, use the other one between the plate and the headphones as you did before, and insert the new one as shown in Fig. 116. 220 This circuit also shows how you can connect the switches to see how much the audion is amplifying.

The next step is to use the audion as an amplifier of the radio-signal before its detection. Use the proper C-battery for an amplifier, as determined from the blue print of the tube characteristic. Connect the tube as shown in Fig. 117. You will see that in this circuit we are using a choke coil to keep the radio-frequency current out of the battery part of the plate circuit and a small condenser, another one of 0.002 mf., to keep the battery current from the crystal detector. You can see from the same figure how you can arrange the switches so as to find whether or not you are getting any gain from the amplifier.
The next step is to use the audion as an amplifier for the radio signal before it's detected. Use the correct C-battery for the amplifier, as indicated in the tube characteristics blueprint. Connect the tube as shown in Fig. 117. In this circuit, we’re using a choke coil to keep the radio-frequency current out of the battery part of the plate circuit, along with a small condenser, another one of 0.002 mf., to prevent the battery current from interfering with the crystal detector. You can refer to the same figure to see how to arrange the switches to check if you're getting any gain from the amplifier.
221Now you are ready to receive those C-W senders at 275 meters. You will need to wind another coil like the secondary coil you already have. Here is where you buy another condenser. You will need it later. If before you bought the 0.0005 size, this time buy the 0.001 size or vice versa. Wind also a small coil for a tickler. About 20 turns of 26 wire on a core of 3-1/2 in. diameter will do. Connect the tickler in the plate circuit of the audion. Connect to the grid your new coil and condenser and set the audion circuit so that it will induce a current in the secondary circuit which supplies the crystal. Fig. 118 shows the hook-up.
221Now you're set to receive those C-W signals at 275 meters. You'll need to wind another coil just like the secondary coil you already have. This is where you'll get another condenser. You'll need it later. If you bought the 0.0005 size before, this time grab the 0.001 size, or vice versa. Also, wind a small coil for a tickler. About 20 turns of 26 gauge wire on a core that’s 3-1/2 inches in diameter will work. Connect the tickler in the plate circuit of the audion. Attach your new coil and condenser to the grid, and adjust the audion circuit so that it induces a current in the secondary circuit that powers the crystal. Fig. 118 shows how to set it up.

You will see that you are now supplying the crystal with current from two sources, namely the distant source of the incoming signals and the local oscillator which you have formed. The crystal will detect the “beat note” between these two currents.
You will see that you are now providing the crystal with current from two sources: the distant source of the incoming signals and the local oscillator you created. The crystal will pick up the “beat note” between these two currents.
To receive the 275 meters signals you will need to make several adjustments at the same time. In the first place I would set the tuning of the antenna 222circuit and of the crystal circuit about where you think right because of your knowledge of the settings for other wave lengths. Then I would get the local oscillator going. You can tell whether or not it is going if you suddenly increase or decrease the coupling between the tickler coil and the input circuit of the audion. If this motion is accompanied by a click in the receivers the tube is oscillating.
To receive the 275-meter signals, you’ll need to make several adjustments at once. First, I’d set the tuning of the antenna 222 circuit and the crystal circuit based on your understanding of the settings for other wavelengths. Next, I’d get the local oscillator running. You can tell if it’s working by whether there’s a sudden increase or decrease in the coupling between the tickler coil and the input circuit of the audion. If this change is accompanied by a click in the receivers, the tube is oscillating.

Now you must change the frequency at which it is oscillating by slowly changing the capacity in the tuned input circuit of the tube. Unless the antenna circuit is properly tuned to the 275 meter signal you will get no results. If it is, you will hear an intermittent musical note for some tune of your local oscillator. This note will have the duration of dots and dashes.
Now you need to adjust the frequency it's oscillating at by gradually changing the capacitance in the tuned input circuit of the tube. If the antenna circuit isn’t correctly tuned to the 275-meter signal, you won’t get any results. If it is, you’ll hear a consistent musical note corresponding to the timing of your local oscillator. This note will vary in duration like dots and dashes.
You will have to keep changing the tuning of your detector circuit and of the antenna. For each new setting very slowly swing the condenser plates in the oscillator circuit and see if you get a signal. It 223will probably be easier to use the “stand-by position,” which I have described, with switch S open in the secondary circuit of Fig. 118. In that case you have only to tune your antenna to 275 meters and then you will pick up a note when your local oscillator is in tune. After you have done so you can tune the secondary circuit which supplies the crystal.
You’ll need to keep adjusting the tuning of your detector circuit and antenna. For each new setting, slowly adjust the condenser plates in the oscillator circuit and check if you get a signal. It 223might be easier to use the “stand-by position” I described, with switch S open in the secondary circuit of Fig. 118. In that case, just tune your antenna to 275 meters and you’ll hear a note when your local oscillator is in tune. After that, you can tune the secondary circuit that powers the crystal.
If you adopt this method you will want a close coupling between the antenna and the crystal circuit. You will always want a very weak coupling between the oscillator circuit and the detector circuit. You will also probably want a weaker coupling between tickler and tube input than you are at first inclined to believe will be enough. Patience and some skill in manipulation is always required for this sort of experiment.
If you use this method, you’ll need a tight connection between the antenna and the crystal circuit. You should always aim for a very weak connection between the oscillator circuit and the detector circuit. You’ll also likely want an even weaker connection between the tickler and the tube input than you might initially think is sufficient. Patience and some skill in handling are always necessary for this kind of experiment.
When you have completed this experiment in heterodyne receiving, using a local oscillator, you are ready to try the regenerative circuit. This has been illustrated in Fig. 92 of Letter 18 and needs no further description. You will have the advantage when you come to this of knowing very closely the proper settings of the antenna circuit and the secondary tuned circuit. You will need then only to adjust the coupling of the tickler and make finer adjustments in your tuning.
When you finish this experiment with heterodyne receiving and a local oscillator, you can move on to the regenerative circuit. This was shown in Fig. 92 of Letter 18 and doesn’t need any more explanation. By the time you get to this stage, you'll already know the right settings for the antenna circuit and the secondary tuned circuit. All you need to do now is adjust the coupling of the tickler and fine-tune your settings.
After you have completed this series of experiments you will be something of an adept at radio and are in a position to plan your final set. For this set you will need to purchase certain parts 224complete from reputable dealers because many of the circuits which I have described are patented and should not be used except as rights to use are obtained by the purchase of licensed apparatus which embodies the patented circuits. Knowing how radio receivers operate and why, you are now in a good condition to discuss with dealers the relative merits and costs of receiving sets.
After completing this series of experiments, you'll be quite skilled in radio and ready to plan your final setup. For this setup, you'll need to buy specific parts 224 from trustworthy dealers because many of the circuits I've described are patented and should only be used if you have the rights, which you can obtain by purchasing licensed equipment that includes those patented circuits. Now that you understand how radio receivers work and why, you're in a good position to talk with dealers about the advantages and costs of different receiving sets.

Before you actually buy a completed set you may want to increase the range of frequency over which you are carrying out your experiments. To receive at longer wave-lengths you will need to increase the inductance of your antenna so that it will be tuned to a lower frequency. This is usually called “loading” and can be done by inserting a coil in the antenna. To obtain smaller wave-lengths decrease the effective capacity of the antenna circuit by putting another condenser in series with the antenna. Usually, therefore, one connects into his antenna circuit both a condenser and a loading coil. By using a variable condenser the effective capacity of the antenna system may be easily changed. The result is that this 225series condenser method becomes the easiest method of tuning and the slide wire tuner is not needed. Fig. 119 shows the circuit.
Before you actually purchase a complete set, you might want to expand the frequency range for your experiments. To receive longer wavelengths, you'll need to increase the inductance of your antenna so it's tuned to a lower frequency. This process is often referred to as “loading” and can be done by adding a coil to the antenna. To achieve shorter wavelengths, reduce the effective capacity of the antenna circuit by placing another capacitor in series with the antenna. Typically, you would connect both a capacitor and a loading coil into your antenna circuit. By using a variable capacitor, you can easily adjust the effective capacity of the antenna system. As a result, this 225 series capacitor approach becomes the simplest method for tuning, eliminating the need for a slide wire tuner. Fig. 119 illustrates the circuit.
For quite a range of wave-lengths we may use the same loading coil and tune the antenna circuit entirely by this series condenser. For some other range of wave-lengths we shall then need a different loading coil. In a well-designed set the wave-length ranges overlap. The calculation of the size of loading coil is quite easy but requires more arithmetic than I care to impose on you at present. I shall therefore merely give you illustrations based on the assumption that your antenna has a capacity of 0.0001 or of 0.0002 mf. and that the condensers which you have bought are 0.0005 and 0.001 for their maxima.
For a wide range of wavelengths, we can use the same loading coil and adjust the antenna circuit solely with this series capacitor. For some other range of wavelengths, we will need a different loading coil. In a well-designed system, the wavelength ranges overlap. Calculating the size of the loading coil is quite simple but involves more math than I want to burden you with right now. So, I’ll just provide examples based on the assumption that your antenna has a capacitance of 0.0001 or 0.0002 microfarads, and that the capacitors you’ve purchased have maximum values of 0.0005 and 0.001 microfarads.
In Table I there is given, for each of several values of the inductance of the primary coil, the shortest and the longest wave-lengths which you can expect to receive. The table is in two parts, the first for an antenna of capacity 0.0001 mf. and the second for one of 0.0002 mf. Yours will be somewhere between these two limits. The shortest wave-length depends upon the antenna and not upon the condenser which you use in series with it for tuning. It also depends upon how much inductance there is in the coil which you have in the antenna circuit. The table gives values of inductance in the first column, and of minimum wave-length in the second. The third column shows what is the greatest wave-length you may expect if you use a tuning condenser of 0.0005 mf.; and the fourth column the slightly 226large wave-length which is possible with the larger condenser.
In Table I, you can find, for several values of the primary coil's inductance, the shortest and longest wavelengths you might expect to receive. The table is divided into two parts: the first for an antenna with a capacity of 0.0001 microfarads, and the second for one with a capacity of 0.0002 microfarads. Your antenna will likely fall somewhere between these two ranges. The shortest wavelength is determined by the antenna, not by the capacitor used for tuning in series with it. It also depends on the amount of inductance in the coil within the antenna circuit. The table lists inductance values in the first column and minimum wavelengths in the second. The third column indicates the longest wavelength you can expect when using a tuning capacitor of 0.0005 microfarads, while the fourth column shows the slightly larger wavelength possible with the larger capacitor.
TABLE I | |||
Part 1. (For antenna of 0.0001 mf.) | |||
Inductance in mil-henries |
Shortest wave-length in meters. |
Longest wave-length in meters with 0.0005 mf. |
Longest wave-length in meters with 0.001 mf. |
0.10 | 103 | 169 | 179 |
0.20 | 146 | 238 | 253 |
0.40 | 207 | 337 | 358 |
0.85 | 300 | 490 | 515 |
1.80 | 400 | 700 | 760 |
2.00 | 420 | 750 | 800 |
4.00 | 600 | 1080 | 1130 |
5.00 | 660 | 1200 | 1260 |
10.00 | 900 | 1700 | 1790 |
30.00 | 1600 | 2900 | 3100 |
Part 2. (For antenna of 0.0002 mf.) | |||
0.10 | 169 | 225 | 240 |
0.16 | 210 | 285 | 305 |
0.20 | 240 | 320 | 340 |
0.25 | 270 | 355 | 380 |
0.40 | 340 | 450 | 480 |
0.60 | 420 | 550 | 590 |
0.80 | 480 | 630 | 680 |
1.20 | 585 | 775 | 840 |
1.80 | 720 | 950 | 1020 |
3.00 | 930 | 1220 | 1320 |
5.00 | 1200 | 1600 | 1700 |
8.00 | 1500 | 2000 | 2150 |
12.00 | 1850 | 2400 | 2650 |
16.00 | 2150 | 2800 | 3050 |
From Table I you can find how much inductance you will need in the primary circuit. A certain amount you will need to couple the antenna and the secondary circuit. The coil which you wound at the beginning of your experiments will do well for that. Anything more in the way of inductance, which the antenna circuit requires to give a desired wave-length, you may consider as loading. In Table II are some data as to winding coils on straight 227cores to obtain various values of inductance. Your 26 s. s. c. wire will wind about 54 turns to the inch. I have assumed that you will have this number of turns per inch on your coils and calculated the inductance which you should get for various numbers of total turns. The first part of the table is for a core of 3.5 inches in diameter and the second part for one of 5 inches. The first column gives the inductance in mil-henries. The second gives number of turns. The third and fourth are merely for convenience and give the approximate length in inches of the coil and the approximate total length of wire which is required to wind it. I have allowed for bringing out taps. In other words 550 feet of the wire will wind a coil of 10.2 inches with an inductance of 8.00 mil-henries, and permit you to bring out taps at all the lower values of inductance which are given in the table.
From Table I, you can see how much inductance you'll need in the primary circuit. You'll need a certain amount to connect the antenna and the secondary circuit. The coil you made at the beginning of your experiments will work well for that. Any additional inductance required by the antenna circuit to achieve a desired wavelength can be considered as loading. In Table II, you'll find some data about winding coils on straight 227 cores to get different values of inductance. Your 26 s. s. c. wire will have about 54 turns per inch. I assumed you'll have this number of turns per inch on your coils and calculated the inductance you should achieve for different total turn counts. The first part of the table is for a core that's 3.5 inches in diameter, and the second part is for one that's 5 inches. The first column shows the inductance in mil-henries. The second column lists the number of turns. The third and fourth columns are for convenience, showing the approximate length in inches of the coil and the estimated total length of wire needed to wind it. I accounted for bringing out taps. In other words, 550 feet of wire will wind a coil of 10.2 inches with an inductance of 8.00 mil-henries and allow you to bring out taps at all the lower inductance values provided in the table.
TABLE II | |||
Part 1. (For a core of 3.5 in. diam.) | |||
Inductance in mil-henries |
Number of turns |
Length in inches |
Feet of wire required. |
0.10 | 25 | 0.46 | 25 |
0.16 | 34 | 0.63 | 36 |
0.20 | 39 | 0.72 | 42 |
0.25 | 44 | 0.81 | 49 |
0.40 | 58 | 1.07 | 63 |
0.60 | 75 | 1.38 | 80 |
0.80 | 92 | 1.70 | 100 |
0.85 | 96 | 1.78 | 104 |
1.00 | 108 | 2.00 | 118 |
1.20 | 123 | 2.28 | 133 |
1.80 | 164 | 3.03 | 176 |
2.00 | 180 | 3.33 | 190 |
3.00 | 242 | 4.48 | 250 |
4.00 | 304 | 5.62 | 310 |
5.00 | 366 | 6.77 | 370 |
8.00 | 550 | 10.20 | 550 |
Part 2. (For a core of 5.0 in. diam.) | |||
2.00 | 120 | 2.22 | 160 |
3.00 | 158 | 2.93 | 215 |
4.00 | 194 | 3.58 | 265 |
5.00 | 228 | 4.22 | 310 |
8.00 | 324 | 6.00 | 450 |
10.00 | 384 | 7.10 | 530 |
12.00 | 450 | 8.30 | 625 |
228The coil which you wound at the beginning of your experiment had only 75 turns and was tapped so that you could, by manipulating the two switches of Fig. 112, get small variations in inductance. In Table III is given the values of the inductance which is controlled by the switches of that figure, the corresponding number of turns, and the wave-length to which the antenna should then be tuned. I am giving this for two values of antenna capacity, as I have done before. By the aid of these three tables you should have small difficulty in taking care of matters of tuning for all wave-lengths below about 3000 meters. If you want to get longer waves than that you had better buy a few banked-wound coils. These are coils in which the turns are wound over each other but in such a way as to avoid in large part the “capacity effects” which usually accompany such winding. You can try winding them for yourself but I doubt if the experience has much value until you have gone farther in the study of the mathematical theory of radio than this series of letters will carry you.
228The coil you made at the start of your experiment had just 75 turns and was designed so that you could make small adjustments in inductance by using the two switches in Fig. 112. Table III provides the inductance values controlled by those switches, the corresponding number of turns, and the wavelength the antenna should be tuned to. I’m offering this for two values of antenna capacity, just like I did before. With the help of these three tables, you shouldn’t have much trouble handling tuning matters for all wavelengths below about 3000 meters. If you want to work with longer waves, it’s better to get some banked-wound coils. These coils have the turns wound over each other but are made in such a way as to largely avoid the "capacity effects" that usually come with that kind of winding. You can try winding them yourself, but I doubt that the experience will be very useful until you've progressed further in studying the mathematical theory of radio beyond what this series of letters can cover.
TABLE III | |||
Circuit of Fig. 112 | |||
Number | Inductance in | Wavelength with antenna of | |
of turns | mil-henries | 0.0001 mf. | 0.0002 mf. |
14 | 0.04 | 120 | 170 |
20 | 0.07 | 160 | 220 |
28 | 0.12 | 210 | 290 |
36 | 0.18 | 250 | 360 |
44 | 0.25 | 300 | 420 |
56 | 0.38 | 370 | 520 |
75 | 0.60 | 460 | 650 |
In the secondary circuit there is only one capacity, that of the variable condenser. If it has a range of values from about 0.00005 mf. to 0.0005 mf. your coil of 60 turns and 0.42 mf. permits a range of wave-lengths from 270 to 860 m. Using half the coil the range is 150 to 480 m. With the larger condenser the ranges are respectively 270 to 1220 and 270 to 670. For longer wave-lengths load with inductance. Four times the inductance will tune to double these wave-lengths.
In the secondary circuit, there's only one capacity, which is from the variable condenser. If it has a range of values from about 0.00005 mf to 0.0005 mf, your 60-turn coil and 0.42 mf allow for a range of wavelengths from 270 to 860 m. Using half the coil gives a range of 150 to 480 m. With the larger condenser, the ranges become 270 to 1220 m and 270 to 670 m, respectively. For longer wavelengths, add inductance. Four times the inductance will tune to double these wavelengths.
If you can afford to buy, or if you can borrow, ammeters and voltmeters of the proper range you should take the characteristic yourself.
If you can buy, or if you can borrow, ammeters and voltmeters of the right range, you should take the measurements yourself.
230LETTER 22
High-powered radio phone transmitters
My Dear Experimenter:
My Dear Experimenter
This letter is to summarize the operations which must be performed in radio-telephone transmission and reception; and also to describe the circuit of an important commercial system.
This letter summarizes the operations needed for radio-telephone transmission and reception, as well as describes the circuit of a key commercial system.
To transmit speech by radio three operations are necessary. First, there must be generated a high-frequency alternating current; second, this current must be modulated, that is, varied in intensity in accordance with the human voice; and third, the modulated current must be supplied to an antenna. For efficient operation, of course, the antenna must be tuned to the frequency which is to be transmitted. There is also a fourth operation which is usually performed and that is amplification. Wherever the electrical effect is smaller than desired, or required for satisfactory transmission, vacuum tubes are used as amplifiers. Of this I shall give you an illustration later.
To send speech over the radio, three steps are needed. First, a high-frequency alternating current must be generated; second, this current must be modulated, meaning it’s adjusted in intensity to match the human voice; and third, the modulated current needs to be sent to an antenna. For the system to work well, the antenna has to be tuned to the frequency being transmitted. There’s also a fourth step that's typically done, which is amplification. Whenever the electrical effect is weaker than needed for effective transmission, vacuum tubes are used as amplifiers. I’ll provide an example of this later.
Three operations are also essential in receiving. First, an antenna must be so arranged and tuned as to receive energy from the distant transmitting station. There is then in the receiving antenna a current similar in wave form to that in the transmitting 231antenna. Second, the speech significance of this current must be detected, that is, the modulated current must be demodulated. A current is then obtained which has the same wave form as the human voice which was the cause of the modulation at the distant station. The third operation is performed by a telephone receiver which makes the molecules of air in its neighborhood move back and forth in accordance with the detected current. As you already know a fourth operation may be carried on by amplifiers which give on their output sides currents of greater strength but of the same forms as they receive at their input terminals.
Three key operations are crucial in receiving. First, an antenna needs to be properly positioned and tuned to capture energy from the distant transmitting station. This way, the receiving antenna produces a current that resembles the wave form of the transmitting 231antenna. Second, the meaning of this current needs to be detected, which means the modulated current must be demodulated. This results in a current that mirrors the wave form of the human voice that modulated the signal at the distant station. The third operation occurs in a telephone receiver, which causes the air molecules nearby to move back and forth according to the detected current. As you already know, a fourth operation can take place with amplifiers that output stronger currents while maintaining the same wave forms they receive at their input terminals.
In transmitting and in receiving equipment two or more of these operations may be performed by the same vacuum tube as you will remember from our discussion of the regenerative circuit for receiving. For example, also, in any receiving set the vacuum tube which detects is usually amplifying. In the regenerative circuit for receiving continuous waves by the heterodyne method the vacuum tube functions as a generator of high-frequency current and as a detector of the variations in current which occur because the locally-generated current does not keep in step with that generated at the transmitting station.
In transmitting and receiving equipment, one vacuum tube can perform two or more of these operations, as we discussed in our talk about the regenerative circuit for receiving. For instance, in any receiver, the vacuum tube that detects signals typically also amplifies them. In the regenerative circuit used for receiving continuous waves through the heterodyne method, the vacuum tube works both as a generator of high-frequency current and as a detector of the variations in current, which happen because the locally-generated current doesn't perfectly sync with the current generated at the transmitting station.
Another example of a vacuum tube performing simultaneously two different functions is illustrated in Fig. 120 which shows a simple radio-telephone transmitter. The single tube performs in itself both the generation of the radio-frequency current and its 232modulation in accordance with the output of the carbon-button transmitter. This audion is in a feed-back circuit, the oscillation frequency of which depends upon the condenser C and the inductance L. The voice drives the diaphragm of the transmitter and thus varies the resistance of the carbon button. This varies the current from the battery, BA, through the primary, T1, of the transformer T. The result is a varying voltage applied to the grid by the secondary T2. The oscillating current in the plate circuit of the audion varies accordingly because it is dependent upon the grid voltage. The condenser CR offers a low impedance to the radio-frequency current to which the winding T2 of audio-frequency transformer offers too much.
Another example of a vacuum tube doing two different jobs at the same time is shown in Fig. 120, which features a basic radio-telephone transmitter. The single tube handles both the creation of the radio-frequency current and its 232 modulation based on the output from the carbon-button transmitter. This audion is part of a feedback circuit, where the oscillation frequency depends on the capacitor C and the inductance L. The voice moves the diaphragm of the transmitter, which changes the resistance of the carbon button. This change affects the current from the battery, BA, flowing through the primary, T1, of the transformer T. The result is a fluctuating voltage applied to the grid by the secondary T2. The oscillating current in the plate circuit of the audion varies as well because it relies on the grid voltage. The capacitor CR presents low impedance to the radio-frequency current, while the winding T2 of the audio-frequency transformer presents too much.

In this case the tube is both generator and “modulator.” In some cases these operations are separately performed by different tubes. This was true of the transmitting set used in 1915 when the engineers of the Bell Telephone System talked by radio from Arlington, near Washington, D. C., to Paris and Honolulu. I shall not draw out completely the circuit of their apparatus but I shall describe it by 233using little squares to represent the parts responsible for each of the several operations.
In this case, the tube acts as both a generator and a “modulator.” In some instances, these functions are carried out by separate tubes. This was the case with the transmitting setup used in 1915 when the engineers at the Bell Telephone System communicated via radio from Arlington, near Washington, D.C., to Paris and Honolulu. I won’t go into full detail about their circuit, but I will explain it by 233, using small squares to represent each part responsible for the various functions.
First there was a vacuum tube oscillator which generated a small current of the desired frequency. Then there was a telephone transmitter which made variations in a direct-current flowing through the primary of a transformer. The e. m. f. from the secondary of this transformer and the e. m. f. from the radio-frequency oscillator were both impressed upon the grid of an audion which acted as a modulator. The output of this audion was a radio-frequency current modulated by the voice. The output was amplified by a two-stage audion amplifier and supplied through a coupling coil to the large antenna of the U. S. Navy Station at Arlington. Fig. 121 shows the system.
First, there was a vacuum tube oscillator that generated a small current at the desired frequency. Then, there was a telephone transmitter that created variations in the direct current flowing through the primary of a transformer. The electromagnetic force from the secondary of this transformer and the electromagnetic force from the radio-frequency oscillator were both applied to the grid of an audion, which acted as a modulator. The output of this audion was a radio-frequency current modulated by the voice. The output was amplified by a two-stage audion amplifier and sent through a coupling coil to the large antenna of the U.S. Navy Station at Arlington. Fig. 121 shows the system.

The audion amplifiers each consisted of a number of tubes operating in parallel. When tubes are operated in parallel they are connected as shown in Fig. 122 so that the same e. m. f. is impressed on all the grids and the same plate-battery voltage on all the plates. As the grids vary in voltage there is a corresponding variation of current in the plate circuit of each tube. The total change of the current 234in the plate-battery circuit is, then, the sum of the changes in all the plate-filament circuits of the tubes. This scheme of connections gives a result equivalent to that of a single tube with a correspondingly larger plate and filament.
The audio amplifiers each had several tubes working in parallel. When tubes are set up in parallel, they're connected as shown in Fig. 122, so that the same e. m. f. is applied to all the grids and the same plate-battery voltage to all the plates. As the grid voltages change, there's a related variation in the current flowing through the plate circuit of each tube. The total change in current 234 in the plate-battery circuit is then the combined changes from all the plate-filament circuits of the tubes. This connection layout results in an effect similar to that of a single tube with a correspondingly larger plate and filament.

Parallel connection is necessary because a single tube would be overheated in delivering to the antenna the desired amount of power. You remember that when the audion is operated as an amplifier the resistance to which it supplies current is made equal to its own internal resistance of RP. That means that there is in the plate circuit just as much resistance inside the tube as outside. Hence there is the same amount of work done each second in forcing the current through the tube as through the antenna circuit, if that is what the tube supplies. “Work per second” is power; the plate battery is spending energy in the tube at the same rate as it is supplying it to the antenna where it is useful for radiation.
Parallel connection is essential because using a single tube would lead to overheating while delivering the required power to the antenna. Remember, when the audion acts as an amplifier, the resistance it supplies current to matches its own internal resistance of RP. This means the plate circuit has the same resistance inside the tube as it does outside. Therefore, the same amount of work is done each second to push the current through the tube as it is through the antenna circuit, if that's what the tube provides. "Work per second" is power; the plate battery is using energy in the tube at the same rate that it supplies it to the antenna, where it can be effectively radiated.

Pl. XI.–Broadcasting Equipment, Developed by the American Telephone and Telegraph Company and the Western Electric Company.
Pl. XI.–Broadcasting Equipment, Created by the American Telephone and Telegraph Company and the Western Electric Company.
235All the energy expended in the tube appears as heat. It is due to the blows which the electrons strike against the plate when they are drawn across from the filament. These impacts set into more rapid motion the molecules of the plate; and the temperature of the tube rises. There is a limit to the amount the temperature can rise without destroying the tube. For that reason the heat produced inside it must not exceed a certain limit depending upon the design of the tube and the method of cooling it as it is operated. In the Arlington experiments, which I mentioned a moment ago, the tubes were cooled by blowing air on them from fans.
235All the energy used in the tube shows up as heat. This happens because the electrons hit the plate when they move from the filament. These impacts cause the plate's molecules to move faster, which raises the tube's temperature. There’s a maximum temperature the tube can reach before it gets damaged. That’s why the heat produced inside must stay within a certain limit, which depends on the tube's design and how it's cooled while in use. In the Arlington experiments I mentioned earlier, the tubes were cooled by fans blowing air on them.
We can find the power expended in the plate circuit of a tube by multiplying the number of volts in its battery by the number of amperes which flows. Suppose the battery is 250 volts and the current 0.02 amperes, then the power is 5 watts. The “watt” is the unit for measuring power. Tubes are rated by the number of watts which can be safely expended in them. You might ask, when you buy an audion, what is a safe rating for it. The question will not be an important one, however, unless you are to set up a transmitting set since a detector is usually operated with such small plate-voltage as not to have expended in it an amount of power dangerous to its life.
We can find the power used in the plate circuit of a tube by multiplying the voltage of its battery by the current in amperes. For example, if the battery is 250 volts and the current is 0.02 amperes, then the power is 5 watts. The “watt” is the unit for measuring power. Tubes are rated by how many watts they can safely handle. You might wonder what a safe rating is when you buy an audion. However, this question isn't too critical unless you're setting up a transmitting set, since a detector typically operates with such low plate-voltage that it doesn't use a dangerous amount of power.
In recent transmitting sets the tubes are used in parallel for the reasons I have just told, but a different 236method of modulation is used. The generation of the radio-frequency current is by large-powered tubes which are operated with high voltages in their plate circuits. The output of these oscillators is supplied to the antenna. The intensity of the oscillations of the current in these tubes is controlled by changing the voltage applied in their plate circuits. You can see from Fig. 123 that if the plate voltage is changed the strength of the alternating current is changed accordingly. It is the method used in changing the voltage which is particularly interesting.
In modern transmitting equipment, the tubes are used in parallel for the reasons I just mentioned, but a different 236method of modulation is used. The generation of the radio-frequency current is handled by high-powered tubes that operate with high voltages in their plate circuits. The output from these oscillators is sent to the antenna. The strength of the oscillations of the current in these tubes is controlled by adjusting the voltage in their plate circuits. You can see from Fig. 123 that if the plate voltage changes, the strength of the alternating current changes accordingly. What’s particularly interesting is the method used to change the voltage.

The high voltages which are used in the plate circuits of these high-powered audions are obtained from generators instead of batteries. You remember from Letter 20 that an e. m. f. is induced in a coil when the coil and a magnet are suddenly changed in their positions, one being turned with reference to the other. A generator is a machine for turning a coil so that a magnet is always inducing an e. m. f. in it. It is formed by an armature carrying coils and by strong electromagnets. The machine can be 237driven by a steam or gas engine, by a water wheel, or by an electric motor. Generators are designed either to give steady streams of electrons, that is for d-c currents, or to act as alternators.
The high voltages used in the plate circuits of these high-powered audions come from generators instead of batteries. You might remember from Letter 20 that an e.m.f. is created in a coil when the coil and a magnet suddenly change their positions, with one turning in relation to the other. A generator is a machine that turns a coil so that a magnet continuously induces an e.m.f. in it. It consists of an armature that carries coils and strong electromagnets. The machine can be 237powered by a steam or gas engine, a water wheel, or an electric motor. Generators are made to provide steady streams of electrons, meaning they generate d.c. currents, or to function as alternators.

Suppose we have, as shown in Fig. 124, a d-c generator supplying current to a vacuum tube oscillator. The current from the generator passes through an iron-cored choke coil, marked LA in the figure. Between this coil and the plate circuit we connect across the line a telephone transmitter. To make a system which will work efficiently we shall have to suppose that this transmitter has a high resistance, say about the same as the internal resistance, RP, of the tube and also that it can carry as large a current.
Suppose we have, as shown in Fig. 124, a DC generator supplying current to a vacuum tube oscillator. The current from the generator goes through an iron-cored choke coil, labeled LA in the figure. Between this coil and the plate circuit, we connect a telephone transmitter across the line. To create a system that works efficiently, we will need to assume that this transmitter has a high resistance, roughly similar to the internal resistance, RP, of the tube, and that it can handle a large amount of current.
Of the current which comes from the generator about one-half goes to the tube and the rest to the transmitter. If the resistance of the transmitter is increased it can’t take as much current. The coil, LA, however, because of its inductance, tends to keep the same amount of current flowing through itself. For just an instant then the current in LA keeps steady even though the transmitter doesn’t take its share. The result is more current for the oscillating tube. On the other hand if the transmitter takes more current, because its resistance is decreased, 238the choke coil, LA, will momentarily tend to keep the current steady so that what the transmitter takes must be at the expense of the oscillating tube.
Of the current coming from the generator, about half goes to the tube and the rest goes to the transmitter. If the resistance of the transmitter increases, it can’t draw as much current. The coil, LA, however, due to its inductance, tries to maintain the same amount of current flowing through it. For a brief moment, the current in LA remains steady even though the transmitter isn't taking its share. This results in more current for the oscillating tube. Conversely, if the transmitter draws more current because its resistance decreases, 238 the choke coil, LA, will momentarily try to keep the current steady, meaning that what the transmitter takes will be at the expense of the oscillating tube.
That’s one way of looking at what happens. We know, however, from Fig. 123 that to get an increase in the amplitude of the current in the oscillating tube we must apply an increased voltage to its plate circuit. That is what really happens when the transmitter increases in resistance and so doesn’t take its full share of the current. The reason is this: When the transmitter resistance is increased the current in the transmitter decreases. Just for a moment it looks as though the current in LA is going to decrease. That’s the way it looks to the electrons; and you know what electrons do in an inductive circuit when they think they shall have to stop. They induce each other to keep on for a moment. For a moment they act just as if there was some extra e. m. f. which was acting to keep them going. We say, therefore, that there is an extra e. m. f., and we call this an e. m. f. of self-induction. All this time there has been active on the plate circuit of the tube the e. m. f. of the generator. To this there is added at the instant when the transmitter resistance increases, the e. m. f. of self-induction in the coil, LA; and so the total e. m. f. applied to the tube is momentarily increased. This increased e. m. f., of course, results in an increased amplitude for the alternating current which the oscillator is supplying to the transmitting antenna.
That's one way to look at what happens. We know, however, from Fig. 123 that to increase the amplitude of the current in the oscillating tube, we need to apply a higher voltage to its plate circuit. That's what really happens when the transmitter's resistance increases, which means it doesn't draw its full share of the current. The reason is this: when the transmitter's resistance goes up, the current in the transmitter goes down. For a moment, it seems like the current in LA is going to drop. That's how it appears to the electrons; and you know what electrons do in an inductive circuit when they think they have to stop. They induce each other to keep going for a moment. For a brief time, they act as if there's some extra e.m.f. helping them continue. Therefore, we say that there is an extra e.m.f., which we call the e.m.f. of self-induction. All this time, the e.m.f. of the generator has been active on the plate circuit of the tube. To this, when the transmitter's resistance increases, we add the e.m.f. of self-induction in the coil, LA; and so the total e.m.f. applied to the tube is momentarily increased. This increased e.m.f. results in a higher amplitude for the alternating current that the oscillator is supplying to the transmitting antenna.
When the transmitter resistance is decreased, and 239a larger current should flow through the choke coil, the electrons are asked to speed up in going through the coil. At first they object and during that instant they express their objection by an e. m. f. of self-induction which opposes the generator voltage. For an instant, then, the voltage of the oscillating tube is lowered and its alternating-current output is smaller.
When the transmitter resistance is reduced, and 239a larger current is supposed to flow through the choke coil, the electrons are required to move faster as they pass through the coil. Initially, they resist this change, and in that moment, they show their resistance by creating an electromotive force of self-induction that opposes the generator voltage. So, for a brief moment, the voltage of the oscillating tube drops, resulting in a lower alternating-current output.

For the purpose of bringing about such threatened changes in current, and hence such e. m. f.’s of self-induction, the carbon transmitter is not suitable because it has too small a resistance and too small a current carrying ability. The plate circuit of a vacuum tube will serve admirably. You know from the audion characteristic that without changing the plate voltage we can, by applying a voltage to the grid, change the current through the plate circuit. 240Now if it was a wire resistance with which we were dealing and we should be able to obtain a change in current without changing the voltage acting on this wire we would say that we had changed the resistance. We can say, therefore, that the internal resistance of the plate circuit of a vacuum tube can be changed by what we do to the grid.
To bring about the expected changes in current and influence self-induction, the carbon transmitter isn’t suitable because it has too low resistance and current-carrying capacity. The plate circuit of a vacuum tube works perfectly. As you know from the audion characteristic, we can change the current in the plate circuit by applying a voltage to the grid without changing the plate voltage. 240 If we were dealing with a wire resistance and could change the current without altering the voltage acting on that wire, we would say that we have changed the resistance. Therefore, we can conclude that the internal resistance of the plate circuit in a vacuum tube can be altered by what we do to the grid.
In Fig. 125 I have substituted the plate circuit of an audion for the transmitter of Fig. 124 and arranged to vary its resistance by changing the potential of the grid. This we do by impressing upon the grid the e. m. f. developed in the secondary of a transformer, to the primary of which is connected a battery and a carbon transmitter. The current through the primary varies in accordance with the sounds spoken into the transmitter. And for all the reasons which we have just finished studying there are similar variations in the output current of the oscillating tube in the transmitting set of Fig. 125.
In Fig. 125, I've replaced the plate circuit of an audion with the transmitter from Fig. 124 and set it up to adjust its resistance by altering the potential of the grid. We do this by applying the e.m.f. generated in the secondary of a transformer, connected to the primary of which is a battery and a carbon transmitter. The current through the primary changes according to the sounds spoken into the transmitter. And for all the reasons we just studied, there are similar changes in the output current of the oscillating tube in the transmitting set shown in Fig. 125.
In this latter figure you will notice a small air-core coil, LR, between the oscillator and the modulator tube. This coil has a small inductance but it is enough to offer a large impedance to radio-frequency currents. The result is, it does not let the alternating currents of the oscillating tube flow into the modulator. These currents are confined to their own circuit, where they are useful in establishing similar currents in the antenna. On the other hand, the coil LR doesn’t seriously impede low-frequency currents and therefore it does not prevent variations 241 in the current which are at audio-frequency. It does not interfere with the changes in current which accompany the variations in the resistance of the plate circuit of the modulator. That is, it has too little impedance to act like LA and so it permits the modulator to vary the output of the oscillator.
In this latter figure, you’ll see a small air-core coil, LR, positioned between the oscillator and the modulator tube. This coil has a low inductance, but it's sufficient to provide a high impedance to radio-frequency currents. As a result, it prevents the alternating currents from the oscillating tube from flowing into the modulator. These currents are kept within their own circuit, where they effectively create similar currents in the antenna. On the flip side, the coil LR doesn't significantly block low-frequency currents, so it doesn't stop the variations 241 in the current that are at audio frequencies. It doesn't interfere with the current changes that occur alongside the variations in the resistance of the plate circuit of the modulator. In other words, it has too little impedance to function like LA, allowing the modulator to adjust the oscillator's output.

The oscillating circuit of Fig. 125 includes part of the antenna. It differs also from the others I have shown in the manner in which grid and plate circuits are coupled. I’ll explain by Fig. 126.
The oscillating circuit in Fig. 125 includes part of the antenna. It also differs from the other circuits I've shown in how the grid and plate circuits are connected. I'll explain using Fig. 126.
The transmitting set which I have just described involves many of the principles of the most modern sets. If you understand its operation you can probably reason out for yourself any of the other sets of which you will hear from time to time.
The transmitting set I just described includes many principles of the latest models. If you grasp how it works, you can likely figure out any of the other sets you'll hear about from time to time.
242LETTER 23
Intermediate Frequency Amplification
Dear Son:
Dear Son:
In the matter of receiving I have already covered all the important principles. There is one more system, however, which you will need to know. This is spoken of either as the “super-heterodyne” or as the “intermediate-frequency amplification” method of reception.
In terms of receiving, I have already covered all the key principles. However, there is one more system you need to be aware of. This is referred to either as the “super-heterodyne” or the “intermediate-frequency amplification” method of reception.
The system has two important advantages. First, it permits sharper tuning and so reduces interference from other radio signals. Second, it permits more amplification of the incoming signal than is usually practicable.
The system has two major benefits. First, it allows for more precise tuning, which reduces interference from other radio signals. Second, it enables greater amplification of the incoming signal than what is typically achievable.
First as to amplification: We have seen that amplification can be accomplished either by amplifying the radio-frequency current before detection or by amplifying the audio-frequency current which results from detection. There are practical limitations to the amount of amplification which can be obtained in either case. An efficient multi-stage amplifier for radio-frequencies is difficult to build because of what we call “capacity effects.”
First, regarding amplification: We've seen that amplification can happen either by boosting the radio-frequency current before detection or by amplifying the audio-frequency current that comes from detection. There are practical limits to how much amplification can be achieved in either case. Building an efficient multi-stage amplifier for radio frequencies is challenging due to what we refer to as "capacity effects."
Consider for example the portion of circuit shown in Fig. 127. The wires a and b act like small plates of condensers. What we really have, is a lot of 243 tiny condensers which I have shown in the figure by the light dotted-lines. If the wires are transmitting high-frequency currents these condensers offer tiny waiting-rooms where the electrons can run in and out without having to go on to the grid of the next tube. There are other difficulties in high-frequency amplifiers. This one of capacity effects between parallel wires is enough for the present. It is perhaps the most interesting because it is always more or less troublesome whenever a pair of wires is used to transmit an alternating current.
Consider, for example, the part of the circuit shown in Fig. 127. The wires a and b function like small plates of capacitors. What we actually have is a bunch of 243 tiny capacitors, which I’ve illustrated in the figure with light dotted lines. When the wires are carrying high-frequency currents, these capacitors provide tiny waiting areas where electrons can come and go without needing to move on to the grid of the next tube. There are other issues with high-frequency amplifiers. This issue of capacitive effects between parallel wires is sufficient for now. It’s probably the most interesting because it tends to be somewhat troublesome whenever a pair of wires is used to transmit an alternating current.

In the case of a multi-stage amplifier of audio-frequency current there is always the possibility of the amplification of any small variations in current which may naturally occur in the action of the batteries. There are always small variations in the currents from batteries, due to impurities in the materials of the plates, air bubbles, and other causes. Ordinarily we don’t observe these changes because they are too small to make an audible sound in the telephone receivers. Suppose, however, that they take place in the battery of the first tube of a series of amplifiers. Any tiny change of current is amplified many times and results in a troublesome noise in 244the telephone receiver which is connected to the last tube.
In a multi-stage audio amplifier, there's always the chance that any small fluctuations in current from the batteries could be amplified. These tiny variations in battery currents happen due to issues like impurities in the materials of the plates, air bubbles, and other factors. Usually, we don’t notice these changes because they’re too subtle to generate an audible sound in the telephone receivers. But if these fluctuations occur in the battery of the first amplifier tube in a series, even a slight change in current can be amplified significantly, leading to an annoying noise in the telephone receiver connected to the last tube.
In both types of amplifiers there is, of course, always the chance that the output circuit of one tube may be coupled to and induce some effect in the input circuit of one of the earlier tubes of the series. This will be amplified and result in a greater induction. In other words, in a circuit where there is large amplification, there is always the difficulty of avoiding a feed-back of energy from one tube to another so that the entire group acts like an oscillating circuit, that is “regeneratively.” Much of this difficulty can be avoided after experience.
In both types of amplifiers, there's always the chance that the output circuit of one tube might connect to and affect the input circuit of an earlier tube in the series. This will be amplified and lead to even greater induction. In other words, in a circuit with significant amplification, there's always the challenge of preventing energy feedback from one tube to another, causing the entire group to behave like an oscillating circuit, or "regeneratively." Much of this challenge can be managed with experience.
If a multi-stage amplifier is to be built for a current which does not have too high a frequency the “capacity effects” and the other difficulties due to high-frequency need not be seriously troublesome. If the frequency is not too high, but is still well above the audible limit, the noises due to variations in battery currents need not bother for they are of quite low frequency. Currents from 20,000 to 60,000 cycles a second are, therefore, the most satisfactory to amplify.
If a multi-stage amplifier is going to be built for a current that doesn’t have too high of a frequency, the "capacitive effects" and other challenges caused by high frequency won't be too much of a problem. If the frequency isn't too high but is still well above the audible range, the noises from fluctuations in battery currents shouldn't be an issue since they are relatively low frequency. Currents ranging from 20,000 to 60,000 cycles per second are, therefore, the most effective to amplify.
Suppose, however, one wishes to amplify the signals from a radio-broadcasting station. The wave-length is 360 meters and the frequency is about 834,000 cycles a second. The system of intermediate-frequency amplification solves the difficulty and we shall see how it does so.
Suppose, though, someone wants to boost the signals from a radio station. The wavelength is 360 meters and the frequency is around 834,000 cycles per second. The intermediate-frequency amplification system addresses the issue, and we’ll see how it works.

245At the receiving station a local oscillator is used. This generates a frequency which is about 30,000 cycles less than that of the incoming signal. Both currents are impressed on the grid of a detector. The result is, in the output of the detector, a current which has a frequency of 30,000 cycles a second. The intensity of this detected current depends upon the intensity of the incoming signal. The “beat note” current of 30,000 cycles varies, therefore, in accordance with the voice which is modulating at the distant sending station. The speech significance is now hidden in a current of a frequency intermediate between radio and audio. This current may 246be amplified many times and then supplied to the grid of a detector which obtains from it a current of audio-frequency which has a speech significance. In Fig. 128 I have indicated the several operations.
245At the receiving station, a local oscillator is used to generate a frequency that is about 30,000 cycles lower than the incoming signal. Both currents are applied to the grid of a detector. As a result, the output of the detector produces a current with a frequency of 30,000 cycles per second. The strength of this detected current depends on the strength of the incoming signal. The “beat note” current of 30,000 cycles, therefore, fluctuates based on the voice modulating at the distant sending station. The speech content is now embedded in a current of a frequency that falls between radio and audio. This current can 246be amplified significantly and then sent to the grid of a detector, which extracts an audio-frequency current that carries speech content. In Fig. 128, I have outlined the various operations.
We can now see why this method permits sharper tuning. The whole idea of tuning, of course, is to arrange that the incoming signal shall cause the largest possible current and at the same time to provide that any signals at other wave-lengths shall cause only negligible currents. What we want a receiving set to do is to distinguish between two signals which differ slightly in wave-length and to respond to only one of them.
We can now see why this method allows for more precise tuning. The main goal of tuning is to ensure that the incoming signal generates the highest possible current while making sure that signals at other wavelengths produce only minimal currents. What we want a receiver to do is to differentiate between two signals that are slightly different in wavelength and respond to just one of them.
Suppose we set up a tuned circuit formed by a coil and a condenser and try it out for various frequencies of signals. You know how it will respond from our discussion in connection with the tuning curve of Fig. 51 of Letter 13. We might find from a number of such tests that the best we can expect any tuned circuit to do is to discriminate between signals which differ about ten percent in frequency, that is, to receive well the desired signal and to fail practically entirely to receive a signal of a frequency either ten percent higher or the same amount lower.
Suppose we create a tuned circuit using a coil and a capacitor and test it with different signal frequencies. You know how it will respond based on our conversation about the tuning curve in Fig. 51 of Letter 13. From several tests, we might find that the best a tuned circuit can do is differentiate between signals that vary by about ten percent in frequency. This means it will effectively receive the desired signal while almost completely failing to pick up a signal that is either ten percent higher or the same amount lower.
For example, if the signal is at 30,000 cycles a tuned circuit might be expected to discriminate against an interfering signal of 33,000. If the signal is at 300,000 cycles a tuned circuit might discriminate against an interfering signal of 330,000 cycles, but an interference at 303,000 cycles would be very 247troublesome indeed. It couldn’t be “tuned out” at all.
For example, if the signal is at 30,000 cycles, a tuned circuit might be expected to filter out an interfering signal at 33,000. If the signal is at 300,000 cycles, a tuned circuit might filter out an interfering signal at 330,000 cycles, but interference at 303,000 cycles would be very 247troublesome indeed. It couldn’t be “tuned out” at all.
Now suppose that the desired signal is at 300,000 cycles and that there is interference at 303,000 cycles. We provide a local oscillator of 270,000 cycles a second, receive by this “super-heterodyne” method which I have just described, and so obtain an intermediate frequency. In the output of the first detector we have then a current of 300,000–270,000 or 30,000 cycles due to the desired signal and also a current of 303,000–270,000 or 33,000 cycles due to the interference. Both these currents we can supply to another tuned circuit which is tuned for 30,000 cycles a second. It can receive the desired signal but it can discriminate against the interference because now the latter is ten percent “off the tune” of the signal.
Now imagine that the desired signal is at 300,000 cycles and there's interference at 303,000 cycles. We use a local oscillator set to 270,000 cycles per second and receive the signal using this "super-heterodyne" method I've just explained, resulting in an intermediate frequency. In the output of the first detector, we have a current of 300,000 – 270,000, which equals 30,000 cycles from the desired signal, and a current of 303,000 – 270,000, which equals 33,000 cycles from the interference. We can send both these currents to another tuned circuit that is set for 30,000 cycles per second. It can pick up the desired signal while filtering out the interference because the latter is now ten percent "off the tune" from the signal.
You see the question is not one of how far apart two signals are in number of cycles per second. The question always is: How large in percent is the difference between the two frequencies? The matter of separating two effects of different frequencies is a question of the “interval” between the frequencies. To find the interval between two frequencies we divide one by the other. You can see that if the quotient is larger than 1.1 or smaller than 0.9 the frequencies differ by ten percent or more. The higher the frequency the larger the number of cycles which is represented by a given size of interval.
You see, the question isn't really about how far apart two signals are in terms of cycles per second. The question is: How big is the difference between the two frequencies in percent? Separating two effects of different frequencies depends on the “interval” between them. To find the interval between two frequencies, you divide one by the other. If the result is greater than 1.1 or less than 0.9, the frequencies differ by ten percent or more. The higher the frequency, the larger the number of cycles represented by a given size of interval.
While I am writing of frequency intervals I want to tell you one thing more of importance. You remember 248that in human speech there may enter, and be necessary, any frequency between about 200 and 2000 cycles a second. That we might call the range of the necessary notes in the voice. Whenever we want a good reproduction of the voice we must reproduce all the frequencies in this range.
While I'm discussing frequency intervals, I want to mention one more important thing. You remember 248 that in human speech, there can be and often is, a need for any frequency between about 200 and 2000 cycles per second. We can refer to this as the range of necessary notes in the voice. Whenever we want a high-quality reproduction of the voice, we must capture all the frequencies in this range.
Suppose we have a radio-current of 100,000 cycles modulated by the frequencies in the voice range. We find in the output of our transmitting set not only a current of 100,000 cycles but currents in two other ranges of frequencies. One of these is above the signal frequency and extends from 100,200 to 102,000 cycles. The other is the same amount below and extends from 98,000 to 99,800 cycles. We say there is an upper and a lower “band of frequencies.”
Suppose we have a radio wave of 100,000 cycles modulated by frequencies within the voice range. In the output of our transmitting device, we not only find a current of 100,000 cycles but also currents in two other frequency ranges. One of these is above the signal frequency and ranges from 100,200 to 102,000 cycles. The other is the same amount below and ranges from 98,000 to 99,800 cycles. We refer to these as an upper and a lower "band of frequencies."
All these currents are in the complex wave which comes from the radio-transmitter. For this statement you will have to take my word until you can handle the form of mathematics known as “trigonometry.” When we receive at the distant station we receive not only currents of the signal frequency but also currents whose frequencies lie in these “side-bands.”
All these currents are part of the complex wave that comes from the radio transmitter. You'll have to trust me on this until you can grasp the form of math called “trigonometry.” When we receive at the distant station, we catch not just the currents of the signal frequency but also those whose frequencies exist in these “side-bands.”
No matter what radio-frequency we may use we must transmit and receive side-bands of this range if we use the apparatus I have described in the past letters. You can see what that means. Suppose we transmit at a radio-frequency of 50,000 cycles and modulate that with speech. We shall really need all the range from 48,000 cycles to 52,000 cycles for one telephone message. On the other hand if we 249modulated a 500,000 cycle wave by speech the side-bands are from 498,000 to 499,800 and 500,200 to 502,000 cycles. If we transmit at 50,000 cycles, that is, at 6000 meters, we really need all the range between 5770 meters and 6250 meters, as you can see by the frequencies of the side-bands. At 100,000 cycles we need only the range of wave-lengths between 2940 m. and 3060 m. If the radio-frequency is 500,000 cycles we need a still smaller range of wave-lengths to transmit the necessary side-bands. Then the range is from 598 m. to 603 m.
No matter what radio frequency we use, we have to transmit and receive sidebands within this range if we use the equipment I've discussed in previous letters. You can see what that means. For example, if we transmit at a radio frequency of 50,000 cycles and modulate that with speech, we'll actually need the full range from 48,000 cycles to 52,000 cycles for one phone call. On the other hand, if we modulated a 500,000 cycle wave with speech, the sidebands would be from 498,000 to 499,800 and 500,200 to 502,000 cycles. If we transmit at 50,000 cycles, meaning at 6000 meters, we actually need the range between 5770 meters and 6250 meters, as indicated by the frequencies of the sidebands. At 100,000 cycles, we only need the wavelength range between 2940 m and 3060 m. If the radio frequency is 500,000 cycles, we require an even smaller range of wavelengths to transmit the necessary sidebands, which would be from 598 m to 603 m.
In the case of the transmission of speech by radio we are interested in having no interference from other signals which are within 2000 cycles of the frequency of our radio-current no matter what their wave-lengths may be. The part of the wave-length range which must be kept clear from interfering signals becomes smaller the higher the frequency which is being modulated.
In radio communication, we want to avoid interference from other signals that are within 2000 cycles of our radio frequency, regardless of their wavelengths. The range of wavelengths that needs to be free from disruptive signals gets smaller as the frequency we’re modulating increases.
You can see that very few telephone messages can be sent in the long-wave-length part of the radio range and many more, although not very many after all, in the short wave-length part of the radio range. You can also see why it is desirable to keep amateurs in the short wave-length part of the range where more of them can transmit simultaneously without interfering with each other or with commercial radio stations.
You can see that only a limited number of telephone messages can be sent in the long-wave length part of the radio spectrum, and slightly more, though still not a lot, in the short-wave length part. You can also understand why it's preferable to keep amateur operators in the short-wave length section where more of them can transmit at the same time without causing interference with each other or with commercial radio stations.
There is another reason, too, for keeping amateurs to the shortest wave-lengths. Transmission of radio signals over short distances is best accomplished by 250short wave-lengths but over long distances by the longer wave-lengths. For trans-oceanic work the very longest wave-lengths are best. The “long-haul” stations, therefore, work in the frequency range immediately above 10,000 cycles a second and transmit with wave lengths of 30,000 m. and shorter.
There’s another reason for limiting amateurs to the shortest wave lengths. Transmitting radio signals over short distances works best with short wave lengths, while long distances require longer wave lengths. For trans-oceanic communication, the longest wave lengths are most effective. Therefore, the “long-haul” stations operate in the frequency range just above 10,000 cycles per second and transmit with wave lengths of 30,000 m and shorter.

Pl. XII.–Broadcasting Station of the American Telephone and Telegraph Company on the Roof of the Walker-Lispenard Bldg. in New York City Where the Long-distance Telephone Lines Terminate.
Pl. XII.–Broadcasting Station of the American Telephone and Telegraph Company on the Roof of the Walker-Lispenard Building in New York City Where the Long-distance Telephone Lines End.
251LETTER 24
By wire and by radio
Dear Boy:
Dear Boy:
The simplest wire telephone-circuit is formed by a transmitter, a receiver, a battery, and the connecting wire. If two persons are to carry on a conversation each must have this amount of equipment. The apparatus might be arranged as in Fig. 129. This set-up, however, requires four wires between the two stations and you know the telephone company uses only two wires. Let us find the principle upon which its system operates because it is the solution of many different problems including that of wire-to-radio connections.
The simplest wire telephone circuit consists of a transmitter, a receiver, a battery, and connecting wires. For two people to have a conversation, each must have this equipment. The setup might look like what's shown in Fig. 129. However, this arrangement needs four wires between the two stations, while the telephone company only uses two wires. Let's explore the principle behind their system because it addresses many different issues, including wire-to-radio connections.

Imagine four wire resistances connected together to form a square as in Fig. 130. Suppose there are two pairs of equal resistances, namely R1 and R2, and Z1 and Z2. If we connect a generator, G, between the junctions a and b there will be two separate streams of electrons, one through the R-side and the other through 252 the Z-side of the circuit. These streams, of course, will not be of the same size for the larger stream will flow through the side which offers the smaller resistance.
Imagine four wire resistors connected together to form a square as shown in Fig. 130. Let's say there are two pairs of equal resistors, specifically R1 and R2, and Z1 and Z2. If we connect a power source, G, between the junctions a and b, there will be two separate flows of electrons: one through the R-side and the other through the Z-side of the circuit. Naturally, these flows won't be the same size because the larger flow will occur through the side with the lower resistance.

Half the e. m. f. between a and b is used up in sending the stream half the distance. Half is used between a and the points c and d, and the other half between c and d and the other end. It doesn’t make any difference whether we follow the stream from a to c or from a to d, it takes half the e. m. f. to keep this stream going. Points c and d, therefore, are in the same condition of being “half-way electrically” from a to b. The result is that there can be no current through any wire which we connect between c and d.
Half the electromotive force (e.m.f.) between a and b is used up in sending the stream half the distance. Half is used between a and the points c and d, and the other half between c and d and the other end. It doesn’t matter whether we follow the stream from a to c or from a to d; it takes half the e.m.f. to keep this stream flowing. Points c and d are therefore in the same state of being “halfway electrically” between a and b. As a result, there can be no current through any wire we connect between c and d.
Suppose, therefore, that we connect a telephone receiver between c and d. No current flows in it and no sound is emitted by it. Now suppose the resistance of Z2 is that of a telephone line which stretches from one telephone station to another. Suppose also that Z1 is a telephone line exactly like Z2 except that it doesn’t go anywhere at all because it is all shut up in a little box. We’ll call Z1 an artificial telephone line. We ought to call it, as little children would say, a “make-believe” telephone line. It doesn’t fool us but it does fool the electrons for they can’t tell the difference between the real line Z2 and the artificial line Z1. We can make a very good artificial line by using a condenser and a resistance. The condenser introduces something of the capacity effects 253 which I told you were always present in a circuit formed by a pair of wires.
Suppose we connect a telephone receiver between c and d. No current flows through it, and no sound comes from it. Now imagine that the resistance of Z2 represents a telephone line that runs from one phone station to another. Also, let's say that Z1 is a telephone line just like Z2, except it doesn't go anywhere because it’s confined in a small box. We’ll call Z1 an artificial telephone line. Childishly, we might call it a “make-believe” telephone line. It may not trick us, but it does deceive the electrons since they can’t distinguish between the real line Z2 and the artificial line Z1. We can create a pretty good artificial line using a condenser and a resistor. The condenser introduces some of the capacity effects 253 that I mentioned are always present in a circuit made by two wires.

At the other telephone station let us duplicate this apparatus, using the same real line in both cases. Instead of just any generator of an alternating e. m. f. let us use a telephone transmitter. We connect the transmitter through a transformer. The system then looks like that of Fig. 131. When some one talks at station 1 there is no current through his receiver because it is connected to c and d, while the e. m. f. of the transmitter is applied to a and b. The transmitter sets up two electron streams between a and b, and the stream which flows through the Z-side of the square goes out to station 2. At this station the electrons have three paths between d and b. I have marked these by arrows and you see that one of them is through the receiver. The current which is started by the transmitter at station 1 will therefore operate the receiver at station 2 but not at its own station. Of course station 2 can talk to 1 in the same way.
At the other phone station, let’s duplicate this setup using the same actual line in both cases. Instead of any regular generator of an alternating e.m.f., let’s use a telephone transmitter. We connect the transmitter through a transformer. The system then looks like what is shown in Fig. 131. When someone talks at station 1, there is no current flowing through their receiver because it’s connected to c and d, while the e.m.f. of the transmitter is applied to a and b. The transmitter creates two streams of electrons between a and b, and the stream that goes through the Z-side of the square heads to station 2. At this station, the electrons have three paths between d and b. I’ve marked these with arrows, and you can see that one of them goes through the receiver. The current generated by the transmitter at station 1 will therefore power the receiver at station 2 but not its own receiver. Of course, station 2 can communicate with station 1 in the same way.
The actual set-up used by the telephone company 254is a little different from that which I have shown because it uses a single common battery at a central office between two subscribers. The general principle, however, is the same.
The actual setup used by the telephone company 254 is a bit different from what I've shown because it uses a single common battery at a central office for two subscribers. The general principle, though, is the same.

It won’t make any difference if we use equal inductance coils, instead of the R-resistances, and connect the transmitter to them inductively as shown in Fig. 132. So far as that is concerned we can also use a transformer between the receiver and the points c and d, as shown in the same figure.
It won't matter if we use equal inductance coils instead of the R-resistances and connect the transmitter to them inductively as shown in Fig. 132. In that regard, we can also use a transformer between the receiver and points c and d, as shown in the same figure.

We are now ready to put in radio equipment at station 2. In place of the telephone receiver at station 2 we connect a radio transmitter. Then whatever a person at station 1 says goes by wire to 2 and on out by radio. In place of the telephone transmitter 255at station 2 we connect a radio receiver. Whatever that receives by radio is detected and goes by wire to the listener at station 1. In Fig. 133 I have shown the equipment of station 2. There you have the connections for wire to radio and vice versa.
We are now ready to install radio equipment at station 2. Instead of the telephone receiver at station 2, we will connect a radio transmitter. So, whatever someone at station 1 says will go through a wire to station 2 and then transmit out via radio. Instead of the telephone transmitter 255 at station 2, we will connect a radio receiver. Everything it picks up by radio is detected and sent through a wire to the listener at station 1. In Fig. 133, I have shown the equipment for station 2. There you can see the connections for wire to radio and vice versa.
One of the most interesting developments of recent years is that of “wired wireless” or “carrier-current telephony” over wires. Suppose that instead of broadcasting from the antenna at station 2 we arrange to have its radio transmitter supply current to a wire circuit. We use this same pair of wires for receiving from the distant station. We can do this if we treat the radio transmitter and receiver exactly like the telephone instruments of Fig. 132 and connect them to a square of resistances. One of these resistances is, of course, the line between the stations. I have shown the general arrangement in Fig. 134.
One of the most interesting developments in recent years is “wired wireless” or “carrier-current telephony” over wires. Imagine that instead of broadcasting from the antenna at station 2, we set up its radio transmitter to supply current to a wire circuit. We use the same pair of wires to receive signals from the distant station. We can achieve this by treating the radio transmitter and receiver just like the telephone devices in Fig. 132 and connecting them to a grid of resistances. One of these resistances is, of course, the line between the stations. I've illustrated the general setup in Fig. 134.
You see what the square of resistances, or “bridge” really does for us. It lets us use a single pair of wires for messages whether they are coming or going. It does that because it lets us connect a transmitter and also a receiver to a single pair of wires in such a way that the transmitter can’t affect the receiver. Whatever the transmitter sends out goes along the wires to the distant receiver but doesn’t affect the receiver at the sending station. This bridge permits this whether the transmitter and receiver are radio instruments or are the ordinary telephone instruments.
You can see what the resistance square, or "bridge," actually does for us. It allows us to use just one pair of wires for messages regardless of their direction. It does this by letting us connect both a transmitter and a receiver to the same pair of wires in a way that the transmitter doesn't interfere with the receiver. Whatever the transmitter sends travels along the wires to the distant receiver without impacting the receiver at the sending station. This bridge enables this whether the transmitter and receiver are radio devices or regular telephone instruments.

256By its aid we may send a modulated high-frequency current over a pair of wires and receive from the same pair of wires the high-frequency current which is generated and modulated at the distant end of the line. It lets us send and receive over the same pair of wires the same sort of a modulated current as we would supply to an antenna in radio-telephone 257transmitting. It is the same sort of a current but it need not be anywhere near as large because we aren’t broadcasting; we are sending directly to the station of the other party to our conversation.
256With its help, we can send a modulated high-frequency current over a pair of wires and receive the high-frequency current that is generated and modulated at the far end of the line. It allows us to send and receive the same type of modulated current through the same pair of wires as we would supply to an antenna for radio telephone 257transmitting. It’s the same kind of current, but it doesn't have to be nearly as powerful because we aren’t broadcasting; we’re sending directly to the other person’s station in our conversation.
If we duplicate the apparatus we can use the same pair of wires for another telephone conversation without interfering with the first. Of course, we have to use a different frequency of alternating current for each of the two conversations. We can send these two different modulated high-frequency currents over the same pair of wires and separate them by tuning at the distant end just as well as we do in radio. I won’t sketch out for you the tuned circuits by which this separation is made. It’s enough to give you the idea.
If we duplicate the equipment, we can use the same pair of wires for another phone conversation without disrupting the first one. Of course, we need to use a different frequency of alternating current for each of the two conversations. We can send these two different modulated high-frequency currents over the same pair of wires and separate them by tuning at the other end, just like we do in radio. I won't outline the tuned circuits that make this separation possible. It's enough to give you the general idea.
In that way, a single pair of wires can be used for transmitting, simultaneously and without any interference, several different telephone conversations. It takes very much less power than would radio transmission and the conversations are secret. The ordinary telephone conversation can go on at the same time without any interference with those which are being carried by the modulations in high-frequency currents. A total of five conversations over the same pair of wires is the present practice.
In that way, a single pair of wires can be used to transmit multiple phone conversations at the same time without any interference. It requires much less power than radio transmission, and the conversations remain private. Regular phone conversations can continue simultaneously without disrupting the ones transmitted through high-frequency current modulations. Currently, it’s common to carry a total of five conversations over the same pair of wires.
This method is used between many of the large cities of the U. S. because it lets one pair of wires do the work of five. That means a saving, for copper wire costs money. Of course, all the special apparatus also costs money. You can see, therefore, that 258this method wouldn’t be economical between cities very close together because all that is saved by not having to buy so much wire is spent in building special apparatus and in taking care of it afterwards. For long lines, however, by not having to buy five times as much wire, the Bell Company saves more than it costs to build and maintain the extra special apparatus.
This method is used between many large cities in the U.S. because it allows one pair of wires to do the work of five. That means savings since copper wire is expensive. Of course, all the special equipment also costs money. So, you can see that 258 this method wouldn’t be cost-effective between cities that are very close to each other because what you save from not buying as much wire gets spent on building and maintaining the special equipment afterwards. However, for long distances, by not having to buy five times as much wire, the Bell Company saves more than it costs to build and maintain the extra special equipment.
I implied a moment ago why this system is called a “carrier-current” system; it is because “the high-frequency currents carry in their modulations the speech significance.” Sometimes it is called a system of “multiplex” telephony because it permits more than one message at a time.
I hinted earlier at why this system is called a “carrier-current” system; it’s because “the high-frequency currents carry the meaning of speech in their modulations.” It’s also sometimes referred to as a “multiplex” telephony system because it allows for multiple messages to be sent at the same time.
This same general principle is also applied to the making of a multiplex system of telegraphy. In the multiplex telephone system we pictured transmitting and receiving sets very much like radio-telephone sets. If instead of transmitting speech each transmitter was operated as a C-W transmitter then it would transmit telegraph messages. In the same frequency range there can be more telegraph systems operated simultaneously without interfering with each other, for you remember how many cycles each radio-telephone message requires. For that reason the multiplex telegraph system which operates by carrier-currents permits as many as ten different telegraph messages simultaneously.
This same general principle is also applied to creating a multiplex telegraph system. In the multiplex telephone system, we imagined transmitting and receiving equipment similar to radio-telephone sets. If, instead of transmitting speech, each transmitter operated as a continuous wave (C-W) transmitter, it would send telegraph messages. Within the same frequency range, multiple telegraph systems can operate simultaneously without interfering with one another, as you know how many cycles each radio-telephone message needs. Because of this, the multiplex telegraph system that runs on carrier currents allows for up to ten different telegraph messages at the same time.
You remember that I told you how capacity effects rob the distant end of a pair of wires of the alternating current which is being sent to them. That is 259always true but the effect is not very great unless the frequency of the alternating current is high. It’s enough, however, so that every few hundred miles it is necessary to connect into the circuit an audion amplifier. This is true of carrier currents especially, but also true of the voice-frequency currents of ordinary telephony. The latter, however, are not weakened, that is, “attenuated,” as much and consequently do not need to be amplified as much to give good intelligibility at the distant receiver.
You remember I mentioned how capacity effects reduce the alternating current sent to the far end of a pair of wires. That’s always the case, but the effect isn’t very significant unless the frequency of the alternating current is high. Still, it’s enough that every few hundred miles, we need to add an audion amplifier to the circuit. This is especially true for carrier currents, but it also applies to the voice-frequency currents of regular telephone lines. However, the latter aren't weakened, or “attenuated,” as much and therefore don’t need to be amplified as much to ensure good clarity at the distant receiver.

In a telephone circuit over such a long distance as from New York City to San Francisco it is usual to insert amplifiers at about a dozen points along the route. Of course, these amplifiers must work for transmission in either direction, amplifying speech on its way to San Francisco or in the opposite 260direction. At each of the amplifying stations, or “repeater stations,” as they are usually called, two vacuum tube amplifiers are used, one for each direction. To connect these with the line so that each may work in the right direction there are used two of the bridges or resistance squares. You can see from the sketch of Fig. 135 how an alternating current from the east will be amplified and sent on to the west, or vice versa.
In a telephone circuit covering a long distance, like from New York City to San Francisco, it's common to install amplifiers at about a dozen points along the way. These amplifiers need to work for calls in both directions, enhancing the voice whether it's heading to San Francisco or coming back. At each amplifying station, known as “repeater stations,” two vacuum tube amplifiers are used, one for each direction. To connect these to the line so they operate correctly, two bridges or resistance squares are used. You can see from the sketch in Fig. 135 how an alternating current from the east gets amplified and sent west, or the other way around. 260

261There are a large number of such repeater stations in the United States along the important telephone routes. In Fig. 136 I am showing you the location of those along the route of the famous “transcontinental telephone-circuit.” This shows also a radio-telephone connection between the coast of California and Catalina Island. Conversations have been held between this island and a ship in the Atlantic Ocean, as shown in the sketch. The conversation was made possible by the use of the vacuum tube and the bridge circuit. Part of the way it was by wire and part by radio. Wire and radio tie nicely together because both operate on the same general principles and use much of the same apparatus.
261There are many repeater stations in the United States along key telephone routes. In Fig. 136, I'm showing you the locations along the path of the famous “transcontinental telephone circuit.” This also indicates a radio-telephone connection between the coast of California and Catalina Island. Conversations have taken place between this island and a ship in the Atlantic Ocean, as illustrated in the sketch. The conversation was enabled by the use of the vacuum tube and the bridge circuit. Part of the connection was via wire and part was via radio. Wire and radio work well together because both operate on similar principles and use much of the same equipment.
A-battery for tubes, 42
A-battery for tubes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Accumulator, 29
Accumulator, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Acid, action of hydrogen in, 7
Hydrogen ion activity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Air, constitution of, 10
Air, composition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
AC ammeter, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
calibration of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
construction of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
Amplification, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
one step of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Amplitude of vibration, 155
Vibration amplitude, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Antenna current variation, 141
Antenna current change, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Arlington tests, 233
Arlington exams, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Artificial telephone line, 252
Virtual phone line, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Atom, concept of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
nucleus of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
neutral, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
Atomic number, 13
Atomic number, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Atoms, differences, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
types of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
movement of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__
Attenuation of current in wires, 259
Current drop in wires, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Audibility meter, 218
Audibility meter, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Audio amplifier, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
limitations of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
B-battery for tubes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
effect on features, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Banked wound coils, 228
Bank wound coils, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Band of frequencies, 249
Band of frequencies, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Beat note detection, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Bell system, Arlington transmitter, 249
Bell system, Arlington transmitter, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Blocking of tube, reason for, 171
Tube blockage reason, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Blue vitriol, 16
Copper sulfate, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Bridge circuit, 255
Bridge circuit, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Bureau of Standards, 50
Standards Bureau, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
C-battery for tubes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
version of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
for detection, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__
Calibration of a receiver, 214
Receiver calibration, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Capacity effects, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
removal of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Carrier current modulation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
telephony, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Characteristic curve of transformer, 64
Transformer characteristic curve, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Chemistry, 8
Chemistry, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Common battery system, 254
Standard battery system, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Connection for wire to radio, 254
Wire connection to radio, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Continuous waves, 86
Continuous waves, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Copper, atomic number of, 13
Copper, atomic number __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Copper sulphate, in solution, 21
Copper sulfate solution, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Crystals, atomic structure, 147
Crystals, atomic structure, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Crystal detectors, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
characteristic of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
circuit of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
theory of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__
Current, temporary, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
radio, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Damped oscillations, 114
Damped vibrations, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Demodulation, 231
Demodulation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Detection, explained, 146
Detection, explained, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Detectors, audio, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
crystal, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Direct currents, 205
Direct currents, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Dissociation, 22
Dissociation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Distortion, of wave form, 163
Waveform distortion, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Dry battery, 27
Dry battery, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Earth, atomic constitution, 11
Earth, atomic structure, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Effective ampere value, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
effective volt value, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Efficiency, of regenerative circuit, 182
Efficiency of regenerative circuit, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Electrical charge, 22
Electric charge, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Electricity, electric current, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Electrolyte, definition of, 34
Definition of electrolyte, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Electron streams, laws of attraction, 200
Electron streams, laws of attraction, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
E. M. F., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
alternating, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
of self-induction, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
Ether, 88
Ether, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Feed-back circuit, 182
Feedback loop, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Frequency, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
its effect on pitch, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
interval, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__;
natural, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__;
of voice, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__
Fundamental note, of string, 157
Fundamental note, of string, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Gravity battery, theory of, 23
Gravity battery theory, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Grid, action of, 47;
condenser, 169;
current, 173;
leak, 171;
leak, construction, 172, 216;
of audion, 41
Grid action, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
condenser, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
current, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
leak, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__;
construction leak, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__;
audion, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__
Harmonics, 160
Harmonics, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Helium, properties of, 9
Helium, properties of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Henry, 83
Henry, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Heterodyne, 181
Heterodyne, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Hot-wire ammeter, 51
Hot-wire ammeter, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Human voice, mechanism of, 152
Human voice, mechanism of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Hydrogen, reaction in acid, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
atom of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Intermediate-frequency amplification, 242
Intermediate-frequency amplification, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Induction, principle of, 208
Induction principle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Inducto-meter, 109
Inductometer, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Input circuit, 187
Input circuit, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Interference, 249
Interference, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Internal resistance, 191
Internal resistance, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Ion definition, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
positive and negative, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
Ionization, 20
Ionization, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Larynx, 153
Larynx, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Laws of attraction, 204
Laws of attraction, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Loading coil, 224
Loading coil, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Loop antenna, 198
Loop antenna, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Magnetism, 202
Magnetism, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Matter, constitution of, 5
Matter, constitution of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Megohm, 172
Megohm, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Microfarad, 104
Microfarad, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Mil-ampere, 71
Milliamp, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Mil-henry, 83
Mil-henry, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Modulation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__
Types of molecules, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
movement of them, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
μv, 190
μv, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Multiplex telegraphy, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
telephony, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Mutual inductance, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
variation of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Natural frequency, 161
Natural frequency, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Nitrogen, 10
Nitrogen, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Ohm, defined, 64
Ohm, defined, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Organ pipe, 160
Organ pipe, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Oscillations, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
damped, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
to start, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
intensity of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__;
natural frequency of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__
Output circuit, 187
Output circuit, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Overtones, 159
Overtones, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Oxygen, percentage in air, 10
Oxygen percentage in air, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Phase, 180
Phase, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Plate, of an audion, 41
Plate of an audio device, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Plunger type of instrument, 205
Plunger-type instrument, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Polarity of a coil, 204
Coil polarity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Power, defined, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
electrical unit of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Proton, properties of, 4
Proton properties, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Radio current, modulation of, 145
Radio wave modulation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Radio-frequency amplification, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
limitations, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Radio-frequency amp, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Rating of tubes, 235
Rating of tubes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Reception, essential operations in, 235
Reception, essential operations in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Regenerative circuit, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
frequency of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Repeater stations, 261
Repeater stations, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Resistance measurement, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
non-inductive, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
square, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
Resonance, 161
Resonance, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Resonance curve, 117
Resonance curve, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Retard coils, 210
Retard coils, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Saturation, 38
Saturation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Sea water, atomic constitution of, 11
Sea water, atomic makeup of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Self-inductance, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
unit of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Side bands, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
regarding wavelengths, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Silicon, percentage in earth, 11
Silicon, Earth's percentage, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Sodium chloride, in solution, 19
Sodium chloride in solution, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Sound, production of, 152
Sound production, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Speech, to transmit by radio, 230
Radio transmission of speech, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Speed of light, 122
Speed of light, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Standard cell, 58
Standard cell, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Sulphuric acid, 22
Sulfuric acid, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Super-heterodyne, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
advantages of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Phone receiver, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
theory of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Telephone transmitter, 142
Phone transmitter, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Telephony, by wire, 253
Wired phone service, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Tickler coil, 182
Tickler coil, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Transcontinental telephone line, 261
Transcontinental phone line, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Transmission, essential operations in, 230
Transmission, key operations in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Transmitter, Arlington, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
continuous wave, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
for high power, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__
Tubes, connected in parallel, 234
Tubes connected in parallel, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Tuning, curve, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
sharp, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
with series capacitor, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
Undamped waves (see continuous waves), 86
Undamped waves (see continuous waves), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Vacuum tube, 35, 40;
characteristics of, 67;
construction of, 205;
modulator, 239;
three-electrode, 41;
two-electrode, 42
Vacuum tube, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
features of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
design of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__;
modulator, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__;
triode, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__;
diode, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__
Variometer, 108
Variometer, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Vibrating string, study of, 154
Vibrating string, analysis of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Vocal cords, 153
Vocal cords, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Voice frequencies, 163
Voice frequencies, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Volt, definition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
measurement of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Voltmeter calibration, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
construction, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Watt, 235
Watt, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Wave form, 182
Waveform, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Wavelength, relationship to frequency, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
defined, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
Wire, inductance of, 104
Inductance of wire, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Wire telephony, 253
Wired phone service, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Wired wireless, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
advantages of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
X-rays, 147
X-rays, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Zero coupling, 177
Zero coupling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Zinc, electrode for battery, 23
Zinc, battery electrode, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!